






A 












* «U1 









\> 






iV 



8 4 V b. 









>/. v^ 






•0- v 




<£> 






%■ 



* , <3^ 



,0 0, 






S° * 






























o% -K* 



a \ \ 









^ 


•>*, 






<^v 






o 


V 















* -o>* 











£l£ TaSCU(Jl/dS 
AjJirjv' 



THE KABBALA: 



OR 



The True Science of Light ; 



AN INTRODUCTION TO THE 



PHILOSOPHY AND THEOSOPHY 



ANCIENT SAGES. 




TOGETHER WITH A CHAPTER ON 



LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 



By S. PANCOAST, M.D. 



PHILADELPHIA 
J. M. S TODD ART & CO 







\\ 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1877, by 

S. PANCOAST, M.D., 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



TO THE 

TRUE SCIENTISTS, 

NOT ONLY OF THE UNITED STATES, BUT OF THE ENTIRE WORLD— 
THOSE WHO SINCERELY DESIRE TO DISCOVER THE TRUTHS OF 
SCIENCE, WHOSE MINDS ARE NOT CLOUDED BY PRECON- 
CEIVED NOTIONS AND THEORIES, BUT ARE OPEN TO 
CONVICTION, READY AND ANXIOUS TO LEARN 
ALL THAT MAY BE LEARNED FROM THE 
ANCIENT PHILOSOPHERS AS WELL AS 
FROM INVESTIGATION OF THE 
PHENOMENA OF LIGHT; 

ESPECIALLY TO THE 

NOBLE ARMY OF TRUE PATHOLOGISTS, THOSE WHO FOLLOW THI 

PHILANTHROPIC PROFESSION OF MEDICINE BECAUSE OF TRUH 

HEARTFELT SYMPATHY WITH SUFFERING HUMANITY, 

THIS LITTLE VOLUME, DEVOTED TO 

THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT, 

ESPECIALLY IN ITS 

KELATIONS TO LIFE AND HEALTH, AND ITS APPLI- 
CABILITY AS A EEMEDY IN DISEASE, IS 



^ffettiotratclg anb HUsptctfallg gtbitattb 
BY THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE 



The Author does not deem an extended Preface 
requisite, in offering to the Public the result of Thirty 
Years' Patient Study of the Science of Light as taught 
not only by modern Scientists but by the Ancient 
Philosophers who, as the reader will discover, per- 
haps with astonishment, knew far more than readers 
of Popular Works on Scientific subjects would imag- 
ine, of the true facts of Science ; in studying the Kab- 
bala and Kabbalistic Literature, we have taken no- 
thing for granted, but, by severe test-experiments and 
critical observation, have " tried all things and held 
fast that which was good " — that which stood the most 
exacting tests ! We do not apologize to any one for 
our book — the only persons who can look for an 
apology are those Scientists whose pet-theories we con- 
trovert, but we decline to tender any apology to them, 
because we have been influenced by no malice or pre- 
judice, but have written purely in the interest of 
Truth ; we believe what we have written is every word 
true, and only ask those who dissent from any of our 



l* 



6 PEEFACE. 

views to apply the tests of careful experiments and 
investigation, and if these tests prove us in error we 
shall unhesitatingly, nay cheerfully, yield. Mean- 
while we add but one word in the form of a familiar 
adage: "Truth is mighty and must prevail!" and 
we remain the Headers' 

Sincere Friend 

THE AUTHOR. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Introduction 9 



CHAPTER I. 
Ancient Ideas op Light and Heat 17 

CHAPTER II. 
The True Science of Light — Truths and Theories — 
What we Know, and What we Believe 54 

CHAPTER III. 
Light Manifested in Atmospheric Electricity and 
in Terrestrial Magnetism 96 

CHAPTER IV. 
Material Forms and Vital Dynamics 127 

CHAPTER V. 
The Human Organism and its Vital Dynamics 159 

CHAPTER VI. 
The Centres and Original Source op Vital Dynam- 
ics within the Human Organism, and the Great 

Actual Source ;.. 185 

7 



8 CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER VII. 

PAGE 

How to Assist Nature in Banishing Disease from 
the Human Organism 225 

CHAPTER VIII. 
Light and its Eays Nature's Own and Only Reme- 
dies for Disease— How to Apply Light to the 
Human Organism 241 

CHAPTER IX. 
Light in the Vegetable Kingdom, 283 

CHAPTER X. 

Light the Sole Source of Life — Light the Devel- 
oper of Material Forms — Forms Developed Solely 
to Manifest Life — Light Nature's Means of Pre- 
serving Life — Hence, Light Nature's Means of 
Banishing Disease by Restoring the Equilibrium 
that constitutes Health 295 



INTRODUCTION. 



It is a trite saying that " There is Nothing New 
under the Sun I" Like many other familiar phrases, 
this is frequently uttered without any real perception 
of its scope — nothing new, indeed, and yet the world 
moves ever onward! then what is Progress, or is there 
any thing or any idea, to which the word Progress can 
be applied ? Every now and then the world is elec- 
trified by some nevj idea, or some new discovery! then, 
lo ! some delver in ancient lore, some seeker in for- 
gotten mines, shows that the new idea is ages old, the 
new discovery nearly as old as the world itself. Facts 
are ascertained, demonstrated, taught, learned and 

forgotten; Theories, vague and uncertain even in 

the minds of their weavers, are accepted for Science ! 
then, lo ! the old-forgotten Facts spring again to view 
and the Theories flee to be forgotten in their turn, only 
with this difference that there is no resurrection for 
them! 

It is not very many generations since, the world 
knew nothing of the Solar System and its marvelous 
revolutions and the laws that govern its Sun, Moon, 
Stars and Planets — Sir Isaac Newton made some as- 
tounding discoveries and there was doubt, astonish- 
ment, consternation ; the world was not unwilling to 

9 



10 INTRODUCTION. 

believe, but unable. To-day, men look back and 
wonder how any one ever believed otherwise than in 
accord with the now accepted Science of Astronomy, 
which has made such acquisitions of facts since Newton 
assigned our Sun his rightful place and authority in 
the System that Astronomy is almost an Exact Sci- 
ence. Since Newton's day, it has been ascertained that 
many centuries before, even in the sixth century before 
the Era of " the Sun of Righteousness," the famous 
Ionian Philosopher, Anaximander, the first systematic 
writer on Philosophy, had an inkling of some of the 
marvelous facts of Astronomy ; strangely mixed up 
with wild theories, were the ideas of the Solar centre 
with the earth and heavenly bodies revolving around 
it. Then we learn that the wonderful Pythagoras 
actually knew all the chief facts concerning the move- 
ments of the Sun, the Stars, the Planets — he even 
knew that the Stars were Suns of other Systems like 
ours, and that the Planets were worlds cheered and 
animated with life similar to, if not like, ours; he 
knew, too, the two Physical Forces, Attraction and 
Repulsion; nay, he knew, what modern Science has 
not yet fully rediscovered, that the visible Suns were 
emanations from and dependent upon an invisible 
original Central Sun, the Sun of the Universe, the 
Celestial Power whence the forces of Nature were de- 
rived. We learn that there were others, from time to 
time, who knew more or less of the truth, until Coper- 
nicus who knew nearly all, and Galileo who had to 
answer to the Roman hierarchy for knowing more than 
the Church. Indeed, so much of the Newtonian 
Philosophy do we find in the ancient, that we cannot 



INTRODUCTION. 11 

doubt he had been exploring the old mines of Kab- 
balistic lore, and had arrived at his great discoveries 
by following up clews gained therefrom. 

As we shall show, the old Kabbala, with its curious 
and comprehensive symbol language, is at once an 
elaborate System of Natural Philosophy and a pro- 
found system of Theology — an illuminated exposition 
of the mysterious truths of Nature and of that higher 
Science which the Book of Nature unfolds to the en- 
lightened eye of the Soul, the Science of Religion. 
Our readers would be slow to realize, many of them 
even unwilling to recognize, the fact that the grand 
old Kabbalistic Theosophy was the native root, the 
central trunk, whence all the religions the world has 
ever known sprang, as shoots and branches from a 
parent-tree — yet this is absolutely true. The Holy 
Bible is a translation into words of the symbols of the 
Kabbala. The reader would be astonished if he could 
read the Sacred Book in the Light of the Kabbala ; 
first, to discover their close accordance; second, to 
find internal evidences, so clear as to be irrefragable, 
that the Book of Nature (Science) and the Written 
Word are one in source and significance ; and third, 
to learn that the Bible is not the book of enigmas, 
mysteries, concealments that ordinary commentaries 
would make us believe, with their forced, incongru- 
ous, mysterious definitions and elucidations, but that 
the Bible is absolutely the ivritten revelation of God's 
work, ivill, purposes and ultimate purpose in creation 
and redemption, and of His essential character and 
attributes as well. 

Our scope in this work, and its specific design, will 



12 INTRODUCTION. 

not permit us to set forth and make plain, in detail, 
the noble, incomparable Kabbala, but we have in con- 
templation the publication of a large, fall, candid ex- 
hibit of what the Kabbala is, has done, is doing and 
shall do, for the world. We may, however, declare 
our honest conviction here, and show hereafter the 
grounds upon which that conviction is based, that a 
just appreciation and knowledge of the Kabbala would 
stop the terrible Infidelity that is defiantly stalking 
through the world, uprooting, tearing down, razing, 
actually burying, Faith in God and His salvation. 
Few intelligent men are inclined to adopt the absurd- 
ities of Infidelity, many yield a quasi acceptance, and 
consent not to believe the Bible, because they do not 
understand its glorious truths and are not satisfied with 
the explanations and elucidations offered by unenlightened 
commentators— -the Kabbala is an authorized, 
Divinely illuminated commentary on Nature 
and the Bible, which makes both so plain and 
intelligible that "the wayfaring men, though 

FOOLS, SHALL NOT ERR THEREIN." It is Only " The 

fool that hath said in his heart, There is no God!" 
many others say so with their lips who would accept 
the truth if they could but understand it. It is an 
error, and the prolific source of Infidelity, to main- 
tain that men endowed by God with reason must be- 
lieve what is not revealed to their reason — the Bible 
is the Revelation, not the Concealment, of God, and 
all that is revealed therein may be comprehended by 
the illuminated reason ! and we shall show that this 
illumination is not restricted to a few, but is within 
the reach of every man who will diligently and de* 



INTRODUCTION. 13 

voutly cultivate 'the Subjective, Godlike Faculties of 
his Soul; these Faculties, " Self-Consciousness, Con- 
science, Sanctified Intuition and Imagination, and 
Prescience," are implanted by God in every Human 
Soul, and only the Man who cultivates these can re- 
ceive the high gift of inward illumination — only those 
who are "born again" from the death of sin can be- 
come "children of Light." But, of this we shall 
speak at some length and more than once, in the en- 
suing pages. It is very probable that, as before in- 
timated, we shall publish a larger volume especially 
devoted to the discussion of the Kabbala and Kabba- 
listic Literature, in the course of a few months — a 
work that thirty years' patient, conscientious study 
has perhaps fitted us to undertake. 

But, the special purpose of this volume is to pro- 
mote the well-being of mankind in this probationary 
world, by advocating Light and its Rays as the best 
remedial means for the Human Organism, when from 
any cause, internal or external, the equilibrium of 
health is disturbed, and disease wastes the body and 
deranges the mind — nay, even when there is no clearly 
defined disease, but only the feebleness and indispo- 
sition for physical or mental effort. Of course, to 
apply any remedy successfully, it is essential to know 
the characteristics and qualities of the remedy itself 
and the features and functions of the Organism in the 
condition of health ; there are idiosyncrasies or differ- 
ences in individuals, but the Human Organism, in 
health, is much the same not only throughout each 
race but even throughout the family of Man, and, 
while some Medicines act promptly and effectively in 



1 4 INTRODUCTION . 

some cases, refuse to act in others, and act injuriously 
in still others, where the symptoms are identical, yet 
Light and its Kays will be found exceptional in this : 
that they seldom fail to effect just what they are de- 
signed to effect, when rightly administered — we have, 
in fact, seldom found them to fail in our practice. We 
attribute this exceptional efficacy to the fact that Light 
is essentially and especially Nature's remedy, and, 
therefore, peculiarly adapted to assist Nature in ban- 
ishing disease and restoring health. 

In the ensuing chapters, we believe we shall follow 
the natural order in the discussion, first, of Light as 
known and taught in Ancient Philosophy ; secondly, 
as we view it — our views being based upon study, ex- 
periments and observation; thirdly, as manifested in 
Electricity and Magnetism; and fourthly, as mani- 
fested in Vital Dynamics — in Life. Then, we shall 
define the true doctrine of Development, or Evolu- 
tion, showing that Light is the Developer or Evolver 
of material forms, and that the purpose of Material 
Development or Evolution is simply to provide 
bodies for the Objective or visible manifestation of 
Light as Life. And then, we shall show that in 
Man's Organism the highest possible Material Devel- 
opment is attained, and that within that form are im- 
planted certain Subjective Faculties that distinguish 
Man and place him on a plane higher than the high- 
est Animal — far higher than the highest Animal as 
compared with the worm, is Man as compared with it, 
simply because in him the Life-principle that per- 
vades all life is Individualized and Personified into a 
responsible, " Living Soul." We shall then proceed 



INTRODUCTION. 



15 



to show the characteristics and functional constitution 
of the Human body. 

With the foundation thus laid, in the explanation 
of Light and its Rays in all their manifestations and 
operations, and of the Human Organism in its mate- 
rial composition and organic arrangement, we shall 
proceed to explain how the one can be best applied to 
the other, citing illustrative cases in which we have 
successfully applied the Red and Blue rays. 

This will conclude our special subject, but, as con- 
siderable attention has lately been evoked to the ap- 
plicability of Light-rays in the propagation of Fruits, 
Vegetables, etc., we shall add a chapter on " Light in 
the Vegetable Kingdom." 

It will be observed, that we follow no one individ- 
ual thinker or class of thinkers in our views — we 
accept the established facts of Science, but take issue 
with some of the almost universally accepted theories — 
for example, we cannot accept the " Undulatory " or 
" Wave Theory " of the transmission of Light, and 
we shall freely reject it. More important than this, 
however, is our dissent from all the "accepted" 
definitions of Light — we believe that Light is the 
Power or Force of Nature, whence are derived all 
forces, Physical and Vital, and, therefore, we believe 
that " The True Science of Light " comprehends all 
other Natural Sciences or Philosophies. But we ask 
no one to accept our views without investigation, and 
we shall state the grounds upon which we rest them 
frankly and in detail, so far as the design and scope 
of this work will permit. 

The reader will observe, also, that we accord to 



16 INTRODUCTION. 

General Pleasonton the merit and honor of having 
made an exceedingly important discovery, but it must 
be borne in mind that others in this country and in 
Europe have long been experimenting with Light and 
Light-rays ; some have failed, but others, especially in 
the direction of therapeutic application of the rays, 
have had most encouraging success. We have been 
studying, investigating and experimenting in this di- 
rection for more than thirty years, and we believe our 
successes have been such that we dare claim the merit 
and honor of determining the positive, absolute appli- 
cability of Light, and especially of the Red and Blue 
rays, in the treatment of Disease of almost every type, 
but notably in Diseases that have their rise, or localize 
themselves in their influences, in the Nervous System. 
We have studied, as we write, purely in the interest 
of Suffering Humanity to whose welfare we dedicated 
our time, talents and all that we have and are, when 
we adopted the profession of Medicine. 



Blue and Red Light 



CHAPTER I. 

ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT 

By many centuries antedating the Christian, and 
older than the Mosaic, Scriptures — earlier, indeed, in 
its origin than the Egyptian or any other system of 
religion or philosophy of which aught is now known, 
the Kabbala has all the claims to respectful considera- 
tion that antiquity can confer ; and these claims are 
enhanced and intensified when we discover tokens, 
not merely of its earlier origin, but of its important 
influence, in their structure and teachings, upon the 
religions of all lands and ages. Yet but few, even of 
the thinkers and thought-producers of recent days, 
know enough of the wondrous Kabbala to have the 
faintest conception of the vast debt the world of all 
ages has owed to that grand system of religion and 
philosophy. Using the symbols, quoting the lan- 
guage, repeating the ideas, — nay, teaching and main- 
taining the very doctrines, of the Kabbala, writers of 
modern times are generally ignorant of the source of 
the symbols, language, ideas and doctrines, and hence, 
naturally, they fail to realize their beautiful signifi- 
cance, far-reaching scope, and more than marvelous 

2* B 17 



18 BLUE AS1J KED EIGHT. 

harmony. Within the present century, the Germans 
have given the subject, or constellation of subjects, 
much thoughtful investigation, but as yet have not 
shown a clear perception of the magnitude and grand- 
eur of the Kabbalistic Theosophy. The Rosicrucians 
are the last and most advanced of these investigators, 
and the present writer gratefully acknowledges his in- 
debtedness to them, and to their careful and intelligent 
researches, for many of the Kabbalistic ideas of Light 
and Heat herein to be stated, as well as for a clearer 
insight into the religious and scientific system of the 
Kabbala. 

The Kabbalists claim that the source from which 
their knowledge is derived is Divine ; that God reveals 
it to the pure in heart alone, and that the fountain of 
the true Light of knowledge is itself known to those 
only who are illuminated by that Light within their 
souls. The philosophy of the Kabbala was expressed 
in symbols, some of which are in use among the 
Masonic and other secret fraternities of our day, 
though much of their olden force and beauty, which 
depended very largely, and in some cases entirely, upon 
their occult meanings, is lost by erroneous interpreta- 
tions. The symbols of Masonry are Kabbalistic, and 
were known to Zoroaster, Pythagoras, Apollonius, 
Raymond Lulli, Solomon ibn Gabirol, Gaffaral, Cor- 
nelius Agrippa, Fludd, Behmen and others. Solomon's 
Temple, with its marvels of beauty and grandeur, its 
strikingly distinct and different parts, its still more 
striking diversities of material and style — all blend- 
ing in one superb, gorgeous and absolutely harmonious 
whole — was the grand panoramic symbol, a complete 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 19 

epitome and miniature, of the universe as portrayed in 
the Kabbala. The history of its builder, Hiram, is a 
curious, strangely fascinating history, but it is foreign 
to our present subject, and we must pass it by with the 
single remark that he was a Kabbalist of the clearest 
type. He who exactly understands Solomon's Temple, 
in its details and in its entirety, is a true Mason and a 
true Kabbalist — therefore, an initiant of the highest 
order. 

There is a key to Kabbalistic symbolism that will 
unlock the secrets of the Kabbala, open the sanctua- 
ries of the East where the knowledge of its full sig- 
nificance is still hidden, and expose to the understand- 
ing eye the mysteries of occult philosophy. This key 
we shall use in giving the Kabbalistic ideas of Light 
and Heat, and the information we are enabled to im- 
part will be found to differ materially from what has 
hitherto been published. We must here state that 
we belong to no modern secret order, and violate no 
obligation in speaking so freely upon the subject as 
we shall. 

As we have intimated, the Kabbala treats of two 
distinct subjects : Religion and Philosophy. Though 
distinct, the two are in perfect accord as found in the 
Kabbala, and show the sublime harmony that must 
ever characterize the relations of true Religion and 
true Science — both from the one Divine source and 
having the one central theme, they cannot be antago- 
nistic or even really diverge. 

Light is the foundation upon which rests the super- 
structure of the Kabbalistic Theosophy — Light the 
source and centre of the entire harmonious system 



2U BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

Light was the first-born of God — His first manifesta- 
tion of Himself in the universe. No man can know 
God except as He manifests Himself in Light — not 
visible or sensible light, seen by man's carnal eye, 
but intellectual and spiritual Light, apparent only to 
the inner vision of those illuminated by that Light. 
This is the Light of which John spake when he said: 
" The Light shineth in darkness, and the darkness 
comprehended it not," and elsewhere in the same 
chapter. Christ, too, spake of that Light, as distin- 
guished from the visible, ordinary light, when He 
declared: "Light is come into the world, and men 
loved darkness rather than Light," etc. ; " If a man 
walk in the night, he stumbleth because there is no 
Light in him ;" " While ye have Light, believe in the 
Light, that ye may be the children of Light;" He 
calls it "the Light of Life :" " I am the Light of the 
world : he that followeth me shall not walk in dark- 
ness, but shall have the Light of Life." Indeed, the 
Bible, in both the Jewish and Christian parts, abounds 
in the Kabbalistic distinction between the outward or 
objective, and the inward or subjective, Light. The 
outward light is a manifestation of Himself by the 
same Supreme Being, but inferior in degree and in its 
influences, though glorious notwithstanding. 

The " Wisdom of Solomon " has been said to have 
been written in Alexandria in the time of Jerome, and 
is attributed to Philo ; but he could not have been its 
author, as his known views were clearly opposed to 
much that is found therein. The " wisdom " it enun- 
ciates is claimed to be that taught to Moses in Egypt. 
It describes God as Illuminated Time; no origin can be 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 21 

assigned Him; He is engulphed in his own glory, 
" dwelling in the Light which no man can approach 
unto." Creation is stated to have consisted in ema- 
nations from Him, which dispelled darkness, the an- 
tagonizing element to Light, as Evil is to Good — the 
one fleeing as the other makes its presence felt. The 
"Wisdom of Solomon" is of much value to those 
who would learn the marvels of Kabbalistic Wisdom, 
but the great Kabbalistic works are "The Sohar, or 
the Book of Light," and " The Sepher Jetzera, or the 
Book of the Creation." The former was first printed 
in 1558 at Mantua, and repeatedly reprinted; its 
writer was Simeon ben Jochai. "The Sepher Jet- 
zera," according to Dr. Zurns, was written in the 
eighth century, or possibly at the beginning of the 
ninth ; but this is a mistake, as though its origin is 
really unknown, yet internal evidence would justify 
the claim that it was written very much earlier, if not 
as early as a century before the commencement of the 
Christian era. In the Talmud, there is distinct men- 
tion of this remarkable work, and Shabthai ben Abra- 
ham, an eminent commentator of the tenth century, 
gives it as his carefully formed opinion that it is the 
oldest book of human literature ; admitting this to be 
an exaggeration, we deem its language and style con- 
clusive proof that it belongs to a period anterior to the 
first Mishnaists; it is not impossible that those writers 
are correct who regard it as a collection, made it may 
be in the eighth or ninth century, of fragments of very 
much earlier times. We have been so fortunate as to 
secure a good copy of each of the three editions of the 
Sepher Jetzera: 1. The Latin edition of Bittangel 



22 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

(Amsterdam, 1660); 2. The Latin and German edi- 
tion of John Friedrich von Meyer (Leipsic, 1830); and 
3. An edition bearing neither name nor date. The 
opinion prevalent among Kabbalists is that the Sepher 
Jetzera is a monologue of the patriarch Abraham, and 
they believe that the contemplations recorded herein 
induced the patriarch of patriarchs to abandon the 
worship of the heavenly bodies and become the ser- 
vant of the true God ; the Eabbi Jahuda ha Levi, 
who flourished and w T rote in the eleventh century, 
says : " The Book of the Creation, which belongs to 
our Father Abraham, demonstrates the existence of 
the Deity and the Divine Unity, by things that are, 
on the one hand, manifold and multifarious, whilst, on 
the other hand, they converge and harmonize; and 
this harmony can only proceed from One who orig- 
inates it." The design of this work is to declare a 
system whereby the universe may be viewed in con- 
nection with the truths found in the Bible, in such a 
way as to show, by tracing the gradual and orderly 
process of creation and the harmony which character- 
izes its details and its perfection, that one God pro- 
duces all and is over all. The order and harmony of 
creation is deduced from the analogy subsisting be- 
tween the visible things and the signs of thought. 

The Sepher Jetzera is regarded as the basis of, and 
key to, the teachings of the Sohar, though the arrange- 
ment and plan of the two works differ somewhat. In 
the Sohar, the Sephiroih, of which we shall speak fully 
directly, are unfolded with care and in detail. " The 
Sohar, or the Book of Light," dwells with great em- 
phasis upon the Kabbalistic doctrinal teachings on 



ANCIENT IDEAS OP LIGHT AOT HEAT. 23 

Light. The Kabbala declares that Light is the pri- 
mordial essence of the Universe, and that all life and 
motion proceed from it — it is the vital dynamic force 
of Nature. It also declares that it is by the study of 
Light that we are enabled to acquire a knowledge of 
the unknowable or causal world. Light is Jacob's 
Ladder by which we ascend to Celestial knowledge, 
the upper rundle being in the fourth Sephira, repre- 
sented by the Pentagram. 

In considering the Kabbala and the Kabbalists, we 
must never lose sight of its intimate connection with 
the Bible; it is really an enlightened "Commentary" 
on the Sacred Scriptures — these have, running all 
through their inspired lines and words, a two-fold 
meaning : an outward meaning which may be per- 
ceived by any candid reader, and an inward or hidden 
meaning which "the carnal mind cannot receive, be- 
cause it is foolishness to him ;" being spiritual, it can 
only be "spiritually discerned" — it is the province 
of the Kabbala to shed the Light of Truth upon this 
second meaning. 

Solomon ibn Gabirol, an Arabian philosopher, 
wrote, under the pseudonym of Avicebron, about the 
middle of the eleventh century, two works of value 
to those interested in occult philosophy; they were 
" Liber de Causis," or " The Book of Causes," and 
" Fons Vita," or " The Source of Life." He ' speaks 
of the unity of Light as it arises from the throne of 
the Most High, which subjectively becomes divided 
into nine categories. This united Light he calls " the 
substance of the intellect," on account of its having 
been the receptacle of the Divine Will when God 



24 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

said " Let there be Light." In his " Liber de Causis," 
in speaking of God, Gabirol states that He is wise, 
and from His Wisdom He has seen fit to make His 
Will manifest in Light, and all existences and sub- 
stances in creation are created and sustained by God 
through Light. His Will, His Divinity, His Unity, 
His Eternity, and His very existence, are profound 
mysteries, and we can know Him only through His 
manifestations of Himself in Light. Gabirol speaks 
of the absurdity of a finite mind's attempting to de- 
fine God — could it be done, it would make Him a 
finite being. 

Plate I. shows the ten Sephiroth of the Kabbala, 
which illustrate in symbol the Kabbalistic conception 
of the universe as it came from the incomprehensible 
Supreme Will of the Most High. " The Crown " is 
called the En Soph (" the Endless, the Ineffable'''), be- 
cause, in it and by it God manifested the power of 
His Will in creation ; as Light is His creative agent, 
so this En Soph is the source from which Light flows, 
the Fons Lucis. The En Soph was not created by 
God, but emanated from Him to manifest Him. In 
" the Crown," Light is pure white, utterly undiscern- 
ible by the physical eye, and in it reside the life and 
dynamic power of the universe. The ten Sephiroth 
comprise this En Soph, the Unity, and nine categories, 
or spheres, making ten in the complete figure, whence 
the number ten is called a " perfect number " and 
symbolized thus ©, representing the unity and syn- 
thesis of creation. Pythagoras in his " Tetractys " 
gives, besides the Sephiroth, a representation of the 
creation composed of the four letters of the Ineffable 



Plate I. — The Sephiroth. 



A 




5 




P5 




o 




^H 




M 




3 8 




£«2 




g ft 




O ft 




lis 

g W 


CHOCHMAH 


w °/ 


r FEMININE 


P5 I 


3 


M . V 





CROWN 



Super-Celestial 

World. A Pure White 

Light: the Source of Life 

aud Dynamic Power. 

FIRST TRIAD 



WISDOM 



BINAH 
MASCULINE 

2 

INTELLIGENCE 



TIPHEROTH 



CELESTIAL 



SUN 



\ 



GREATNESS 





GEBURAH 


o / 




^ / 

05 / 


6 


° 1 

is [ 




BLUE 


i-3 -• \ 




3 S v 




H P5 




02 o 




3£ 


BEA 


UTY 


O * 






a * 


H 


OD 


W 32 







CHESED 



SECOND TRIAD 

KINGDOM EQUILIBRATED, 

The four Celestial Elements: 

The Water 



THE HEXAD I 



above the Firmament: the Univer 




ANCIENT IDEA- OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 25 

Name of God, the four-letter Name as it has been 
called, arranged and numbered as shown in Plate II., 
which we shall describe later in this chapter; this 
Xame Pythagoras correctly pronounces the key to the 
mysteries of the Kabbala. Pythagoras employed num- 
bers in representing his ideas of creation, while the 
Egyptian Kabbalists used letters, words and numbers. 

The Kabbalists represent the properties of Light as 
dual, calling the parts the two hands of Deity. Al- 
though it possesses duality, it maintains its unity and 
harmony until it becomes focalized in Astral Suns 
which we have illustrated by the sephiretic "Tree" 
in Plate I. We have said, the En Soph, or Crown, is 
the fountain or source of Light, which manifests itself 
in the two Sephiroth, Binah and Chocmah, " Intelli- 
gence" and " Wisdom," with masculine and feminine, 
or active and passive, functions — functions strikingly 
manifested in the light of our Sun, which must be 
understandingly distinguished before we can deter- 
mine its various and diverse action and influence upon 
the human organism. En Soph, Binah and Chocmah 
form the first triad of the Sephiroth, and lines connect- 
ing them bound the World of Briah, the Super-Celes- 
tial World, or the World of Spirit. 

Light is then focalized, forming the fourth Sephira, 
which is the Celestial Sun, called Tipheroth,, ''Re- 
splendence," " Magnificence," because of the resplen- 
dent, magnificent whiteness of its Light, while its 
immensity is recognized in the farther designation 
" Greatness." This is the Central Sun of the entire 
universe, visible only to the spiritual or subjective 
sight, never to the natural or objective vision. It is 

3 



26 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

to the Astral Suns precisely what they are to the re- 
spective planets which they control, illume and sus- 
tain, and which revolve around them; it controls, 
illumes and sustains the Astral Suns, and around it 
they revolve — without it they could no more main- 
tain their equilibrium in space than could the plan- 
ets hold their positions without their respective 
Suns. 

This great Celestial Luminary possesses the dual 
properties of Light and Fire, but in absolute equili- 
bration and perfect harmony. This perfect harmony 
embraces the rays of the Light, and enemies of the 
Fire ; it is this harmony in the blending of the rays 
that produces the resplendent, magnificent white of 
which we have spoken as the characteristic of the 
Celestial Sun, and which justly gains it the appellation 
Tipheroth — the objective vision cannot conceive, as it 
could not endure, the white splendor of this glorious 
orb of orbs. When Moses desired to see the glory of 
God, this Celestial Light, God kindly replied: "I 
will make all my goodness pass before thee. . . . 
Thou canst not see my face : for there shall no man 
see me, and live." The near approach of the glory 
made the face of Moses so lustrous that, upon his re- 
turn to the people, they could not endure the sight, 
and he was compelled to put a veil over his face while 
he talked with them. And when Saul and his com- 
panions were riding, upon their journey from Jeru- 
salem to Damascus, suddenly there shone about them 
a beam from the Celestial Sun ; so intense was its Light 
that they all fell to the ground, and Saul's eyes were 
temporarily blinded and permanently affected by the 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 



27 



Light, which he describes as : " a Light from heaven, 
above the brightness of the Sun." 

We have already alluded to the fact that the one 
attribute which pre-eminently distinguishes the Kab- 
balistic system is its complete and absolute harmony ! 
But more may be claimed : This harmony is not only 
the strongest evidence, but it is an all-sufficient and 
conclusive proof of the Divine origin of the Kabbala ; 
for in God's universe, in its every department, sepa- 
rately and collectively, harmony is the one positive 
law which is never disobeyed without immediate and 
inevitable evil consequences exactly proportioned to 
die extent and nature of that disobedience. No merely 
human system of action or ethics, of living or believ- 
ing, has ever been or can ever be devised wherein this 
Divine harmony is not evidently wanting; the most 
skillfully and cunningly planned and practised coun- 
terfeit bears this evidence upon its face of the absence 
of the Divine hand in its construction. It has been 
well said : " Harmony is God's unique law." So, 
when we find in the Sephiroth a positive unity, in their 
relation to each other and to the universe a positive 
accord, and in the system throughout, of which these 
are the symbolic declaration, a like oneness arising 
from marvelous harmony and sublime concord, we can 
believe that God, the God of harmony and concord, 
has inspired the Kabbala, and can believe no less and 
naught else until we discover some known-to-be- 
human system equally perfect in this particular. 

But let us pause very briefly to note the operations 
of God's law of harmony around us : In the move- 
ments of the heavenly bodies, as we are wont to call 



28 BLUE AND RED LIGHT, 

the planets and their suns and moons and satellites, 
none question or can question the importance of this 
law. With the slightest defect in this respect, not 
only would their respective order and movements be 
disarranged and confusion ensue, but the very exist- 
ence of some of the weaker ones would be destroyed 
by contact with their stronger neighbors, while the 
stronger ones would necessarily suffer immeasurably. 
In fact, set aside the law of harmony in the planetary 
system, and chaos would soon prevail. The same law 
is vital, too, in each individual member of the uni- 
verse ; take our Sun for an illustration : place discord 
instead of harmony in its structure, and beauty would 
give place to distressing ugliness, utility to horrible 
destructiveness ; its orderly movements would become 
wanderings through space to the peril of our earth 
itself. And so with any one of the Suns or their 
planets, the loss of harmony would, inevitably destroy 
its beauty and usefulness in the universe. 

As God is one, so is this law uniform in all His 
works — in what we are wont to call the laws of 
Nature, His Will is seen in the presence and influence 
of this same law of harmony : every positive has a 
negative, every active a passive ; every destroying ele- 
ment is opposed or corrected by a restoring principle 
— just in proportion as the opposing principles or 
forces are in exact equipoise do we see Nature move 
in beauteous and regular order ; for example, let the 
forces of attraction become weak or impaired, will not 
the repellent forces work destruction? and the con- 
verse is no less sure ; let the centrifugal force in any 
instance fall below the centripetal, or the latter yield 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AN1> HEAT. 29 

to the former, and the consequence will soon be ap- 
parent; let the polarizing ray in light lose its in- 
fluence, and decay and death come speedily to tell the 
story of the absence of harmony to the most ignorant 
and the most unobservant. It is this harmony that 
gives us all of beauty and beneficence we see in 
Nature; harmony amidst its constituents gives us 
beauty in Light, sweetness in sound, and all else 
that we enjoy in life is equally dependent on this 
law of God. 

In the Moral World, the same God exacts obedience 
to the same law of harmony as the price of order and 
propriety, and disregard of its stringent requirements, 
even in what we are prone to call " trivial matters," 
is as surely and as swiftly followed by a proportion- 
ate penalty as in the Planetary and Natural Worlds. 
Even in the matter of Divinely-ordered penalties, do 
we not see this law ever exemplified ? 

And of the World of Eternal Peace and Blessed- 
ness, we cannot doubt the assurance that "order is 
Heaven's first law." -The law of harmony finds there 
its most complete fruition, because there it is never 
disregarded, and that fruition is joy and happiness 
unspeakable, glory ineffable, and perfect life forever 
and forever — well may we believe that there is no 
sorrow or sighing, no pain or sickness, no decay or 
death, in that happy land where God's unique law 
of harmony is perfectly and absolutely and always 
obeyed. 

The Rouach Elohim which brooded over or " moved 
upon the face of the waters " was held by the Alche- 
mists to have been Light from the Celestial Sun shi- 

3 * 



30 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

ning thereon. John, in his narrative of the life and 
ministry of Christ, tells us : " There is at Jerusalem 
by the sheep-market, a pool which is called in the 
Hebrew tongue Bethesda, having five porches. In 
these lay a great multitude of impotent folk, of blind, 
halt, withered, waiting for the moving of the water. 
For an angel went down at a certain season into the 
pool, and troubled the water: whosoever then first 
after the troubling of the water stepped in was made 
whole of whatsoever disease he had." Now, as Christ 
did not deny or question the popular notion as to the 
curative property imparted to the water of this pool, 
but tacitly acknowledged its correctness, and as the 
word rendered " angel " signifies literally " messen- 
ger," and the "messenger" was certainly invisible to 
the objective sight of those visiting the pool, may we 
not believe that this " messenger " was a healing ray 
from Tipheroth of the Kabbala? commentators have 
offered various explanations of this " miracle " of 
Bethesda, but they speak with a degree of uncertainty 
which indicates that they are not quite satisfied with 
their own explanations ; many of them are disposed 
to get rid of the difficulty by rejecting the story as 
" an interpolation ;" we see no necessity for rejecting 
the passage, and cannot see that to believe that the 
sanative principle was imparted by a ray "sent" from 
the Celestial Sun of the universe, does any violence 
to the most orthodox faith, as God's benevolent and 
omnipotent Will is as truly recognized in such a belief 
as in any " miraculous " theory we have ever seen or 
heard advanced. The same John, in his book of Rev- 
elations, states that there were seven angels to whom 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 31 

were given seven trumpets, the sounding of each of 
which brought a dire calamity upon the earth : " And 
the third angel sounded, and there fell a great star 
from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell 
upon the third part of the rivers, and upon the foun- 
tains of waters; and the name of the star is called 
Wormwood; and the third part of the waters became 
wormwood • and many men died of the waters, be- 
cause they were made bitter/'' Was this "star" a 
destructive ray from the mighty Tipheroth f the sup- 
position is certainly as reasonable as the suppositions 
of some of the popular commentators ; and our sug- 
gestion is made still more probable by the fact that, 
according to the Kabbalists, the star symbol within 
the Sephira Tipheroth, in its upright, proper position 
representing the principle of good, when inverted rep- 
resents the evil principle; our readers will find it in- 
teresting to note carefully the star, then invert the 
plate and observe how different and how much less 
pleasing the star appears. 

The five-pointed " Star " seen on the disk of Tiphe- 
roth is the "flaming Pentagram" of the Kabbalists 
and of the Magi of the Orient ; it was the glorious 
" Star of Bethlehem " that, as the Celestial forerunner 
of the " Light of the World," the " Light of Life," 
made known to the Wise Men the birth of Jesus. 
Miniatures of the Pentagram constitute favorite talis- 
mans, but to be effective they must be most accurately 
made and carefully placed ; it was to a picture of this 
star, placed as a talisman, Goethe referred in the fa- 
mous interview between Faust and Mephistopheles in 
the former's study ; the latter had entered unbidden 



32 klajE axd red light. 

and unannounced, but when he wished to retire found 
an obstacle : 

Meph. — Might I be permitted this time to depart? 

Faust. — I see not why you ask Here is the window, here 

the door ; there is also a chimney for you. 

Meph. — To confess the truth, a small obstacle prevents me from 
walking out — the wizard-foot upon your threshold, 

Faust. — The Pentagram embarasses you ? Tell me then, thou 
child of hell, if that repels thee, how earnest thou in ? How was 
such a spirit entrapped ? 

Meph, — Mark it well ; it is not well drawn ; one angle, the out- 
ward one, is, as thou seest, a little open. 

The Apocalypse is full of passages which can be 
read with easo by the help of the Kabbala ; indeed 
there are passages which indicate that John was a 
Kabbalist of a high order. Among these we must 
cite one ; lie tells us of a most remarkable vision : 
"And there appeared a great wonder in heaven, a 
woman clothed with the sun, and the moon under her 
feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars," etc. 
The Rosicrueians call the Light of the Celestial Sun 
the Divine Sophia, "Wisdom," because of its purity and 
its passivity in matter. The Egyptian Kabbalists called 
this light Isis, and represented Isis as a pure woman ; 
as the Light of the Celestial Sun is invisible to mere 
mortals, seen only by the subjective sight' of the illu- 
minated, they clothed Isis with an objective Sun ; as 
the Celestial Sun is "greatness" and majesty, they 
placed under the feet of Isis the Crescent, beneath 
which, but outside the sacred circle, was a vanquished 
Fiery Serpent ; then, as a token of the supremacy of 
Tipherolh in the universe, they surrounded the head 
of Isis with a halo of twelve Stars. [See the Frontis- 



AXJ1E-NT IDKMi OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 



33 



piece.] Doubtless, our reader readily sees Sophia of 
the Rosicruciaus and Isis of the Egyptian Kabbalists 
in John's vision of the wondrous woman, and if he 
read John's narrative of that vision a little farther he 
will find the vanquished Serpent beneath Iris's feet 
in the Apocalyptic " great red dragon." The figure 
of Isis clothed with the Sun is one of the most inter- 
esting of the symbolic pictures of the Kabbala; when 
a person by self-denial, meditation and devotion has 
attained to the high privilege of subjective vision, he 
sees Isis or the Light of the subjective Sun — this is 
" lifting the Veil of Isis." 

The Celestial Sun, we have seen, is the fourth Se- 
phira; the fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth, called re- 
spectively C/tesed, " Strength,'' Geburah, " Beauty," 
Netsah, " Firmness," and Hod, " Splendor," represent 
four of the component colors of Light: Red, Yellow, 
Green and Blue; the Kabbalists fully understood the 
colors, their influence in Light and in Nature, their 
distinctive properties and their action together and 
separately; this is indicated in a singularly forcible 
manner in placing the Red and Yellow in the mascu- 
line or active column and the Green and Blue in the 
feminine or passive column — recognizing the active, 
polarizing quality of the heat colors and the passive, 
decomposing quality of the chemical colors. The non- 
recognition of the Orange, Indigo and Violet does not 
indicate that the Kabbalists knew not of them, for we 
know from other sources that they were thoroughly 
aware of the seven colors of the chromatic scale, and 
of the proportion, position and character of each color ; 
but Orange is only a combination of the Red and 

c 



34 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

Yellow, and Indigo and Violet are close akin to 
Bine. The Celestial Snn having thus given forth the 
colors, they come together again, or are focalized, in 
Astral Suns, which appear as the ninth SepJiira, desig- 
nated Jesody " Foundation," because they are the cen- 
tres of their systems, the life-producers, -propagators 
and -sustainers for the worlds that depend upon them. 
Tipheroth, Chesed and Geburah form the second Triad, 
and Jesod, Netsah and Hod the third ; these two Triads 
combined constitute the Hexad, which is the Soul of 
the world, and of it are derived the souls of all indi- 
vidualized existences. The second Triad depending 
upon the Celestial Sun is subjective, the third sus- 
tained by the Astral Suns is objective ; the Hexad 
composed of the two contains both the subjective and 
objective principles, and souls consequently are like- 
wise dual in their character, properties and impulses — 
the objective part receives material impressions, and 
through it we obtain our knowledge of the material 
universe, the world of effects not causes, while the 
subjective part receives spiritual impressions, called in- 
tuitive perceptions, and it urges us to earnest seeking 
after illumination and Divine Wisdom. Our reader 
will recollect that the Eosicrucians call the Light of the 
Celestial Sun Sophia, " the Wisdom of God," and the 
subjective part of man's soul partakes of this essence 
of Deity, while the objective part partakes in like 
manner of the antagonistic evil principle, and this evil 
part is in the ordinary man most active. Each part 
of the soul has its own faculties to be cultivated and 
nourished, or neglected. The unfolding of the object- 
ive faculties makes a man '* carnal-minded," sensual, 



i im.iunu. jl i i . - ■! j i . ' " ■ ■■ ' ■ '■ ■ ■■ ■ ■ - '■ J.-. ' U - --i- 

ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 35 

and he comes to be satisfied with the follies and vices 
of this world, oblivious to the true interests of his 
soul; in proportion as these faculties develope and 
strengthen, man becomes blind and dead, spiritually, 
and when once under the domination of the objective 
part of his soul he is in such a state of spiritual death 
that he must be " born again " and become a " new 
creature," ere he can even " see the kingdom of God." 
Could a man cultivate and develope both his subject- 
ive and objective faculties equally he would be an in- 
habitant of both worlds at one time; but this is 
scarcely possible, for the unfolding of the subjective 
faculties opens to the soul visions of such glory and 
bliss in the Celestial World that the Terrestrial World 
ceases to interest him. 

We have within a few months witnessed a most 
noteworthy case of this triumph of the subjective 
over the objective faculties within the soul : A lady 
of superior intellect and culture, of exceptionally 
kind and affectionate disposition, genial and ever 
cordial in her bearing to all, dearly loving and 
devotedly beloved by her husband and children, 
esteemed by all who came within the influence of 
her goodness — all her associations w^ere such as to 
strengthen earthly ties, yet fully two weeks before her 
death these ties were completely sundered and all in- 
terest in this world evidently ceased, except only that 
her love for her faithful husband was undimmed — she 
was permitted subjectively to behold her Celestial 
Home and to realize the happiness and glory there 
laid up for her, and immediately her earthly home, 
with all its happy ancl enticing associations, lost its 



,it> BLUE AM) RED LIGHT. 

hold upon her — the sole remaining tie was not suf- 
ficiently strong to lessen her intense longing for her 
Home in Heaven; with the view of that Home, she 
was enlightened as to the time of her departure, and 
she foretold the exact hour. She was a Kabbalist, 
with her subjective faculties in healthful exercise for 
years before her sickness, and her experience was what 
is called illumination. So in every case, if the sub- 
jective faculties of our soul be unfolded, we shall have 
our " conversation in Heaven/' "lay up our treasures" 
there, and while still " in the world," we shall not be 
"of it." With our prize ever in view, we shall never 
" weary in well-doing," but "press on," calmly and 
uncomplainingly " bearing the cross " assured that we 
shall " wear the crown " — " the sufferings of this pres- 
ent time are not worthy to be compared with the glory 
which shall be revealed in us." The "children of 
Light " are not exempt from the trials and sufferings 
of the earthly pilgrimage, but they do not "walk in 
the darkness" of despair or uncertainty. May the 
"God of Light" illumine our dark minds with beams 
from His Celestial Glory, and fit us to enjoy a fore- 
taste of Heavenly blessedness even in this world of 
darkness, and thus the more truly to enjoy the inef- 
fable perfections of our Eternal Home. 

The Kabbalists maintain that the want of harmony 
within the soul, caused by the activity of the evil fac- 
ulties and the passivity of the good faculties, is sin or its 
direct cause, and results in placing him in bondage in 
darkness and error. The mission of Christ, they claim, 
was to deliver man from this bondage and make him 
"free indeed," by restoring the equilibrium or bar*- 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LHJttiT A-NJJ HEAT. 6i 

mony within his soul. Those who achieve this deliv- 
erance and become obedient to the subjective or Divine 
principle, are called by the Kabbalists Ittuminati, be- 
cause their souls are illuminated by the Light of the 
Celestial Sun, the Divine Sophia, and by Christ they 
are designated "children of Light." Man himself 
can materially promote this deliverance " by self- 
denial, meditation and religious exercises," or, as 
Christ expresses it, by " taking up his cross and fol- 
lowing Him." 

The duality of the soul is one of the most beautiful 
and impressive doctrines of the Kabbala, and it is a 
Scriptural doctrine. James, in his Epistle, emphati- 
cally affirms the presence of the e\'il principle, when 
he declares: "The spirit that dwelleth in us lustethto 
envy," and he recognizes that this evil part of the soul 
is of the devil, the evil principle in the world, when he 
admonishes us, in the same connection : " Resist the devil 
and he will flee from you." He clearly, too, teaches 
the dual principle in the soul : " Purify your hearts, 
ye double-minded." Paul's epistles abound in recog- 
nitions of the two antagonistic principles in the soul: 
" I delight in the law of God after the inward man ; 
but I see another law in my members, warring against 
the law of my mind, bringing me into captivity to the 
law of sin which is in my members." There is a con- 
stant warfare between these two principles within us, 
until the good or the evil finally triumphs; the good 
must overcome the evil if we would attain to life in 
the Celestial World, and Paul urges Timothy "Fight 
the good fight of faith, lay hold on eternal life," and 
for his encouragement lie declares: ''For lam now 



'■ ^I i -.J..1.IBMM 



38 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

ready to be offered, and the time of my departure is at 
hand ; I have fought a good fight, I have finished my 
course, I have kept the faith." But a greater than 
Paul or James, their Master and ours, even Christ, 
counsels us : " Watch and pray, that ye enter not into 
temptation : the spirit indeed is willing, but the flesh 
is weak/' The flesh cannot signify the body, because 
that cannot take part in leading us into, or keeping 
us out of temptation j the objective part of the soul, 
" the carnal mind," which is " enmity against God," 
and " whose God is the belly," is appropriately de- 
nominated "the flesh" — "the flesh lusteth against the 
spirit, and the spirit against the flesh, and these are 
contrary the one to the other." We need not Peter's 
testimony to the fact that " fleshly lusts war against 
the soul." The story of the " war in heaven," when 
"Michael and his angels fought against the dragon, 
and the dragon fought and his angels," is a beautiful 
allegorical picture of the unceasing warfare in the 
world, and in each soul of man, between Light and 
darkness, Truth and error. 

As we have learned, pure white Light is the char- 
acteristic of En Soph and its Triad, of the Super- 
Celestial World, and of Tipheroih and its portion of 
the Hexad — this Light, too pure and dazzling for 
mortal vision, we know is seen alone by the subjective 
vision. Coming down to the objective portion of the 
Hexad, we find that Light loses its pure intense lustre 
and becomes visible to the human organ of sight and 
this is because the Fire principle becomes ascendent. 
Thus in the subjective portion of the soul Light rules, 
and in the objective portion Fire is dominant — if the 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 39 

one prevails, "the fruits of the Spirit" testify to its 
benign influence, but if the other prevails, "the works 
of the flesh" bear witness to its evil power. The 
Kabbalists aptly call the soul wherein the Celestial 
Sophia reigns, a Light Soul, while they as aptly style 
the soul wherein the subjective is subdued by the ob- 
jective a dark Soul. The former, the "Child of 
Light," the Illuminatns, cannot ''hide his Light under 
a bushel," it will shine forth in his works and make 
him a " Light of the World " So long as the Fire 
principle predominates, the Kabbalists tell us, the 
soul cannot soar above the earth's atmosphere, in 
which the Divine Light is never manifested, but it 
remains in bondage in darkness hovering around 
this world of darkness — but of this we shall speak 
hereafter. Meanwhile, we note that Fire appears as 
an evil principle, according to the Kabbala, but the 
reader must not imagine that it is necessarily, in itself, 
evil — it becomes an evil when the law of harmony no 
longer restrains its power, when it becomes master 
instead of servant. In Tipheroth and in the Celestial 
World, there is Fire as well as Light, but perfect 
harmony keeps it in its place, so to speak, and it 
performs its assigned work in obedience to the law 
of harmony. 

What we have said of the duality of the soul, sug- 
gests a few T w T ords concerning the Kabbalistic doctrine 
of probation : the Kabbala teaches that the mundane 
life is one of probation for the development of the 
spirit and purification of the Soul, as the foetal 
and embryotic life is a probation for the development 
of the physical form. Just as during the embryotic 



40 BLUE ASD KED LIGHT. 

life, the development of the body may be retarded or 
stopped by an evil influence or power, so in the mun- 
dane life, evil within or without often hinders or stops 
the development of body, soul or spirit, — there is this 
important difference in the two probations to be kept 
in mind: the fcetus can do nothing towards promoting 
or checking the development of its parts, but this 
must be subject entirely to good or evil influences 
outside of itself and beyond its control ; the being, 
once born into the mundane existence, on the other 
hand, has it in his power materially to promote, or 
fatally to prevent, his progress towards the higher life; 
man is endowed with a will, and contains within his 
soul the germs of good and evil, the principles of Light 
and Fire, of good and evil, and it rests with him, in 
no small degree, to determine whether the good or the 
evil shall unfold and fill him with Light or darkness, 
with Life or death. Christ, " the Sun of Righteous- 
ness, with healing in His wings " [beams], has come 
to "bring Life and Immortality to light," and if man 
will but let His beams shine in his soul, the germs of 
good will unfold, the principle of good will be victor- 
ious, and he will be filled with " the Light of Life." 

Lines connecting the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, 
eighth and ninth Sephiroth, the Hexad, bound Jezirah, 
the Celestial or Souf World. It is composed of the 
four Celestial elements, the universal Hyle (the Ether 
of modern science), the first Matter, the Abyss and 
the "Water above the Firmament" (the "fierywater" 
of the Alchemists) ; these elements are represented by 
the fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth Sephiroth, and cor- 
respond to the four elements of the material world, 



ANCIENT IDEAS OV LIGHT AND. HEAT. 41 

air. earth, fire and water. The Rouach Elohim broods 
over "the waters above the firmament/' and the angels, 
laving themselves in their pure depths and quaffing 
Celestial nectar from their sweet fountains, preserve 
their perfect health and ever refresh and renew their 
strength, vigor and vitality. 

The ninth Sephira, Jesod, " Foundation," so named 
because it is the life-source and sustainer of the life of 
and upon the Terrestrial Worlds, represent the Astral 
Suns, or the Suns of the material world.s. These are 
emanations from the Celestial Sun, and receive their 
Light and all their powers from that Central Orb; 
the Light of the Central Sun being too pure for mor- 
tal eyes, it is modified in the Astral Suns by permit- 
ting the Fire principle to prevail sufficiently to adapt 
it to human sight — the law of harmony is thus made 
less stringent in the Astral Suns not only to make 
them objectively visible, but to render their elements 
capable of separation and decomposition, and thus 
suit them, as we shall see, to the necessities of the ma- 
terial worlds. This relaxing of the law of harmony 
enables us to use the two elements, Light and Fire, 
in a measure separately, and farther enables us to an- 
alyze or separate the constituents of Light and Fire 
and apply them to multifarious and important uses; 
later we shall notice some of the immense advantages 
that the world derives and may derive from the re- 
laxing of the law of harmony and the consequent 
privilege we enjoy of utilizing the constituent ele- 
mentary powers of Light and Heat. Meanwhile, 
it is for us to notice that, though God thus relaxes 
His law of harmony, it i* only for the good of His 



42 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

creatures He does so, and He wisely maintains the 
law sufficiently in force to hold the Suns in their 
places and keep them to the work He requires of 
them in His universal economy; though He permits 
them to send forth destructive elements, He com- 
pels them to send likewise elements which, intelli- 
gently applied, counterbalance and antidote their pow- 
er for evil, or compensate and remedy evil wrought. 
Such is the teaching of the Kabbala, and that it is 
borne out by scientific tests and practical experience 
will be shown later in this work. 

The Astral Suns are truly, though in less or in- 
ferior degree, manifestations of the Divine Will, and 
we should not overlook the evidence of His Goodness 
in that God adapts His manifestations of Himself to 
the necessities and capacities of those to whom they 
are vouchsafed. As "no man can see Him and live," 
Pie will not show even Moses all His glory, though 
He manifests himself in a special manner to him, an- 
in an entirely different and less glorious manner to 
the Israelites as a people. So now to those who can 
behold it and live He manifests himself in the Cele^ 
tial Sun, and to those spiritually blind and incapable 
of receiving or enjoying so glorious a manifestation, 
He appears in the less glorious Astral Suns. He has 
often chosen the element of Fire as His medium ; for 
example, at His first appearing, to Moses in the Burn- 
ing Bush, and upon Mount Sinai to the children of 
Israel, when " the sight of the glory of Jehovah wao 
like devouring fire on the top of the mount in the 
eyes of the children of Israel;" in numberless in- 
stances, when His presence was specially required, Kt, 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 43 

came in fire to consume sacrifices upon altars, as when 
the prophet wished to attest His true majesty and 
prove the Baal counterfeit. It was, no doubt, in con- 
sequence of God's frequent manifestation of Himself 
in and by Fire that the Persians and other people 
learned to regard Fire as the special symbol of God's 
presence, and worshipped Fire, or, as some affirm, 
worshipped God in Fire. 

Zoroaster regarded the astral Suns as emblems of 
the Sun of Truth, or the True Sun, the great Central 
Orb of the universe — a shadow of the first source of 
all Splendor. For this reason, the " Wise Men " of 
the olden time saluted the rising of the Sun in the 
East and the dawning in the West, and for doing this 
" they have been accused by barbarians as Sun- wor- 
shippers." 

The tenth Sephira is Azirah, the material world, 
the world of darkness, because the Divine or Celestial 
Light is not visible therein. Science teaches us that 
White is the harmonious blending of all the colors 
of Light, and that Black is the absence of all the 
colors, and where all the colors are absent, Light is 
certainly absent. Utter darkness is positive Black- 
ness ; hence, darkness is the absence of Light. The 
Kabbala tells us that when man disobeyed His Creator 
in attempting to steal forbidden knowledge, God pun- 
ished him justly by withdrawing from him the Celes- 
tial Light in which he had hitherto basked, and 
enforced the promised penalty of disobedience by de- 
priving him of the Light of Life, and thus of real 
Life itself — for spiritual Life is the real Life and it 
is dependent absolutely upon Celestial Light. Man, 



44 BLUE AND KED LIGHT. 

having now fallen from the condition of harmony with 
God, and thus lost the capacity to enjoy close com- 
munion with Him, he was "cast out of the garden " 
of Divine association and fellowship; the "flaming 
sword" .which inhibited his approach to the "Tree of 
Life" was the prevalence in and about him of the Fire 
principle, which excluded him from farther partaking 
of the Divine Sophia, that teaches the law of harmony 
and thus imparts the ability to "live forever." Man, 
having lost spiritual sight and life, could not bequeath 
these to his posterity, and all his race are consequently 
" born blind." But the All-Wise did not will that 
man should be perpetually blind and dead spiritually, 
and while His Justice was punishing, His Mercy an- 
nounced a plan of again bringing "Life and Immor- 
tality, to light" by a new manifestation of Himself. 
He declared that though Satan, the evil principle, 
should still have the power to bruise the woman's 
seed as to the heel (checking his aspirations after a 
better life), the woman's seed should have the greater 
power of bruising him (Satan) as to the head (fatally 
in destroying his will-power or the power of freely ex- 
ercising his will). This announcement has generally 
been understood to refer to the coming of Christ, "the 
Word made flesh," who was to be put to death phys- 
ically, by the influence of Satan, but was to inflict far 
greater injury upon Satan by restoring the Celestial 
Light to the world of darkness; but while Christ was 
pre-eminently the promised Seed, the promise of God 
has had innumerable lesser fulfilments; in all ages 
there have been striking exceptions to the general 
rule of darkness; there have been individuals, and 



ANCIENT IDEAS oF LIGHT AND HEAT. 45 

indeed communities, illuminated by that Light that 
bruises the head of the Prince of Darkness — there 
have been Goshens in the dark Egypts, wherein the 
" children of Light " have " not stumbled " though 
all around was dark with a darkness that was felt. 
Since the coming of Christ, the number of " children 
of Light " lias been much increased by reason of His 
"preaching to the .spirits in prison/' His triumphs 
over demons, His imparting the " Light of Life," His 
work of Redemption, His final triumph over the 
Prince of Darkness, and His, glorious outpouring of 
the Holy Spirit. But even yet darkness reigns over 
the earth, and "men love darkness rather than light." 

Our world is also called the Synthetic World be- 
cause man, its inhabitant, is a Synthesis in that he con- 
tains within him the properties of the kingdoms above, 
Soul and Spirit. Moreover it is called the Kingdom 
Unequilibrated, because it is purely objective, being the 
objective manifestation of the objective portion of the 
Hexad, just as the Soul World is called the Kingdom 
Equilibrated on account of its being subjective and 
therefore under the strict law of compensation or 
harmony. 

Kabbalists maintained that water contains earthy 
matter, and that the inorganic matter of the planets 
was precipitated from water. This has been positively 
contradicted by modern Science. We can confidently 
affirm that the Kabbalists were absolutely correct in 
claiming that water contains earth, and it is at least 
possible that the inorganic matter of the planets was 
obtained from that source : we have produced a copi- 
ous earth precipitate from pure oxygen and hydrogen 



46 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

in hermetically sealed glass, and it is simply adamic 
earth. We have successfully confirmed the experi- 
ment by repetition. 

We must now fulfil our promise to describe the 
* Tetractys " of Pythagoras : 

Pythagoras correctly regarded the Ineffable Name 
of God, the Tetragrammaton, or Four-letter Name, 
as it has been called, as the key to the mysteries of 
the universe and of its creation and preservation, 
the mysteries of God whose Name it is. This is 
" the word " which so many have sought, that they 
might unlock the mystic secrets of Magianism, dis- 
cover the treasures of Symbolism, and fathom the 
depths of Oriental Learning and Wisdom; Sweden- 
borg declared "the word" to have been lost, but 
he erred — it was only its pronunciation, and unfor- 
tunately its import, that were lost or had become ob- 
scured. " And God spake unto Moses, and said unto 
him, I am the Lord : and I appeared unto Abraham, 
unto Isaac, and unto Jacob, by the name of God 
Almighty, but by my Name JEHOVAH was I not 
known to them/' This Name in the Hebrew has but 
four letters mrv, the consonants alone being letters in 
the Hebrew tongue; the four letters are rendered in 
English by J (or more correctly Y), H, V, andH; 
the vowels did not appear in the earlier written lan- 
guage, and in this Name the loss of the pronunciation 
was due to the superstitious reverence the Hebrews 
entertained towards the w T ord itself, which induced 
them whenever it occurred to substitute an entirely 
different w T ord, Adonai, for it in the reading; and 
from this dread of the word, and avoidance of it, in 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 



47 



time its awe-inspiring signification was lost; unen- 
lightened commentators have made repeated attempts 
to discover this lost meaning, but until they show that 
they believe they have succeeded we need not give the 
definitions they have offered. The Kabbala has sym- 
bolized this awful Name of the Almighty, Incompre- 
hensible One. We are by no means satisfied that the 
Tetragrammaton has been correctly vocalized JEHO- 
VAH; the Name occurs in one of David's grand 
Psalms in the abbreviated form IT, vocalized n'j, in 
English J AH or more exactly YAH, and we suspect 
that the full name should be vocalized nirr, English 
YAHVEH, rather than rmv English JEHOVAH, 
as we have it. The English translators appear to 
have had the old Jewish superstitious dread of the 
word, for they almost always translate it into " The 
Lord," the only exceptions being in Exodus 6 : 3, 
Psalm 83 : 18, Isaiah 12:2, and Isaiah 26 : 4. 



Plate II.— Tetractys of Pythagoras. 




\ 10-® 



n 



But, to turn to the Diagram of Pythagoras : this 
great and singularly learned man took the four letters 



48 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

of the name mrv and, arranging them as a pyramid 
or cone within a double circle, derived the ten num- 
bers of creation from them. These ten numbers, rep- 
resent the aheat or principles of all things; these 
principles are unequal and equal, active and passive, 
masculine and feminine, expressed by the terms Unity 
and Duality; numbers 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 express Unity, 
2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 (separately considered), express Du- 
ality ; the unequal numbers are limited and complete, 
equal numbers unlimited and incomplete; the absolute 
principle. of all perfection is Unity, while Duality is 
imperfection ; it is by the latter that forces are pro- 
duced by which differentiation is perfected in the 
number 10, which, as the sequel or sequence of the 
entire system, is regarded as a perfect number and 
represents man, the synthesis of all created energy. 
The letter Jod (') represents the Monad or Unity, the 
fountain of all things — the En Soph of the Sephiroth ; 
the two letters (^ and n) form the Dyad, the cause of 
increase and division, the two properties of Light, 
active and passive, the Binah, " Intel ligence," and 
Chocmahy " Wisdom," of the Sephiroth ; the three let- 
ters (%n and l ), containing the Monad and Dyad, form 
the Triad, and being thus a manifestation of En Soph, 
constitute the Tiphcroth of the Sephiroth, the Central 
Sun of the Universe; the four letters (',71,1 and n) 
separately represent the Chesed, Geburah, Netmh and 
Hod, which are polarized into Jesod, the Astral Suns ; 
the product of the Monad, Dyad, Triad and Tetrad, 
is the Decad; as the sum of the four primary numbers 
it takes the name Tetractys, and as the complement of 
creation becomes the perfect number 10, which, as we 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 49 

have seen, represents man as the Synthesis; it com- 
prehends, too, all musical and arithmetical propor- 
tions, and illustrates or denotes the system of the 
world. Pythagoras defines God to be absolute Verity, 
or Truth clothed with Light, and The Word em- 
bodied in the Light is the power that manifests forms ; 
or to state it differently : The Word is the Divine 
Executive, and at the same time the Revealer of the 
mysteries of the Divine Will, the " hidden things of 
God." "No man hath seen God at any time; the 
only begotten Son, which is in the bosom of the 
Father, he hath declared ^i^y/jaaro = "shown out" 
or " manifested "] him." 

Pythagoras was one of the most remarkable men of 
his day ; not only was he learned in the ordinary sense 
beyond his time, but he was a Kabbalist of the highest 
order. He is said to have been initiated into the 
Divine secrets of Nature by Daniel and Ezekiel ; he 
was subsequently, after much opposition, admitted to 
the Egyptian mysteries upon the personal recom- 
mendation of King Amosis. His " Tetractys " is a 
fair illustration of his thorough acquaintance with 
Theosophic Science, as well as of his independence 
of thought. But the most notable fact we know of 
him was his knowledge of the truth in relation to the 
movements of the heavenly bodies which science did 
not make known for centuries after his death, and, if 
he was mistaken in reference to some of the details, 
his substantial correctness was none the less wonder- 
ful. He was the founder of the renowned School of 
Crotona, upon the south-eastern coast of Italy, about 
500 B. c. He held that the Sun is the centre of the 



50 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

system around which all the planets revolve; that the 
stars are Suns like ours, each the centre of a system ; 
that the earth revolves yearly around the Sun and 
daily on its axis; that the planets are inhabited, and 
that they and the earth are ever revolving in regular 
order, "keeping up a loud and grand celestial concert, 
inaudible to man, but, as the music of the spheres, 
audible to God." He was not permitted to declare 
publicly what he knew and believed, but taught his 
immediate pupils all the wonders of his philosophy, 
under the most binding obligation of secrecy. Pytha- 
goras was especially forbidden to divulge this know- 
ledge because it would reveal the law of attraction 
and repulsion, which constituted one of the great 
secrets of the sanctuary; Newton was led to the dis- 
covery of these forces by his studies of the Kabbala. 

Speaking of Pythagoras calls to our mind the follow- 
ing singular Kabbalistic enigma written by Plato and 
sent to Dionysius : " All things surround our King 
[God]. He is the cause of all good things : Seconds 
for seconds and thirds for thirds." This expresses the 
complete philosophy of the Sephiroth. Plato was an 
earnest and most intelligent Kabbalist. 

In concluding upon this portion of our subject, we 
cannot forbear offering a few thoughts upon the ten 
Sephiroth as a single entity. The group of categories 
or spheres, as seen in Plate I., has been styled the 
" Tree of Life," because it exhibits the true source 
of life and the means for the preservation and pro- 
longation of life indefinitely into immortality : the 
Source is the Almighty Will of God as manifested 
in Light, and the means for the preservation and 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 51 

prolongation of life is the Divine Sophia declaring 
itself in the beautiful law of harmony as applied to the 
creation and sustaining of the universe. The Sephiroth, 
though ten in appearance are but one in fact — a man- 
ifestation of the Omnipotent Will in ten aspects; just 
as the flame and sparks of a fire appear as several 
objects to the eye and yet manifest but one fire, so the 
ten Sephiroth are apparently plural and are actually 
one with the En Soph, the Endless, Ineffable, Incom- 
prehensible emanation from the God of Light and 
Life. 

Turning again to the plate, we observe that the 
spheres range in three columns or pillars : the central 
one, comprising the " Crown," and the Celestial and 
Astral Suns,- has been called the Pillar of Hercules, 
and more aptly the Life Pillar. At the right of this 
central one, is the Active Pillar, consisting of Binah, 
Chesed and Netsah, "Intelligence," "Strength" and 
" Firmness," representing the Fire principle, the mas- 
culine or active forces in creation and providence. 
At the left is the Passive Pillar, representing the 
Light principle, the feminine or passive properties in 
creation and providence, as expressed in Chocmah, 
Geburah and Hod, " Wisdom," "Beauty," and "Splen- 
dor." The two side pillars being in exact equilibra- 
tion, the active and passive qualities equally perform- 
ing their functions, the universe came perfect from the 
Creator and moves in sublime beauty and complete 
utility, in undeviating accord with the Will that called 
it into being by the Word, and just as long and as far 
as the two principles are in absolute equipoise every- 
thing must continue " very good " in God's sight. 



52 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

This equilibrium is exactly maintained until we reach 
the Astral Suns, when we find it disturbed, but it still 
is upheld and respected in part — when, however, we 
pass to the material world we find the blackness of 
darkness, because God's law of harmony has been 
broken by man, and inharmony has brought disease, 
decay 'and death upon every species of life — nay, even 
upon the earth the seal of doom is set, change, dis- 
solution are seen on all hands, and ultimately it shall 
pass away. 

We have seen that, though God's Justice must be 
visited upon the world, and sickness and suffering, 
disease, decay, and death must follow the breach of 
the law of harmony, yet His Mercy and Goodness 
came to the rescue of the ^offender and his race by pro- 
viding a remedy for spiritual blindness and death ; 
nor did His Infinite Kindness stop here : He has also 
furnished suitable remedies for the physical ills result- 
ing from man's fall ; some of these remedial agents 
were long since discovered and have been successfully 
applied for many years, some even for many centuries, 
others have but recently been found out by science, 
and doubtless there are many the health-giving proper- 
ties of which man has never yet discovered. Among 
those natural remedies which are only now in course 
of discovery are the color-rays of the objective light 
of our world, which we believe are destined, at no 
very distant day, to work a sensible change in the 
therapeutic practice not only of our country but of the 
world ; so-called scientists may oppose their use in this 
important field, and may scoff at the startling facts 
that experience is reporting of their virtues, as their 



ANCIENT IDEAS OF LIGHT AND HEAT. 53 

peers, in all ages of the world, have mocked at new 
discoveries not set down in their philosophy; but de- 
spite all opposition whatsoever they are to meet, the 
colors of the light will force and win their way into 
the effecting of a great, beneficent work among the 
sick and suffering. And there seems to us a peculiar 
fitness in this appropriation of the Sun's bright beams : 
the withdrawal of the Light of the Sun of Suns entailed 
sickness, pain and death upon man, and now shall not 
the beams from that Sun's offspring, the Sun of our 
system, be placed under tribute for relief? It is the 
purpose of this book not only to prove that the mild, 
gentle Blue ray has curative properties for some dis- 
orders, and the strong, warm Red ray for others, but 
to demonstrate just why they, and not the Green or 
Yellow, must be employed, and how they act, and 
then to explain the best methods for applying them. 

5* 



CHAPTER II. 

THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT — TRUTHS AND 
THEORIES— WHAT WE KNOW, AND WHAT WE 
RELIEVE. 

There are those who question the Divine Source 
and Authority of the Bible because they find within 
its pages statements that appear to be contradicted by 
known facts of Science. The cavillers, when sincere, 
lose sight of the real design and purpose of the Scrip- 
tures ; and so those who dispute or deny the Divine 
origin of the Kabbala, fail to appreciate its true pur- 
pose and scope. The Kabbala was not designed to 
teach Natural Philosophy; Physical Science is only 
recognized therein in so far as it is directly related to 
or bears directly upon the higher Philosophy of Spirit 
and Soul Life. It is worthy of remark and of thought- 
ful consideration, that, while scientific research has, in 
a sense, added to what may be learned from the Kab- 
bala, it has, in no one instance, established a fact an- 
tagonistic to a single tenet of that grand old system. 

There is but One God, revealed in Nature and in the 
Holy Bible, and it is human blindness that fails to 
realize that oneness — the Kabbala is no more than an 
authorized interpreter, an expounder of the two har- 
monious Revelations, and the most enthusiastic Kab- 
balist claims no more for it. God manifested Himself 
in Light, and it became His direct Agent in creation 

54 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 55 

and providence ; He shed beams of that sublime 
Light into " holy men of old/ 7 illuminating them to 
see and know the mysteries of Creation, Providence 
and Redemption, and thus inspired them to pen the 
Sacred Scriptures ; but the " natural man " could not 
receive " the things of the Spirit of God " " because they 
are spiritually discerned," and men were disposed to 
" wrest the Scriptures to their own destruction." And 
now God further testified the infinitude of His love, 
in that He illuminated men with the same Celestial 
Light to see and know and interpret the mysteries of 
the two Revelations. 

It is also worthy of note that no inconsiderable 
number of the " discoveries " of Scientific seekers 
within modern times are but recoverings of old truths 
that were once known and forgotten ; Pythagoras, as 
we have stated in the preceding chapter, knew the 
facts concerning our solar system, and that the stars 
were suns with systems similar to ours; that the 
planets were worlds peopled and probably much like 
the one we inhabit. Anaximander, too, of the School 
of Miletus, earlier than Pythagoras, taught much the 
same. Nurna Pompilius knew of Electricity and the 
laws governing it ; Pliny tells an ancient tradition of 
Pompilius : that he used an electric battery with suc- 
cess against a monster named Volta who had desolated 
the countries belonging to Rome. \_Query — Can this 
Phoenician Volta be a myth, or a reality? can the 
name of the Voltaic Pile date back to the time of 
Xuma Pompilius, the sixth century before Christ, or 
can the Italian physicist have had any association with 
the "monster" of Pliny?] 



56 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



During his study of Occultism, extending over a 
period of thirty years, the present writer has learned 
that the ancient philosophers knew much more of the 
universal cosmogony than modern scholars are usually 
disposed to admit. Indeed the ancients (I refer to those 
of the Mystic School) knew more of light, heat, elec- 
tricity, magnetism and kindred topics, and of the 
original of matter and of its uufoldment into mate- 
rial forms, than Scientists of modern times have ever 
dreamed of. Little as Scientific men of our day know 
or are inclined to believe it, the greatest discoveries 
of the last century and a half can be traced directly 
to the ancient system of Occultism ; few indeed know 
how very much modern science owes to the old Mys- 
tics. There is much more yet not learned by modern 
Scientists, that will in time be brought from the same 
source and set down as " discoveries." In our studies 
in this most interesting field, we have received aid 
from a source we do not desire at present to divulge, 
but to this source we are under obligations which for- 
bid our telling some things we should otherwise much 
like to tell. 

We have one important caution to urge upon the 
consideration of our reader : Always notice critically 
the distinction between the indisputable, immutable 
facts of Science, and the theories of Scientists — the 
former change not and constitute absolute knowledge, 
while the latter change often and may almost be styled 
guesses. From time to time a theory is advanced that 
is not swept away, but grows into or is proved to be 
a fact, but a vast majority of theories, after an uncer- 
tain life, fade away or are pushed aside by new the- 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 57 

ories, until ultimately the Truth is discovered. One 
fact established is worth more than hundreds of the- 
ories ; it is the act of a fool to dispute a fact, and it 
is little less foolish to be excessively tenacious of a 
theory — not even a Newton's theory is too sacred to 
be disputed by the merest tyro in Science, for Newton 
has been found to have been mistaken in some of his 
theories. In Science, as in Religion, it is wise to 
" Prove all things ; hold fast that which is good." 

God is "the same yesterday, and to-day, and for- 
ever ;" all Nature is controlled by fixed laws, called 
the laws of Nature, and these are laws of God; as 
God is one and unchangeable, so His laws are uniform 
and unalterable ; the laws which God enacted when 
He said "Let there be Light," when He made "the 
greater Luminary to rule the day, and the lesser Lumi- 
nary to rule the night," and when he called vegetable 
and animal life into action, are still in force and shall 
continue in force until He wills that natural life shall 
cease ; Nature in its every phase, in life and in death, 
obeys the laws of the Supreme. While the laws of 
Nature, or, to be more specific, the laws of Light, for 
these comprehend all, have not changed, human un- 
derstanding of these laws has undergone repeated and 
marvelous changes. The present scientific compre- 
hension and definition of the laws of Light are com- 
paratively of very recent origin ; many of the views 
entertained and advanced, concerning Light and its 
functions, by Scientists, and supposed to have been 
proved by them, within but a few years, have been 
discovered to have been erroneous, and we have no 
doubt whatever that some of the to-day accepted 



58 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

teachings of Science will prove to-morrow equally un- 
tenable. Continued seeking will discover now hidden 
truths, and new floods of light will be shed upon 
the grand mysteries of Light, until the day of perfect 
and complete knowledge shall come and all the glories 
of glorious Light shall be seen and known, to the joy 
of the whole earth. 

A few lines above, we have said that the laws of 
Nature are all comprehended in the law r s of Light, 
and this is true. Light is the source, the sustainer, 
the renewer, of the universe and of all life therein — 
Light is the universal motor, the one prime source and 
cause of every motion and operation in and of the 
universe — motion and operation are life, and, hence, 
Light is the fountain of Life. But this universal 
motor is the Celestial Light of the infinite Central Sun 
of the universe — upon that glorious orb depends di- 
rectly all spiritual life, and indirectly all natural life 
upon the earth and upon the planets — it is the source 
of the Astral Suns which control and sustain their 
worlds. Light is not Spirit, as the Indian Hiero- 
phants believed, but it is called the "substance of the 
intellect," because it is the instrument of Spirit — the 
substance through which the Divine Intellect and the 
Word operate. It was the first manifestation of the 
Divine Afflatus by which God eternally creates with 
His Will. The Light of the Celestial Sun is invisible 
to mortal eye, except in and through the Light of the 
Astral Suns ; the Sun of our world is one of these 
Astral Suns, and it, in common with them, receives its 
Light and derives its power from that unseen chief 
Sun. The Celestial Light is pure and perfect in the 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 50 

harmony of its principles, and is incapable of being 
divided or separated into distinct rays, and to meet 
the requirements, the absolute necessities, of the ob- 
jective worlds, it was necessary that it should man- 
ifest itself in the Astral Suns, wherein the relaxing of 
the law of harmony should make it possible to sepa- 
rate their light into rays of various colors and various 
qualities — but for this adaptation of light to the ex- 
igencies of our degenerate world, we should not b<? 
able to apply the actinic rays to certain uses and th? 
calorific to others. The fact that God has thus per- 
mitted the relaxation of His essential law of harmony, 
in order to place the special virtues of each ray of our 
Sun at our disposal for beneficent purposes, is suffi- 
cient reason why we should strive to learn how we 
may best avail ourselves of His gracious kindness. 
We shall more particularly discuss the several colors 
and the uses to which we may and should apply them 
later; before passing to the consideration of the fads 
demonstrated in modern Science and the theories 
of modern Scientists, we cannot but remark that light 
was the secret and universal medicine of the Ancients ; 
they knew all its properties far better than modern 
Science is yet capable of teaching them ; with it they 
were enabled to cure the most inveterate diseases ; they 
knew how to condense, or fix, light so as to admin- 
ister it in wine and oil. The medicinal qualities of 
light and modes of applying it, were among the 
great secrets of the Kabbala and of the Eastern Wise 
Men. 

But, if Light be the great power of Nature, what 
is the nature of this light, and how does it act-— how 



60 BLUE AND KED LIGHT. 

does it impart and sustain life? These are proper 
questions, and we propose to answer them, not pre- 
cisely as the Scientists of our day answer them, and 
yet in a Scientific manner. Accepting the facts of 
Science, and judging critically the theories of Scien- 
tists, we shall submit some ideas that are not theirs ; 
we shall reject some of their theories the more fear- 
lessly, because it is certain that they have not attained 
that degree of complete knowledge which shall in due 
time forbid differences and dissent. The patent fact 
that such Scientists as Newton, Malus, Laplace, Biot 
and Brewster have been found to have been mistaken 
in some of their theories, supposed to have been dis- 
coveries and deductions, justifies us in believing that 
Huyghens, Thomas Young, Fresnel, Bunsen, Kirch- 
hoff, Huggins, Janssen, Tyndall, Schellen and the 
others now accepted as authorities, may prove fallible 
— indeed, upon some points these eminent discoverers 
and teachers are themselves not in positive accord, 
while on others they evince that caution which must 
indicate lack of confidence in their own conclusions. 

Tyndall tells us : " Luminous bodies are independ- 
ent sources of light. They generate it and emit it 
and do not receive their light from other bodies. The 
sun, a star, a candle-flame are examples." Farther 
on, under the caption " Nature of Light," he does not 
really attempt to tell what its nature is, but he speaks 
of it as " the sensation of light," which it certainly 
is not, though it excites "the sensation of sight." 
Schellen, in his admirable work on "Spectrum Analy- 
sis," says : " Although the theory of light is now so 
completely understood that we are able to explain the 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OE LICHT. 



61 



most complicated optical phenomena, yet an elemen- 
tary reply to the question, What is the nature of light? 
still presents some difficulty." Perhaps this difficulty 
has been felt by the several writers who have at- 
tempted to tell us precisely what light is, for they all 
content themselves with telling what it is not, adding 
sometimes " the theories generally received " upon the 
subject. The nearest approach to a direct statement 
we find is by Dr. Charles L. Hogeboom in Appletons' 
Cyclopedia ; he says, it is " that force in nature which, 
acting on the retina, produces the sensation of vision." 
How very weak is this definition ! But let us try 
Schellen again : " Every substance which sets the 
ether in powerful vibration is luminous ; strong vi- 
brations are perceived as intense light, and weak 
vibrations as faint light, but both of them proceed 
from the luminous object at the extraordinary speed of 
186,000 miles in a second, and they necessarily dimin- 
ish in strength as they spread themselves over a 
greater space. Light is not therefore a separate sub- 
stance, but only the vibration of a substance, which, 
according to its various forms of motion, generates 
light, heat or electricity." This is about the weakest 
paragraph we have met with in Schellen's truly excel- 
lent work, and yet this is the nearest approach to the 
truth we have been able to find ; " Light is not a sep- 
arate substance " — true ! neither is it " only the vibra- 
tion of a substance" — the vibration (if there be a 
vibration, which we do not believe for reasons we shall 
give) is simply the means assisting the ether in carry- 
ing and disseminating light. Behind the vibration 
and superior to the luminous body which sets the ether 



62 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

in motion is Light, the positive power or force in Na- 
ture, which, emanating from the Almighty Creator, 
has a grand, mighty mission — no less than the origi- 
nating, controlling, directing and perfecting of all the 
movements, operations and processes of Nature. Light 
is the mysterious power which, setting aflame the Sun, 
imparts to it its special characteristic — the Sun is it 
visible representative, its agent, and the ether its mes- 
senger to carry it to its destination. Light itself is, 
like the ether, invisible, and it makes itself seen, man- 
ifests itself, in everything we see ; everything in Na- 
ture is a manifestation of this all-pervading, all-pro- 
ducing, all-controlling, all-invigorating power, just as 
it is the manifestation of God Himself. Luminous 
bodies, therefore, are not " independent sources of 
light;" they do not "generate it," though, as the 
agents of Light, they do " emit 'it." They are reser- 
voirs to receive and distribute the luminous essence — 
of the Astral Suns this is most strikingly true, as they 
are the vast reservoirs of light for their worlds. None 
of the " accepted " theories, we venture to affirm, can 
be made to account for the vast influence of Light in 
any one department of Nature, to say nothing of its 
stupendous work in the worlds of the universe: a 
" Sensation " could not give to the blade of grass its 
delicate tint, much less could it cause its germ to de- 
velope into a thing of beauty and utility — a "vibra- 
tion " could not paint the rose or shape and adjust its 
petals, much less could it carry it forward from its 
embryotic to its perfect state, and what proportion of 
all the varied and wonderful processes of Nature's vast 
laboratory could be ascribed to " that force in nature 



THE TBUE SCIENCE OF EIGHT. 



63 



which, acting on the retina, produces the sensation of 
vision " ? But, recognize Light as " a positive power 
or force in Nature/' an actual and active manifestation 
of the Omnipotent Will of "the Creator and Pre- 
server of all things," His agent and instrument in 
creation and providence, and we have an ample, all- 
sufficient causal power or force for all the wonders of 
Nature. Nor will this definition of Light antagonize 
any of the known facts of Science, or, in itself, neces- 
sarily militate against " accepted theories " as to the 
methods of the dissemination and action of light. It 
is but necessary to keep in mind the distinction be- 
tween Light, the power or force, and its apparition or 
visible representative, the light we see. The former is 
what the Kabbalists call Celestial Light, or Sub- 
jective Light, and the latter they style Objective 
Light — we know of no better way to keep the im- 
portant distinction in view than by adopting the name 
Celestial Light for that mighty, invisible some- 
thing that we have defined as " the power or force," 
and " its apparition or visible representative " we shall 
speak of by its common designation, light. 

There is in nature no vacuum — none is possible; as 
a learned writer has expressed it " Nature abhors a 
vacuum." The spaces throughout the universe wherein 
there is no other matter are occupied by an impalpable, 
invisible substance called iEther, or Ether. Schellen 
says : " The whole universe is an immeasurable sea of 
highly attenuated matter, imperceptible to the senses, 
in which the heavenly bodies move with scarcely any 
impediment. This fluid, which is called ether, fills 
the whole of space — fills the intervals between the 



64 



BJLUE AND KED EKiliT. 



heavenly bodies as well as the pores or interstices be- 
tween the atoms of a substance." Tyndall calls this 
something " luminiferous ether/ 7 and declares that " it 
extends, without solution of continuity, through the 
humors of the eye." This ether is the hyle of the 
ancient philosophy. We do not know why Schellen 
calls ether a " fluid," or why Tyndall says " its mechan- 
ical properties are rather those of a solid than those of 



luminiferous when in requisition as the light-bearer, 
absolutely invisible except when polarized, and impal- 
pable at all times — whether it be solid, fluid or gas, 
we opine, depends upon the substance with which it is 
associated. However, we have here to notice it in its 
employment as light-bearer, and to state how it per- 
forms the duty assigned it. 

Newton supposed that light consisted of minute 
particles .shot out by luminous bodies, fine enough to 
pass through the pores of transparent bodies — this is 
the famous " Emission Theory " which was accepted 
and maintained by Laplace and other Scientists of de- 
servedly high repute. But Huyghens, and after him 
others of equal eminence, notably Thomas Young and 
Augustin Fresnel, successfully opposed the "Emis- 
sion Theory,"" advocating what is known as the " Wave 
Theory " or the " Undulatory Theory." The former 
is now entirely discarded, and the latter almost uni- 
versally adopted by Scientific authorities. According 
to this theory, a luminous body being in a state of 
incandescence, its molecules become agitated, the 
ether between them partakes of this agitation and 
passes it to the ether without the body, and it is then 



THE TJtiUE SCIENCE OE LIGHT. 



65 



borne in every direction by the ether, moving in 
waves ; as the ether fills space, occupies all the inter- 
vals between bodies of matter, and actually fills the 
pores between the atoms of all matter, of course the 
waves roll on and bear their glorious burden not only 
through space and to the surfaces of bodies but 
actually into their pores ; as the ether " extends, with- 
out solution of continuity, through the humors of the 
eye," the light is borne to the retina and the sensation 
of sight is produced. 

We confess to no little diffidence in calling in ques- 
tion a theory which is received and maintained by all 
the distinguished Scientists of the present day, and is 
sustained by a very strong array of arguments. One 
of its most eminent champions, Professor Tyndall, 
however, appears not to feel over-confident that it 
will permanently establish itself as a fact of Science. 
He says: " The justification of a theory consists in its 
exclusive competence to account for phenomena." We 
think the word " exclusive " could well be omitted, 
and the word "general" might be substituted, in this 
"justification." We believe that we shall show that 
there is a "theory" that, though not hitherto ad- 
vanced, so far as we know, by any recognized Sci- 
entific authority, stands on quite as strong a founda- 
tion of fact and reason as the " wave theory," and is 
more justifiable even than that " now universally ac- 
cepted theory," because it more exactly and more com- 
pletely "accounts for phenomena." We have long 
studied Light in all its workings and in its every 
phase, and long since found an insurmountable objec- 
tion to the " wave theory " in the well-known fact 
6* E 



66 BLUE AND RED EIGHT. 

that two or more sets of waves, in any element or pro- 
duced by any influence, coming together at any point 
must weaken, and are apt to destroy each other. In 
the transmission of light, ether-waves must constantly 
meet this sort of opposition not only from other light- 
waves, but from sound-waves as well, for if an ether- 
wave bearing light meet an air- wave bearing sound, 
unless their undulations happen, as is scarcely pos- 
sible, to be in perfect harmony, the stronger air- wave 
must suppress the ether- wave; in this connection it is 
well to bear in mind that, according to Scientific 
opinion, the air in carrying sound moves in longitu- 
dinal waves, while the ether in carrying light moves 
in transverse waves — hence, harmony between a set of 
air-waves and a set of ether waves is really out of the 
question ; it is well also to bear in mind that the de- 
stroying influence of collision or attempted comming- 
ling would be the more inevitable on account of the 
unquestioned fact of Scientific knowledge that the 
ether-atoms in the atmosphere are actually within the 
spaces between the air-atoms — this would render in- 
dependence of wave-motion impossible, and the ether 
would necessarily lose its own waves in accommoda- 
ting itself to the stronger air-waves. Again, it is a 
well-known fact that wind interferes with sound- 
waves, and as ether is incalculably lighter than air, 
we shall have to look to the wave-theorists to explain 
why light is not checked or driven out of its course 
by even a hurricane. 

Besides, we have never been able to understand 
how ether in the pores of a solid could vibrate or 
undulate at all, much less at the rate of from 39,000 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 



67 



to 57,500 waves to the inch (the wave-theorists tell us 
the ether bearing the Eed ray makes 39,000 waves to 
the inch, and that bearing the Violet makes 57,500 
waves to the inch, the other colors having numbers 
between these extremes), especially when the necessary 
lack of strength that must characterize waves of im- 
palpable ether is taken into account ; then can any one 
not an enthusiastic wave-theorist conceive of such a 
tremendous agitation in that delicate piece of mechan- 
ism called the eye when seven rays, each with a dis- 
tinct wave-motion of its own, attempt to pass through 
to the retina at the rate of 37,000 to 57,500 waves 
per inch, and at a uniform speed of 186,000 miles a 
second ? What eye could survive such a commotion 
amid its humors and such an onslaught upon its 
retina? Could we believe the "wave theory" we 
should desire for our own eyes, and should advise 
others to wear, the deepest blue spectacles and thus 
exclude six of the waving rays with their quarter of a 
million \vaves. 

These two objections are, in our estimate, fatal to 
the "wave theory," and yet there is another more 
weighty than the two : light, as it comes from the 
great Soiar reservoir, is a unit — not seven rays, but 
one Sunbeam ; though it contains the dual attributes, 
the active and passive, the positive and negative, the 
polar force and the chemical function, they are so 
exactly equilibrated, so perfectly in harmony, that 
they form absolutely a unit; this unity is slightly 
affected by contact with our terrestrial atmosphere, 
which extracts from it in transitu a small amount of 
its" chemical Blue, and a portion of its calorific ray as 



68 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

well, still the unity is substantially maintained until 
actual contact with the earth and earthly objects, when 
it is interrupted, and the beam distributed, in order to 
permit each virtuous principle to perforin its part in 
Nature's vast laboratory; before the prism was devised 
to analyze the Sunbeam, and Science learned to test 
and judge of the special qualities and virtues and 
functions of each ray, before the God -given penetra- 
tion of man enabled him to ascertain what were the 
several principles and what was the mighty Agent, 
the seven faithful workers and the potent Light-unit 
were busy throughout the world accomplishing the 
grand, beneficent work required of them ; the prism 
has not changed the light or its united and separate 
nature and attributes — it has only shown us that the 
great unit has seven members, so to speak, working in 
perfect harmony, obediently to the laws of the Supreme. 
The smallest blade of grass and the mightiest oak, the 
tiniest mite and the huge elephant, the scarce-formed 
foetus and the intellectual giant — all Nature owes its 
every form and feature of physical life to Light, the 
mighty Unit, not to seven rays. The ancients fully 
understood this, and they never thought of light as 
seven rays riding through space on seven broomsticks 
or waving on seven distinct sets of waves; they knew 
accurately and perfectly all that man can know of the 
secrets and mysteries of Nature — of the essence and 
nature of Light as well as of its great work in creation 
and providence; as we have said earlier in this chapter, 
the ancients knew vastly more of the causal world 
than all the Scientists from Galileo or Newton to the 
present day have ever learned — incalculably more 



the true science of light. 69 

than the Tyndalls, Schellens and other wave-philos- 
ophers will learn for centuries to come unless they 
go to those old sages and learn of them, verifying 
what those old marvels of knowledge teach by all 
the means that Scientific research and study and in- 
ventive genius have placed at the command of stu- 
dents in this enlightened century. 

Theories are well enough when certain knowledge 
is out of reach, but theories are at best most unsatis- 
factory, while knowledge satisfies the longings of our 
best intellectual aud spiritual parts ; knowledge is at- 
tainable by all who seek it aright at the right sources. 
There are a few points wherein theories are permis- 
sible because the knowledge we may attain to is, in a 
measure, incomprehensible by our limited perceptions, 
but steady seeking will discover the truth that shall 
establish or dissipate our theories in due time, even in 
the most incomprehensible mysteries of Nature and of 
Nature's grandest power, Light. We conceive that 
the one fact of the unity of Light utterly suppresses 
the waves or undulations of modern Scientists — a 
Sunbeam cannot come in seven parts upon seven sets 
of waves. 

But, we do not reject the "wave theory" and its 
several subordinate theories, without having ready to 
offer a better ; a " theory " doubtless some may deem 
it, but it is really more — it is, we firmly believe, a 
Scientific fact; we claim no credit for originality or 
authorship — all we claim is such credit as may be 
due to patient study of the old Philosophy, out of 
which study it has grow T n (just as Newton's "dis- 
covery" grew out of his studies in the same old mines 



70 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

of knowledge), and to careful application thereto of 
TyndalFs "justifying" test as cited above; we believe 
that " the justification of a theory consists in its com- 
petence to account for actual phenomena/' and we 
only ask for this "theory" that it be submitted to that 
test. For the sake of greater ease in reference to, and 
criticism of, this "theory" we will call it "the im- 
pulse and tension theory ;" but, as we consider it a fact 
or truth, rather than a theory, we shall state it accord- 
ingly : 

When a luminary sends forth a beam of light, it 
imparts to that beam an impulse, in exact proportion 
to its own power, sufficient to send it to the limit of 
the periphery of the space illuminated by the lumi- 
nary, subject to opposing and interposing influences — 
e.g., the Sun imparts to every Sunbeam an impulse 
sufficient to propel it to any and every point within 
the vast circle comprised in the solar system, and 
every beam, obedient to its impulse, travels to the 
outermost verge of that circle in a direct line unless 
turned aside by a denser medium intercepting its 
course or stopped by a body that will not afford it 
passage through its pores ; so a taper gives to its tiny 
light-ray an impulse proportionate to its own bril- 
liance, which is the measure of its power. But a beam 
of light must have a conductor as well as an impulse, 
and this conductor it provides for itself, calling in 
requisition the all-pervading ether ; upon contact with 
ether, the first resistant substance it meets, light ex- 
cites tension with it, temporarily polarizing it into an 
infinite network of ether-wires in all directions, along 
which, as a system of perfect conductors, it travels, at 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OP LIGHT. 71 

the rate of 186,000 miles per second, whithersoever its 
Divinely-appointed mission calls it, if a Sunbeam to 
bless the worlds of the solar system, if but a taper-ray 
to bless the individuals within its reach. The ether- 
wires, like the ether at rest, are impalpable and in- 
visible, until, upon contact with opposing influences, 
their polarity is in different degrees modified and 
new poles are established, when the ether may be 
polarized in color, as we shall see, or incorporated with 
soil or other substances into the pores of which it has 
borne the light. As ether fills space and occupies 
every spot not occupied by any other substance, actu- 
ally filling the interstices between the atoms of every 
substance, and these light-conductors lead wherever 
ether is found or can enter, so wherever they lead, 
light goes quietly, peaceably, without being agitated or 
producing agitation. The Sun is the mighty battery, 
the ether-wires the conductors to bear its light with 
its countless and incalculably precious blessings to all 
parts of the solar system ; or, to employ an illustration 
all may understand, the Sun is to the solar system 
what the heart is to our physical organism, and the 
ethereal conductors serve as the arteries — this differ- 
ence must be noted : each beam of light creates its own 
conductors out of the Divinely-provided ether, and the 
etlier-wires are but temporary, decomposing into their 
ether-atoms as soon as their work is done or changing 
their polarity to color objects or to mix with the earth or 
some of its products. 

The thoughtful reader will see that the impalpable 
ether-wire in passing through the air may readily 
adapt itself to such motion as it may meet without 



72 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

impeding or impairing the light in transit; that it may 
pass into or through the pores of any solid, fluid or 
gas, with much greater ease than could seven sets of 
waves with independent and different motions; that it 
can pass through the humors of the eye " without so- 
lution of continuity," to the retina, and not agitate or 
disturb that most sensitive organism ; and that it con- 
ducts the beam of light undivided at a uniform speed 
through a homogeneous medium until contact with a 
denser body, medium or otherwise, modifies its po- 
larity. And the candid Scientist who will carefully 
investigate the matter will find that "the impulse and 
tension theory," so far from antagonizing any known 
fact of Science, actually simplifies and makes easy of 
comprehension many phenomena and operations of 
light that have hitherto taxed the ingenuity of skilful 
Scientists to explain or reconcile with their pet theories. 
There is one argument in support of " the impulse and 
tension theory" that alone entitles it to thoughtful 
consideration : the ablest Scientists now recognize elec- 
tricity as a product of light or a form of light — now, no 
wave can be conceived of capable of carrying an elec- 
tric flash, while tension of ether provides a suitable 
conductor. 

As we have said everything is made visible by 
light ; without light there could be no sense of sight. 
The Sunlight, as it shines around and about and 
upon us, shows but one brilliant color, while it is 
really seven colors in one, nay, an innumerable variety 
of colors, tints and shades beautifully blended in the 
one we see. Objects around us appear red, blue, 
white, black, green, gray and of every conceivable 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 



73 



hue, but in reality color belongs exclusively to light, 
and light is the incomparable artist that, with match- 
less skill, imparts, of and from its own glorious self, to 
each object the hue or tint or positive color best suited 
to it. The apple-tree, with its dark brown trunk and 
lighter brown branches, its green foliage, its pale blos- 
soms, its fruit changing from green to brilliant crim- 
son or delicate blush; the rose, with its brown stalk, 
green dress and red, pink or white flower ; the modest 
violet, tiny-blossomed alyssum, the gaudy rhododen- 
dron and the simple grass; the marble, the granite, 
each precious gem ; the beasts, the birds, the fishes, 
the reptiles, and the smallest mite ; even man of every 
race and clime — all Nature, of every known species 
owes to Light its endless variety of color and tint and 
hue and shade. Color is simply light polarizing the 
ether in the bodies it enters, and converting darkness 
into light. Not only Nature, but man's vaunted Art 
owes all of its claims to admiration to the glorious 
and glory-creating beams of Sunlight ; the genius of 
a Raphael, a Rubens, a Bierstadt, a West, a Hamil- 
ton, or a Rothermel, or the combined genius of all 
the world-renowned artists of all ages and climes, 
could not produce a single "gem of art" if denied 
the boon of obtaining colors from Sunlight. 

The popular teachers of Science unite in telling us 
that every body possesses, in a greater or less degree, 
a certain quality they call selective absorption, which, 
they tell us, enables each body to select certain rays 
of the light that enters its pores, which it absorbs, 
while the other rays it casts out and reflects from its sur- 
face ; they tell us that these ejected rays give or lend to 
7 



74 BLUE AND HED LIGHT. 

the body its color — that is, when the seven colors have 
entered its pores, the body absorbs one or more, and 
casts out the rest, the latter pass out and are reflected, 
and as a reward for this rejection the discarded ray 
or rays impart to the body the beauty of their own 
color : if the Green alone be reflected, the body appears 
Green, and if two colors be reflected, the body appears 
of the shade produced by combining those two, and 
so on ; the colors absorbed have no influence upon the 
color of the body. Moreover, these teachers tell us 
that light only lends its colors to objects while it shines 
upon them. 

Now the facts are, in our opinion, diametrically 
opposed to all these selective absorption, reflection 
and lending theories : The several bodies have no 
voice or choice in determining what colors or shades 
of color they shall assume — Light is independent 
in the exercise of its art, recognizing no authority 
but that of the laws of Nature ; in deference to that 
code, it paints the mineral, the vegetable, the animal. 
Borne by its ether-conductor, light reaches a body; 
the polarity of the ether is broken, and the Sunbeam 
is divided at the surface, certain colors enter and 
polarize the ether in the pores, imparting to it their 
own colors, or the shade produced by their combined 
colors ; the colors that do not enter shed their smiles 
upon the surface, increasing its lustre, and then pass 
on to other objects which they in turn enter and paint. 
When a single color enters an object it imparts to it 
its own color; hence, objects become Red, Yellow, 
Green, Blue, etc. The infinite variety of tints and 
shades of color are produced by the harmonious com- 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 75 

hining of two or more colors within an ohject. When 
all the colors enter and are harmoniously fixed in an 
object, in the proportions of the Spectrum, the object 
becomes White; when all refuse to enter a body, it 
remains Black, as in darkness, except that the light on 
its surface makes the Black visible; the many shades 
of Gray are caused by the colors entering and being 
fixed harmoniously but not in the proportions of the 
Spectrum ; White is often produced by the mixture of 
but two colors (e. g. Indigo and Yellow, Orange and 
Blue), or of more than two though less than all (e. g. 
Eed and Greenish Blue, Greenish Yellow and Violet, 
Green and Purple), and so, too, a body may appear 
Black though all the colors do not refuse to enter its 
pores and abide therein — if two or more inharmonious 
colors, or colors that will not combine harmoniously, 
thus enter a body, they destroy each other's influence, 
and the body remains Black. As the color of a body 
or a substance is the polarization of ether in its pores 
by light, so the color may be changed by decomposing 
the ether in a body or substance, and removing the 
color, or part of it, or adding a color, and then repolar- 
izing the ether: the bleaching of a piece of linen or mus- 
lin is an interesting illustration of the action of Sun- 
light in thus changing an object from a Yellowish or 
Brownish shade to a pure White. Two or more colors 
that produce White are called complementary colors, 
a recognition of White as the complement of colors. 

In the case of a transparent body or substance, the 
light-bearing ether passes through its pores and, none 
being posited in its passage, it remains absolutely col- 
orless and invisible; pure unpolarized ether is the 



76 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

only substance that is colorless and invisible in the 
presence of light, and it is therefore the only truly 
transparent substance known. But, as ether is impal- 
pable as well as invisible, we must take a substance 
that, though not truly transparent, is sufficiently so to 
serve as an illustration of what we desire to explain. 

Glass must serve us : prepared with care, it is suffi- 
ciently transparent to permit the luminiferous ether 
to pass through with scarcely perceptible effect upon 
either; it is on account of this quality, that glass is 
made into panes for our windows. Now, when we 
wish to impart a color to glass we introduce matter 
of the desired color among the materials in process 
of manufacture, or we apply a pigment to the surface 
of the manufactured glass. In either case, especially 
in the former, we find that the glass has assumed the 
color of the pigment, and that the glass is transparent 
now only to its own color, except that it permits very 
small quantities of the colors next above and below 
it in the scale to pass through — the other colors of 
the light are arrested at the surface and are said to 
be " thrown down." Thus, a pane of glass colored 
Blue is fully transparent to the Blue light-ray, to a 
very small extent to its congenial neighbors, the In- 
digo and the Violet, and to a still less extent to the 
Green ; all the other rays are " thrown down." But 
of this and its advantages, we shall speak when we 
come to tell how light-rays must be utilized in the 
treatment of disease; we must now explain how the 
glass becomes Blue, and why it is how transparent 
only to the Blue ray and its immediate neighbors: 
The pigment introduced or applied, has already incor- 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 77 

porated with it Blue-ray-bearing ether before it is 
combined with the glass, the combination does not 
disturb the polarity of the ether, and thus the Blue 
becomes a constituent part of the glass; the ether 
now in the pores of the glass, being especially devoted 
to the transmission of the Blue-ray, it only can pass 
through — the passage of the Green, Indigo and Vio- 
let can readily be understood by any one who exam- 
ines the color-scale shown by a prism, as described be- 
low ; it will be seen that the color-bands are not sepa- 
rated by sharp lines, but shade off into one another. 

The atmospheric envelope of the earth is transpar- 
ent, but not perfectly so ; it is warmed by the calorific 
and very slightly tinted by the Blue ray in the pas- 
sage of light through its pores ; but this Blue can only 
be perceived by the eye when the air is seen in mass ; 
hence the color of the sky which is simply the limit 
of our vision, in looking towards which w T e look 
through the mass of atmosphere. The beauteous 
luminous appearance that surrounds us during the 
interval between dark and Sunrise, and between Sun- 
set and dark, is not in any sense or degree independ- 
ent of the Sun, as some suppose and as a writer has 
recently suggested ; the vapors ever in the air form a 
perfect reflector and refractor, and they borrow from 
the Sun, before it is itself visible and after it has 
passed from view, the delightfully subdued light that 
makes the dawn and the twilight. The more or less 
obscure or dim light that is apparent when clouds hide 
the Sun is due to the partiality of Sun-rays for vapors 
and the responsive disposition of the vapors to quench 
or retain light; more or less of the Sunlight forces 



78 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

itself through even the densest clouds, the amount 
being of course in proportion to the density ; the oc- 
casional Reddish appearance of thick clouds is ow- 
ing to the tension of the Red-ray ether ; the superior 
luminosity of the Yellow ray often gives dense clouds 
a Yellowish cast. The Red appearance borne by late 
evening and early morning clouds is due to the tension 
of the Red-ray ether and its consequent less refrangi- 
bility, which makes the Red disappear last and appear 
first upon the vapory reflector as the Sun retires or 
approaches. So, too, the Red aspect of the Sun seen 
through a fog is occasioned by the greater tension of 
the ether bearing the Red rays, the other rays having 
a disposition more or less pronounced, in proportion 
to their tension, to stop with the vapor. One of the 
most pleasing effects produced by the disposition of 
some of the rays to cling to clouds is the bluish sil- 
very appearance light, floating clouds often present. 

The writer referred to above cites the account of 
the Creation in Genesis, to show that there was light 
before there was a Sun, and argues from that fact that 
there is light now independent of the Sun. — Yes ! 
there was Light before our Sun was created, just as 
there was water before the oceans, seas and lakes were 
formed ; and there is a grander more glorious Light 
than our Sun can produce or show forth. But that 
Light was and is the Celestial Light which no mortal 
eye may behold — which only the "children of Light" 
may see and they only with the subjective eye of the 
Soul. There is not, and there never was, objective 
light independent of the Sun, except that of iris co- 
suns, which we call stars. 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 79 

Before passing to the consideration of the modus 
operandi of analyzing Sunlight and ascertaining the 
colors and properties of the separate rays, we wish to 
allude briefly to the remarkable analogy between light 
and sound as seen in their respective scales of seven 
— seven tones in music, the harmony of sound, and 
seven colors in beauty, the harmony of light. Har- 
grave Jennings says: "There is a singular and mys- 
terious alliance between color and sound." Substi- 
tuting the word light for color, this is a happy way to 
allude to one of the most striking illustrations of the 
harmony that is the characteristic of all that is pro- 
duced by the Supreme Will of God — of course, the 
light we allude to is the visible light, for the Celestial 
Light, as we have shown, is the universal motor, and, 
therefore, the author of sound as w ? ell as of light. 
As w r e shall see presently, light, when divided, shows 
seven colors, ranging from Red to Violet, and invari- 
ably occupying the same relative position in the scale, 
and so sound, when analyzed, shows seven tones, rang- 
ing from the deep bass to the alto, and always occupy- 
ing the same relative position in the sound scale. The 
seven colors harmoniously and naturally blended rep- 
resent beauty to the eye, and so the seven tones har- 
moniously and naturally produced represent music 
to the ear. 

All visible light may be analyzed or separated into 
rays, but we have here to consider only Sunlight and 
its rays : 

The Sunbeam is a unit comprising nine rays in per- 
fect harmony, and travels in a direct line upon ether- 
wires formed by its own polar principle exciting ten- 



80 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

sion of ether, sustaining its unity while traversing the 
homogeneous ether ; but, upon passing into the atmo- 
spheric envelope of the earth, the increased density of 
the air modifies the polarity of the conductor, and the 
beam begins to divide ; it leaves in passing a portion 
of its calorific ray to warm the air, a small portion of 
its Blue ray to tinge the sky, such light, fleecy clouds 
as it passes through it paints in fading tints of Red, 
or Yellow, of a rich golden or a mild silver hue, and 
the vapors that pervade the atmosphere borrow and 
reflect portions of the entire beam, the reflection pro- 
ducing the beauteous, delightful sheen of dawn and 
twilight. The Sunbeam, upon reaching us, however, 
betrays no lack of beauty in consequence of its gener- 
ous bounty by the way; but upon contact with the 
earth or earthly objects, the beam entirely throws aside 
its unity and distributes its rays with their several 
colors and virtues wheresoever they can do the most 
good in beautifying the world and its objects and in 
making the earth happy in the fruitfulness of its fields 
and the prosperity of its cities. 

Sunlight has seven clearly defined colors, and two 
colorless rays of most pronounced qualities ; the colors 
are seen in the Rainbow which is the reflection, upon 
a cloud-screen, of Sunlight that has been divided into 
its colors by a natural prism consisting of raindrops 
falling between the Sun and the cloud-screen ; but, 
as the moisture-prism or the screen vary in density, 
the colors are not always defined with equal clearness, 
though they invariably appear in the order of the 
spectrum (except that sometimes a second Rainbow 
shows the spectrum inverted). For the purpose of 



THE TRUE .SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 81 

exactly analyzing a Sunbeam and measuring its rays, 
an artificial prism is employed, consisting of a wedge- 
shaped piece of glass or other transparent substance, 
and the separated rays are thrown upon a suitable 
white screen, where they appear in seven' color-bands 
— these seven bands form the Solar Spectrum, The 
spectrum always shows the seven colors, not in sharply 
drawn lines of equal width, but the colors shade off 
into each other, while, as we shall note, the widths of 
the bands are very different. The colors are : 1. Eed, 
2. Orange, 3. Yellow, 4. Green, 5. Blue, 6. Indigo, 
7. Violet, and the colorless rays are : a calorific, which 
is found below the Red, and an actinic, above the 
Violet ; those below the Green are the positive rays 
and the others are the negative rays — heat is the most 
noticeable quality of the former and actinism, or chem- 
ical action, of the latter. The colorless rays are the 
extremes of the positive and negative portions of the 
spectrum. The Eed is the positive polar ray, and the 
three Blue rays are the negative ; the Yellow is the 
most luminous, and the Orange combines the Red 
and Yellow in character as well as color; the Green 
is negative, but is influenced by the Yellow. We 
shall have occasion in later chapters to speak at some 
length of the specific properties of the several rays, 
of their functions in Nature, and of their respective 
values in the treatment of disease, and therefore will 
not dwell longer now upon this part of the subject. 

The tension of the luminiferous ether excited by 
the lightbeam upon first contact is not entirely relax- 
ed until the beam has reached its ultimate destination ; 
when light is reflected or refracted, the ether-wire 



82 BLUE AND KED LIGHT. 

being elastic is bent not sundered, and when the light 
is distributed, portions becoming fixed in color, while 
other portions assume their duties in carrying forward 
the operations and processes of Nature, there is simply 
a suitable change of polarity. We have seen that, 
upon passing from the ether-medium into the air, 
the increase of density affects the polarity of the ether- 
wire sufficiently to enable the beam to posit portions 
of its rays in the air and clouds ; so, upon passing 
from the air into glass, a still denser medium than the 
air, we see that, though the polarity of the conductor 
is maintained, the increased density evidently affects 
it, variously according to the form of the glass and 
its position in relation to the beam — if the glass be in 
the form of a square block or flat sheet, with parallel 
sides, and the beam enter at right angles, it is merely 
retarded and, upon its escape into the air, goes on its 
way just as if it had met no obstruction ; if the sides 
are parallel and the beam strikes obliquely, the con- 
ductor is bent according to the angle of incidence, 
the beam passing directly not obliquely through the 
glass — the rays resist this bending in exact proportion 
to their tensive power, the Red ray being the most 
positive is therefore the least bent and the Violet 
being the most negative is the most bent; upon 
escaping into the air, the Red straightens its wire and, 
its influence assisting the tendency of the elastic ether- 
wires to recover their course, brings the other rays to 
itself, the unity of the beam is restored and it proceeds 
towards its destination ; but when the sides of the 
glass are oblique, the rays are so much refracted and 
their conductors so bent that the Red has lost its 



1 ' 



THE 'TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 83 

power to draw the others to itself, and the wires un- 
aided, though they show their former tendency by a 
partial straightening, cannot recover their original line; 
hence, the beam is divided, so that, unless a lens of suit- 
able focus is made to lend its aid, the division is per- 
manent, and the separate rays go forwards on constantly 
diverging lines ; by placing a white screen at a proper 
distance from the prism, the spectrum of seven color- 
bands is reflected upon it. Now, as we have seen, the 
Red ray has the greatest power of resisting the refract- 
ing power of the glass, because it is the active, posi- 
tive ray, while the Violet being its extreme opposite, 
the most negative ray, its conductor is consequently 
least tense and offers the least resistance to the bend- 
ing ; hence, the Red is invariably seen at the foot of 
the spectrum and the Violet at the top, the other rays 
coming in between according to the tension of their 
conductors. Thus, we see at a glance just why the 
order of the chromatic scale is invariable. We may 
see in the foregoing explanation, also, why the Red is 
the most heating and the Violet the most cooling of 
the color-rays in their influence : resistance developes 
heat and the former offers the most resistance, and the 
latter the least, to antagonistic influences. By means 
of a lens of suitable focus placed at the right point, 
the unity of the beam may be restored — this proves 
what we have said above as to the continuance of the 
tension of the ether conductor ; the tension is only con- 
trolled by a superior force during the separation, and 
as soon as the assistance of the lens enables it to over- 
come that force it reunites the beam. 

It is interesting to note here an illustration of the 



8 A BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

law of harmony suggested by the spectrum : the Red 
ray being the most potent is proportionately smaller 
in bulk, so to speak, than its chief opponent, the Blue, 
and much smaller than the Violet. Dividing the 
spectrum into 170 parts, we find the rays occupy 
the following portions: Red, 20; Orange, 20; Yel- 
low, 30 ; Green, 20 ; Blue, 25 ; Indigo, 20 ; Violet, 35. 
The difference appears the more marked when we con- 
sider that the Blue, Indigo and Violet are all de- 
cidedly, and the Green essentially, chemical in their 
character, while the Red is but slightly sustained by 
the Orange and very slightly by the Yellow; this 
w r ould show that the chemical rays, not including the 
Green, are as 80 to 20, or if we include the Green 
with the chemical and the Orange and Yellow with 
the calorific Red, we find the proportion 100 negative 
to 70 positive. 

We have defined, with sufficient clearness and em- 
phasis our views, or we may say our knowledge, of 
the mighty power in Nature, the universal motor, the 
life-producer, life-preserver, life-promoter, life-restorer, 
Light — we have also noticed briefly the light we see, 
the apparition or visible representative of that Ce- 
lestial Power. We must be distinctly understood in 
this : When we speak, in the ordinary way, of what 
light does, or what this or that color does or is capable 
of doing, we recognize always that it is Light, the 
power or force, that is the active, though unseen, 
principle, operating through and by the visible light- 
and its several colors. 

We have spoken of Light as the Power or Agent 
wherein God manifested Himself in Creation, and the 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 85 



wnere 



propriety of this will be seen in a later chapter wh( 
we treat of Universal Dynamics, as we therein show 
that water is generated by the combustion of Hydro- 
gen with Oxygen (such as no doubt is constantly in 
progress in the Sun's photosphere), and that earth is a 
precipitate of water; thus by the Word of His Will 
God called into existence Light, and endowed it with 
the power, operating through the Astral Suns, to pro- 
duce Water, and from that Water to precipitate Earth, 
causing " dry land to appear." The thoughtful Bible 
student will readily see that this tracing of the process 
of Creation does not derogate from the Supreme 
Power and Will of the God of Light, as it does not 
ascribe to Light any power independent of God — it 
is Light manifesting the Power and Will of the Al- 
mighty and the Divine One working in and by Light, 

He sees fit ever to work in and by instrumental- 
ities. But we are not now discussing Universal Dy- 
namics ; our present theme is rather the visible light, 
the manifester of the Celestial Light. We have 
shown what this visible light is, what are its compo- 
nent rays as discovered and measured by the prism, 
how it is sent from the great Light reservoir, the Sun 
of our Solar System, and how it makes for itself a 
suitable conductor to carry it throughout the space 
belonging to our Sun. 

We may form a partial estimate of the power of the 
Sun by endeavoring to comprehend the extent of space 
under his influence and control and the number and 
size of the worlds that owe their existence, their pres- 
ervation, their places in space, and every form and 
sort of physical life upon them to the light and heat 
8 



86 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

he sends forth. The span of the space over which the 
San is lord, has been computed at six thousand millions 
(6,000,000,000) of miles. Now, taking Dr. Child, a 
very able English astronomical mathematician, as our 
pilot, let us make a rapid tour of this space, and take 
a flying peep at the worlds that revolve within : 

We take the Sun for our starting-point, and, for 
the sake of comparison, estimate his size as that of 
a globe two feet in diameter. At the short distance of 
thirty-seven millions (37,000,000) of miles, we find 
the little world which is called Mercury on ac- 
count of the tremendous swiftness (100,000 miles 
an hour) of its motion around the San; compared 
with the two-foot globe, Mercury is but a grain 
of mustard-seed. The next world we behold is the 
beautiful Venus, the most dazzling of the Sun's train ; 
this world is as a pea in size and is the nearest 
neighbor of our Earth. About ninety-two millions 
(92,000,000) of miles from the Sun, we find another 
pea a little larger than neighbor Venus, and we 
readily identify it as our own little world, the Earth. 
We travel now to a distance of about fifty millions 
(50,000,000) of miles, when we discover the ruddy 
little pwbs-head called Mars ; Venus and the Earth 
consume about the same time in moving around the 
Sun, and hence their years are almost of an equal 
length, but Mars, though his mean orbital speed is 
54,000 miles an hour, nearly that of the Earth, takes 
nearly two of our years to get around the Sun. We 
have now travelled so far from the Sun that his light 
is very perceptibly less than we are used to. But we 
have yet to go to an immensely greater distance from 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF EIGHT. 87 

the grand centre ; on our way through the " asteroid " 
zone, we pass by smaller planets at the distance of two 
hundred and sixty millions (260,000,000) of miles, be- 
cause we as yet know but little about them, and hasten 
on to the giant Jupiter, whose size is that of a small 
orange as compared with our pea and with the two- 
foot globe ; he is nearly five hundred millions 
(500,000,000) of miles from the Sun, and the light 
from the great central reservoir has grown so faint 
that four brilliant reflectors (moons or satellites, one 
of which is always full) have to contribute to his 
necessities ; his orbital path is three thousand millions 
(3,000,000,0000) of miles long, and his year is equal 
to about twelve of ours. Travelling now nearly as 
far as Jupiter is from the Sun, we find a smaller or- 
ange more than nine hundred millions (900,000,000) 
of miles from the Sun; the name of this w T orld is 
Saturn; his share of Sunlight is but one-ninetieth of 
what we enjoy, and ho less than eight satellites and a 
vast mysterious luminous " ring " surrounding him 
come to his relief; his year is nearly thirty times as 
long as ours. But far as Saturn is from the Sun, 
Uranus is twice as far, and so far is he from the Earth 
that though he is nearly four times as large as our 
world, we can seldom see him with the naked eye, 
while, looking from him, the Earth cannot be found ; lie 
has to traverse ten thousand millions (10,000,000,000) 
of miles to get around the Sun, and it requires eighty- 
four of our years to make the journey — hence, his 
year is eighty-four times as long as ours; it is not 
uninteresting to estimate the possible tenure of life 
of the inhabitants of Uranus — the three-score-aud-ten 



88 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

limit assigned by David to life in our world would 
give nearly six thousand years as the possible limit in 
that far-away world. Until a little more than thirty 
years ago, Uranus was reasonably thought to be the 
farthest, planet from the Sun, but in 1846 Neptune was 
discovered, three times as far as Saturn and one-half 
farther than Uranus, or nearly three thousand millions 
(3,000,000,000) of miles from the centre of light, heat, 
and motion. As time rolls on, possibly other worlds 
may show themselves, but we have permitted Dr. 
Child to pilot us far enough, and we return to our 
starting-point, the Sun, where we may well pause 
awhile and ponder upon the wonderful source and 
centre of this wonderful system of worlds. 

If we are lost in wonder and admiration when we 
thoughtfully contemplate the Sun's marvelous and 
beneficent influence and operations in our little world 
alone, what must be our feelings, and what words can 
we employ in giving adequate expression to our sensa- 
tions, when we recollect that this world of ours is but 
an insignificant portion of the vast, magnificent sys- 
tem of worlds, to all and each of which that Sun is 
light, heat and life ! Truly, " God moves in a mys- 
terious way His wonders to perform," and not the 
least mysterious are the constantly recurring mysteries 
of His ways in the heavens and upon the earth. Then, 
when we recollect, too, that our Sun is but one of 
many, perhaps millions, and that each has its sys- 
tem, aggregating perhaps billions of worlds, each 
world as full of wonders as ours ! well may we laud 
and magnify Jehovah's Name ! for He manifested 
Himself in Light, and through it and by it He hath 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF L1CHT. 89 

created the Universe; nay, far more! that Light still, 
in His Power and Might, sustains the innumerable 
Astral Suns and they sustain the countless thousands 
of millions of worlds that move in, though they do not 
fill, space. And just here we cannot but realize with 
renewed force the inestimable importance of the law 
of harmony in the Universal System, and in the Solar 
Systems that make the Universe : with millions of 
Suns and billions of worlds moving in space, how 
small a violation of that law might entail universal 
disaster and ruin ! 

Among the undetermined questions in Astronomy, 
not the least important is the number of Suns that, 
like ours, derive light and life-power from the Central 
Sun and dispense them to the worlds dependent upon 
and controlled by them ; and, while Science has dis- 
covered many valuable facts as to these Suns and their 
Systems, it has failed to ascertain with any approxi- 
mation to certainty, just what these Suns are, of what 
they are made, what is the nature of their luminosity, 
whence they derive their light and how they dissem- 
inate it. The ancients instruct us upon some of 
these points and afford us clews to the determining of 
others ; but modern Scientists, instead of learning of 
them and testing the lessons learned by their improved 
apparatus, prefer to grope in the dark for " discover- 
ies," and of the "discoveries" they herald a large 
percentage prove to be but theories, and the few that 
stand as facts, if not actually discovered by the aid of 
the Kabbala and Kabbalistic teachings, could have 
been found with their assistance with much less labor 
than has been expended in seeking without it. 



90 BLUE AND RED EIGHT. 

Of the lessons yet unlearned by the Science of 
our day, by study of the old fathers of philosophy 
and exploration of the mines they have opened for 
those who will seek therein, we have learned whence 
the Astral Suns derive their light and how they dis- 
seminate it; these lessons we have conveyed to our 
readers in the earlier portions of this chapter. We 
believe, too, that, by following clews supplied by the 
old Philosophers, with the assistance of more recent 
Scientists, we can learn just what these Suns are, of 
what they are made, and what is the nature of their 
luminosity. Of course, what is true of one is equally 
true of the other Astral Suns, for they are all un- 
doubtedly alike in every particular, and, for the sake 
of convenience we shall speak specially of our Sun. 

As to the size of the Sun it is sufficient to say : it 
has been variously calculated that it is from 600 to 
750 times as large as the sum of all the worlds under 
its control ; as compared with the earth, its volume is 
1,253,000 as great, while its mass is 316,000 times that 
of the earth. Gravity at the visible boundary of the 
Sun exceeds that at the earth's surface 27 times ; a 
body dropped within the influence of the Sun's gravity 
would fall through 436 feet the first second and ac- 
quire a velocity of 872 feet the next second, or about 
ten miles a minute. 

Sir John Herschel tells us that the Sun appears to 
consist of an immense globe surrounded by two at- 
mospheres, the inner non-luminous and the outer one 
a vast photosphere, or atmosphere of perpetual flame; 
he deems it probable that the inner atmosphere is a 
sort of screen to shield the globe from the glare and 



THE TKUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 91 

heat of the outer, and thinks it not impossible that 
animated life may exist upon the globe in some form. 
Other eminent astronomers corroborate his theory as 
to the sphere and two atmospheres, though we do not 
recall one who believes that animated life exists in 
any form upon the globe; a medical gentleman of 
New York, we believe, who writes well in support of 
the absurd notion, attempted some years since to prove 
that the globe of the Sun is heaven and its photosphere 
hell. Careful observations have shown that the Sun 
is a globe with two atmospheres, but nothing beyond 
this has been demonstrated. Accepting what has thus 
been proved, we cannot fully accept any one of the 
popular theories as to the material of which the globe 
is composed or the character of the incandescence of 
the photosphere. We feel confident that the Sun was 
created for specific purposes : to make of itself the 
source and centre of a grand system of worlds, and to 
produce and sustain physical life in all its forms upon 
each by shedding light and heat and through these 
pouring blessings innumerable upon all its worlds; 
and feeling thus, we are no less confident that every 
portion of it contributes to those specific purposes. 
The photosphere is unquestionably a vast flame of 
intense fire — a living and perpetual incandescence, the 
fuel Hydrogen and Oxygen ; Hydrogen is the nega- 
tive, and Oxygen the positive, polarization of ether — 
the all-pervading ether of the universe thus furnishes 
an inexhaustible supply of fuel. Chemistry teaches 
us that the burning of Hydrogen in Oxygen, in the 
proportions of two volumes of the first to one of the 
second, produces if team which is readily condensed into 



92 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

pure water — every school-boy who has acquired only 
the rudiments of chemistry knows that water is com- 
posed of Hydrogen and Oxygen. Thus, we have the 
photosphere of flame, and the product, steam, for the 
inner atmosphere, and the steam condensed, water, for 
the globe; this water in turn is decomposed, and, 
escaping, replenishes the universal ether. (It takes 
1200 quarts of pure Hydrogen and 600 quarts of pure 
Oxygen to produce 1 quart of pure water.) But the 
flame of Hydrogen in Oxygen is very faint, though 
very hot, and it is possible other substances enter into 
the flame of the Sun's photosphere to increase its lumi- 
nosity. The experiments of Spectrum Analysis have 
been thought to indicate the presence of Lithium to 
produce the Red ; Sodium to produce the Yellow and, 
with the Lithium, the Orange ; Thallium to produce 
the Green, and Indium to produce the Blue, Indigo 
and Violet, because these minerals in a colorless elec- 
tric flame produce the respective colors — we do not 
consider the experiments conclusive, nor do we realize 
the necessity for believing that any substances except 
the gases, Hydrogen and Oxygen, enter into the pho- 
tospheric flame ; still we shall not here call in question 
the Scientific theory upon this point, beyond the men- 
tion of our doubt, and adding that it is only a theory 
with little chance of ever attaining the rank and au- 
thority of a fact. In this connection it may not be 
amiss to note what none will deny, though many have 
doubtless never thought of it : Red and Blue are the 
only absolutely independent colors. 

Before dismissing this part of our subject, we have a 
few words to say in reply to the notion that the globe 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 93 

within the Sun is Heaven. The strongest argument 
adduced by the writer we have referred to as advan- 
cing this absurd theory is that astronomers have never 
discovered a planet or other object they could denomi- 
nate " Heaven." He says : " Considering that it would 
require three hundred thousand years, travelling with 
the rapidity of three hundred thousand miles a second, 
to reach the extent of space surveyed by the eye 
through the telescope," it would be impossible to en- 
tertain " the supposition that Heaven was still far out 
beyond." Neither the writer quoted nor the astron- 
omers who have been searching for "Heaven" will 
ever discover it with the carnal, objective eye; like 
God Himself, like the Celestial Sun and its Light, 
like all things " belonging to the Spirit/ 7 Heaven is 
only "spiritually discerned;" while the astronomer 
may use his telescope in vain, the humblest, when 
"born again," shall "see the kingdom of God;" 
"children of Light" alone can see the "realms of 
Light." We venture to affirm that none who are 
fitted for Heaven will experience any difficulty in 
finding or reaching that Celestial Home. 

The prism enables us to analyze the Sunlight, to 
ascertain the colors of a Sunbeam, and their respective 
proportions and refractive positions in the Scale ; but 
it does not teach us how to apply or assist us in apply- 
ing Sunlight or its separate rays in therapeutics or 
agriculture. Careful, conscientious study and prac- 
tical experience, during a long term of years, have 
convinced the author that as curative agents Sunlight 
and its component rays have no rivals in Materia 
Medica, but that, like the simples and compounds of 



94 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

the pharmacopoeia, to apply them successfully the 
physician must apply them wisely, and to do this he 
must know the character and properties f each ray, 
exactly and thoroughly, as well as have a complete 
general knowledge of the nature and functions of Sun- 
light as a sublime aggregation of marvelous virtues. 
We have found that the application of Sunrays does 
not do away with the necessity for the use of mineral 
and vegetable medicines, but that the judicious har- 
monious use of both Sunrays and medicines will gen- 
erally effect the desired cure most surely and effect- 
ually. We believe, indeed, that the most effective 
medicines, especially those from vegetable substances, 
owe their qualities to virtues imparted to them by the 
rays of the Sun. We have learned that even the 
clothing upon a patient may contribute to or hinder 
the effect of a Sunray. The most convenient medium 
for the application of specific rays in the treatment of 
disease is colored glass. We have already spoken of 
the modes of preparing glass so that it shall permit 
only the Blue, or the Red, or any desired color-ray to 
pass through, and we shall describe in a later chapter 
(Chapter VI.) when and how the Red or the Blue ob- 
other color must be employed. Here we propose 
merely to offer a few general remarks : 

The Red ray is specially demanded in cases where 
it is desired to induce excitation of the nervous sys- 
tem, the Blue where it is desired to produce an oppo- 
site effect. We have employed the Red ray as often 
and with as decidedly beneficial results as the Blue 
ray. The precise effect of the use of colored glass may 
be stated in few words thus : Sunlight possesses cer- 



THE TRUE SCIENCE OF LIGHT. 95 

tain positive qualities which, in certain conditions and 
under favorable circumstances, produce certain known 
effects upon objects in Nature, upon the human organ- 
ism as certainly as upon objects in the vegetable king- 
dom ; the qualities of Light are in perfect harmony 
and, when an object is in a responsively harmonious 
state, to state it more explicitly, when, in the case of 
a human being, the body is in perfect health, the com- 
bined qualities of Light promote that health. But, 
let that harmony in the object be suspended or de- 
ranged, let the body become diseased, and the case 
assumes at once a different phase ; some of the proper- 
ties of Light now favor, while others are prejudicial to, 
the restoration of the equilibrium, and with it a return 
to health. A ready illustration of this suggests itself: 
a patient has the Small Pox, and the calorific and lu- 
minous rays are known to be pernicious in their effect ; 
it has been customary to darken the room and to deprive 
the patient almost entirely of light — but the chemi- 
cal rays would unquestionably be beneficial ; shall we 
not admit these and exclude the others? But our 
reader is familiar with a recognition of this principle 
of accepting one ray and rejecting the rest: a man's eyes 
have become diseased, so that the brilliant and heat 
rays of the Sun not only cause him pain but aggra- 
vate the disorder ; he does not shut himself up in a 
dark room, but he procures a pair of Blue, or still 
better Violet, spectacles, which exclude the injurious 
rays and admit the beneficial ray. The use of colored 
glass, then enables us to assist Nature in reinstating 
the Divine law of harmony in the human system, and 
with it duly enforced disease is impossible. 



CHAPTER III. 

LIGHT MANIFESTED IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRI- 
CITY AND IN TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM. 

In the preceding chapter we have discussed Light 
as manifested in the light we see and in the Sun, the 
great reservoir of light for, and dispenser of light to, 
the system of worlds of which the earth is one. In 
this discussion we have accepted the facts of modern 
Science, and some of the theories of Scientists, but we 
have not hesitated frankly to dissent from, and to ad- 
vance views in conflict with, some " generally received 
theories "—views, too, which have never, so far as we 
know, been advanced by recognized Scientific author- 
ities. And, in this chapter, we shall accept only those 
of the teachings of modern Science that are certainly 
facts and such theories as, in our judgment, " account 
for the phenomena" of Electricity, and shall no doubt 
advance some ideas that are new to the Scientists of 
the present time, ideas that we believe will stand the 
strictest tests fairly applied, though there may be those 
who, considering themselves Scientists or being close 
sticklers for authority, will reject them without inves- 
tigation, if they do not actually deride them, simply 
because they do not coincide with their own precon- 
ceived notions or with the theories of those whom they 
esteem as apostles of Science. 

Electricity, in all its forms and phases, is a mani- 

96 



ETC. 97 

festation of Light. The writer on "Lightning" in 
Appletons' Cyclopaedia tells us: "Of the nature of 
lightning the ancients knew nothing; its disastrous 
effects were associated rather with the terrific sound 
of the thunder than with the flash." This would be 
an unpardonable blunder, but for the addition of the 
words " and the Greeks and Romans attributed them 
to the thunderbolt hurled by Jupiter to the earth." 
This shows the said writer's mistake to be the com- 
mon one of regarding the Greeks and Romans as "the 
ancients." " Of the nature of lightning/' as of all 
the operations, processes and phenomena of Nature, 
"the ancients," properly so called, knew far more than 
modern investigators have yet discovered, and, as we 
have before said, the old Philosophy comprehends vast 
stores of knowledge not yet embraced in our Science. 
The ancients knew not only that Electricity was a 
manifestation of Light, and that the phenomena of 
Lightning were phenomena of Electricity, but a pas- 
sage found among the fragments of Ctesias shows that 
the utility of lightning-rods was understood four cen- 
turies before the Christian era ; this passage tells of a 
fountain in India from the bottom of which was ob- 
tained a sort of iron which, made into rods and " set 
up in the ground, averted clouds, hail and lightning." 
But it is true that not only the Greeks and Romans, 
but the learned of much more recent times, knew 
nothing "of the nature of lightning," or of its cause, 
Electricity. The knowledge was lost until the Abbe* 
Nollet in 1746 began to notice the identity of effects 
produced by thunder-clouds and the prime conductor 
of an electrical machine ; then "Winckler noticed that 
9 o 



98 . BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

the principle of the powers of Electricity and Light- 
ning was the same. Our own Dr. Franklin, in 1749- 
50, satisfactorily demonstrated the similarity of the 
two, and. three years later he made his famous kite 
experiment. But, before he had experimentally tested 
them, others proved the correctness of his theories : 
Dalibard, May 10th, 1752, obtained sparks by means 
of an iron rod forty feet high in the garden at Marly, 
and by the same means charged Leyden jars ; as early 
as 1751, M. Romas is said to have constructed a kite 
seven feet five inches high and three feet, at its widest 
part, in width, with a surface of eighteen square feet 
— this kite was raised, on the approach of a storm, to 
a height of 550 feet, and sparks were obtained accom- 
panied by violent shocks, and, as the storm increased, 
flashes of fire, with explosions, darted to the ground 
(the French Academy of Sciences awarded to M. 
Romas the credit of the invention of the electric kite, 
though subsequently the French medal awarded to 
Franklin said " Eripuit ccelo Fulmen"). Franklin 
made his kite experiment June the 15th, 1752. He 
had before suggested the feasibility of employing 
lightning-rods, and afterwards demonstrated it most 
satisfactorily. . Thus, after a lapse of more than two 
thousand years, Lightning was rediscovered to be Elec- 
tricity, and lightning-rods were reinvented. 

Careful investigations have shown a close relation- 
ship subsisting between Atmospheric Electricity and 
Terrestrial Magnetism, and they can be most satisfac- 
torily traced to a common source, which we shall see 
is the great source of objective light, the Sun, and the 
Stars. It is interesting to note, without going into 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 99 

tedious details, the various contradictory theories of 
Scientists as to the nature and sources of Electricity, 
and no less interesting is it to ascertain wherein the 
various popular theories are alike wrong : 

First, as to the nature of Electricity — what Elec- 
tricity is, there have been two popular theories : The 
one now most generally received is that it consists of 
two imponderable fluids which mutually attract each 
other; they never penetrate bodies, but locate them- 
selves upon the surfaces ; bodies of similar electricity 
repel each other, and bodies to approach each other 
must be charged -with opposite fluids. The other 
theory, of which Dr. Franklin was the eminent ex- 
ponent, is that Electricity consists of but one fluid ; 
each body contains a certain quantity, — when in ex- 
cess it is plus, or positive, and when a deficiency exists 
it is minus, or negative ; that the tendency is always 
to equilibration. 

In giving our views of Electricity, we must recog- 
nize the relationship between Electricity and Magnet- 
ism, noticed above : We believe that Electricity 

IS A PERIPHERAL POLAR FORCE MOVING OUT OF 
EQUILIBRIUM, AND MAGNETISM IS A POLAR FORCE 

moving in equilibrium. The attraction of bodies 
charged with the opposite electricities for each other, 
and the repulsion of those charged with either electri- 
city, are facts with which all observers must be familiar ; 
and that the positive electricity is strictly excluded 
from entering, and is confined to the surfaces of, bodies 
is true, and affords a strong illustration of the Wisdom 
and Beneficence of the Author of the laws of Nature : 
were the positive force permitted to penetrate bodies, 



100 P.IYCE AND RED LIGHT. 

it would annihilate the negative, and the universe of 
matter would soon pass back into chaos. When the 
positive and negative forces of Electricity harmonize, 
they move in equilibrium, as in Terrestrial Magnet- 
ism ; when they are separated, they become antago- 
nistic, and positive Electricity becomes a "blind force," 
as the ancients termed it — they symbolized Electricity 
in equilibrium by a Serpent swallowing its tail. Posi- 
tive Electricity is the active, polar force, and the Nega- 
tive is the passive, depolarizing force. Positive Elec- 
tricity is ether tensely polarized, and when pushed to 
its utmost tension Fire is produced. 

Now, as to the source or origin of Electricity : No 
question in nature has evoked such earnest antagonism 
among modern Physicists, and not one has so utterly 
failed to receive a satisfactory solution, as this. The 
ancients knew all about it, and, if our modern investi- 
gators could be induced to study the old Philosophy 
more and theorize less, this question, like many others, 
would soon be settled. Lavoisier, Laplace, Volta, 
De Saussure and others have endeavored to show that 
Electricity is derived from the earth by evaporation, 
which appears really absurd in the light of the fact 
that the Electricity at the earth's surface is purely 
negative. Pouillet advanced a modified version of 
this theory; he held that "evaporation to produce 
electricity must be accompanied by chemical decom- 
position, as when it occurs from saline mixtures, from 
the surface of heated iron, which becomes oxidized, 
and more especially when the vapor proceeds from the 
leaves of growing plants." We copy this statement 
of Pouillet's views from Appletons' .Cyclopaedia ; the 



•Q3ivaanin&3Nn woqoni* 



(uoq^o) HldV3 



SISHHiNAS HHI, NVW 



OT 

,r iiAa: jo aaoav ehx 
-ssaK^ava jo aisoAV 3HX 



H 
m 

S3 

w 



P 

w 
II 

w 
B 

I 



(udSaxq) 3 U I d 



HinHDlVl^ 



NO! j. tfawnoJ 



ivuisv 




LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 101 

writer of the article in which it occurs adds : " Com- 
bustion also is a source of atmospheric electricity, as 
is seen upon a large scale in the constant flashes of 
lightning that sometimes play around the summits 
of volcanoes daring their eruptions. The rushing of 
currents of wind past each other, or against opposing 
objects, also generates electricity by the friction it oc- 
casions." In reply to Pouillet, we need but to say 
that the action of Light in decomposing matter does 
generate electricity in small quantities, but not, in the 
smallest degree, in proportion to the vast quantities 
that fill the air, to say nothing of space beyond. 
" Combustion also," we admit, "is a source," but, as 
the writer alludes only to combustion in this little 
world of ours, we must add : while combustion does 
develope Electricity it is only as the candle-flame 
produces light and heat — all that is developed by 
the trifling combustions in our world, with all added 
that can be derived from the "rushing of currents 
of wind " and the decomposition of matter, would not 
in a hundred years be sufficient to meet Nature's re- 
quisitions in a single month. Yes ! Combustion does 
produce the vast stores of Electricity that fill space 
and provide Nature with one of her most important 
means of working — but it is a combustion beyond the 
ken of " accepted " Scientists ! 

De la Rive believes that the Sun is the source of 
Electricity, but lie admits that he can give no reason 
for his belief. Schonbein attributes its origin to the 
chemical rays of the Sun, because Oxygen under the 
influence of light is capable of producing Ozone. De 
la Rive nearly approximates the truth and Schonbein 
9 * 



102 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

needs but to omit the word " chemical " to be correct 
as nearly as his conception of the Sun will permit. 

Light is the Source of Electricity! The 
original source is the great invisible Celestial Sun, but 
as the Astral Suns are the visible manifestations of 
that original Luminary, we may say, without violence 
to the truth, the Sun and Stars are the source of Elec- 
tricity ! The positive rays of Light produce positive, 
and the negative rays produce negative, Electricity ; 
the former is absorbed by the aqueous vapor of the 
atmosphere, water having a strong affinity for it, while 
the latter is absorbed by the earth which has an equal 
affinity for it. 

We repeat : Electricity is a manifestation of Light ! 
We cannot conceive how many of the known phe- 
nomena of Electricity can be accounted for upon any 
other hypothesis. The single fact that Electricity is 
found to be more and more positive as we get farther 
from the earth can be explained only when we realize 
that it is most tense near its source and loses in tension 
as it spreads over space ; the theory that evaporation 
has anything to do with originating positive Electri- 
city is sufficiently refuted by the fact that when the rain 
conveys to the earth the positive, the earth brings it 
into harmony with its own negative, Electricity. It is 
worthy of remark that the modern Scientific author- 
ities are coming to recognize the true source of Elec- 
tricity : Schellen, one of the most learned and de- 
servedly popular writers on Light, in his work on 
" Spectrum Analysis," says " the vibrations of a sub- 
stance [ether] which according to its various forms of 
motion, generates light, heat or electricity." We have 



LIGHT IX ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 103 

declined to receive the "vibration " or "wave theory/' 
and only accept the statement that ether " generates 
light, heat or [and] electricity," with the explanation 
that as ether, in its forms of Oxygen and Hydrogen, 
is the fuel of the Sun's flame, it may be said to " gen- 
erate " light, heat and electricity. But our purpose in 
here citing Schellen is simply to show that he, one 
of the most distinguished Scientists of modern times, 
assigns one origin to light, heat and electricity ; and 
others are more or less disposed to learn the great 
lesson that- Electricity is a manifestation of Light ! 

Notwithstanding their mistaken theories as to the 
nature and source of Electricity, however, we must 
acknowledge our obligation to many modern Scientists 
for a vast amount of most valuable information they 
have obtained by patient painstaking investigation 
and given liberally to the world. In noticing some 
of the phenomena of Electricity and Magnetism, we 
shall have occasion specially to mention some of those 
to whose indefatigable researches the Scientific world 
is indebted for the progress made in this important 
department of learning, and we shall mention them 
with the single regret, mingled with our esteem and 
admiration, that they did not simplify their labors 
and no doubt amplify the extent of their knowledge 
by availing themselves of the teachings of the Wise 
Men of ancient times. 

There are, as we have already learned, throughout 
Nature two distinct forces or principles : the positive, 
or active, and the negative, or passive, the masculine 
and the feminine — and we find these two in Electri- 
city. We have seen, too, that the atmospheric enve- 



104 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



lope of the earth is charged with positive Electricity, 
the higher the stratum the more positive the Elec- 
tricity, and we have seen why it is so ; the tension of 
this positive force varies, however, and at times it is 
intense near, or intense currents move towards, the 
earth. The earth is full of electricity ; at the surface 
it is null or negative. In the open country, where 
foreign influences are least felt, the equilibrium is 
found about three feet from the ground ; trees, houses, 
etc., carry the negative upwards, and place the equi- 
librium at a higher point. Thus we see that the earth 
and the air are oppositely charged ; so long as the pos- 
itive and the negative hold their places, and the equi- 
librium is maintained, all is serene, but let this equi- 
librium be disturbed, by heat or other influence, and 
immediately the electric flash visibly notifies us that 
Nature is enforcing her law of harmony by the res- 
toration of the equilibrium. 

De Saussure was the first to study systematically 
variations in the electric tension ; Ronalds at Kew, 
Clark in Ireland, Romershausen and Dillmann in 
Germany, and Palmieri in Naples, have followed up 
the study most satisfactorily ; from them we learn that 
the diurnal variations in atmospheric electricity un- 
der a serene sky in the several countries, differ very 
slightly as to the hours of maxima and minima. The 
observations of Ronalds are critically exact; he em- 
ployed the ordinary electroscope in communication 
with an insulated conductor elevated above ground, 
by means of which he collected electricity from the 
surrounding air ; his observations covered a period of 
five years and included 15,170 quantities; of these, 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHEKIC ELEOTJRICITY, ETC. 105 

14,515 are of positive and 655 of negative electricity. 
He took his observations at the even hours, Greenwich 
mean time, throughout the day- of twenty-four hours, 
and the result is given thus : The tension of Atmo- 
spheric Electricity [see Plate III.] is at its minimum at 
2 A. M., and there is a gradual increase until 6 A. M., 

Noon. 




Midnight. 
Plate III. — Variations in Electricity of the Atmosphere. 

from which hour the increase is. more rapid, so that at 
8 it is more than double what it is at 6 ; it then in- 
creases more slowly until 10, when it has attained its 



' 



106 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

first or morning maximum ; it then diminishes grad- 
ually until 4 P. M., when it has reached its afternoon 
minimum, which is not nearly so low as at 2 A. M., 
and indeed scarcely below the degree at 8 A. M. ; it 
then rises until 6, and from that hour until 10, which 
is called its evening maximum, it varies impercep- 
tibly ; then it falls until at 2 A. M. it has returned to 
its starting-point, its lowest tension. The diurnal 
variations in the magnetism of the earth are equally 
marked ; Graham, in 1722, was the first to note them, 
and M. Arago has since added important observations, 
by which we learn that herein, too, there are two max- 
ima and two minima in the variations : starting from 
11 P.M., the north pole of the needle travels towards 
the east until at 8.15 A. M. it reaches its minimum 
declination ; it then returns and travelling westward 
to its maximum at 11.15 P.M.; going again to the 
east it reaches its second minimum between 8 and 9 
P. M., and thence westward it attains its second max- 
imum at 11 P. M. 

Besides the diurnal variation in tension, there is 
also a monthly variation in the quantity of electricity 
in the air; the difference is shown by M. Quetelet^ of 
Brussels, in the table on the following page, the ob- 
servations being made each day at about noon : 

We have shown that positive Electricity proceeding 
from the luminous heavenly bodies charges the atmo- 
sphere to about three feet from the ground where it 
meets the surface Electricity which, proceeding from 
the earth, is negative ; that, under a serene sky, the 
tension of the positive current varies diurnally and 
the quantity increases and diminishes month by 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 107 



Months. 


1844. 


1845. 


1846. 


1847. 


1848. 


Mean. 


January 


« 


471° 


562° 


957° 


487° 


605° 


February 


u 


548 


256 


413 


295 


378 


March 


a 


262 


95 


282 


164 


200 




April 


a 


93 


94 


221 


155 


141 




! May 


u 


163 


49 


67 


59 


84 


1 June 


(C 


51 


39 


47 


48 


47 




i J ul y 

i 


a 


58 


33 


43 


61 


49 


August 


90° 


89 


57 


11 


64 


62 


September 


91° 


95 


62 


39 


63 


70 


October 


110 


299 


98 . 


107 


120 


131 


November 


127 


334 


274 


160 


152 


209 


December 


340 


742 


799 


356 


281 


507 


Annual Mean... 


u 


267 


202 


225 


162 


206 



month; that the negative keeps pace with it in its 
fluctuations ; that so long as these two forces are held 
in equilibrium, each performs its allotted task quietly, 
and that so soon as the equilibrium is disturbed, light- 
ning is produced in the effort of Nature to restore the 
equilibrium. We presume every reader realizes that 
Lightning, so destructive to property and life at times, 
is nevertheless one of God's best and wisest provisions 
for the welfare of His creatures, in that it is an inval- 
uable means of purifying the atmosphere and thus 
promoting health and life on the earth. We shall see 



108 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

other tokens of the value of Electricity later in this 
chapter. 

Moisture, in the form of fog, mist or rain, has a 
direct influence upon the electric condition of the at- 
mosphere. Vapor consists of small globules or small 
spherical balloons filled with air ; these unite to form 
fog or mist. The outer surface of each of these glob- 
ules is charged with electricity, and they form, as it 
were, myriads of Leyclen jars charged ; a cloud is an 
aggregation of these cells. In a storm, the electricity 
upon the cloud surface is discharged and the inner 
globules send out a fresh supply with more than mil- 
itary promptness and precision ; thus the surface is 
again and again recharged by its globular battery. 
Then each drop of rain, hailstone or snowflake bears 
with it to the earth positive electricity which assists in 
neutralizing the negative condition of the earth's sur- 
face. 

There are three variations in the electrical state of 
the atmosphere before, during and after a thunder- 
storm : before the air about us is negative, during the 
storm, it is positive, and immediately after the cessa- 
tion of the rain, it is again negative. As the elec- 
tricity is drawn from the atmosphere directly sur- 
rounding the cloud, sometimes when the cloud is 
of extended magnitude the air becomes negative for 
twenty or thirty miles around. Negative zones always 
exist when rain-clouds are floating in space; hence, 
moisture always modifies the electricity of the atmo- 
sphere. The condition of the air under a clouded 
and a serene sky, as indicated by an electrometer, is 
shown in the following table ; 



LIGHT 1JN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 109 





c3 

3 
P 
« 

208° 
1133 


« 

Jo 

n 

220° 

493 


o 

OS 

129° 


17° 
109 


46° 
G3 


d 
C 

36° 

^7 


i-s 
41° 

35 


<n ■ 
3 

- 

56° 

64 


a 

"S. 

0) 

ce 
42° 

7S 


o 

1 

u 
O 

75° 

1fi8 


^2 

5 

o 

109° 


1 

<° 
•° 

O 

ft 

181° 
571 


Clouded Sky 



















Water, a powerful absorber of positive electricity, 
collecting in vapor from the surface of the earth and 
the sea and inland streams and lakes, ascends into the 
colder regions, and absorbs positive electricity — then 
it falls in rain, hail or snow, and its discharge of pos- 
itive, neutralizes the earth's negative, electricity ; thus 
an excessively negative condition is prevented, a con- 
dition that is prone to court epidemics of the cholera 
and gastro-enteric type. And in this, we see one way 
in which Light fulfils its beneficent work. 

M. Quetelet has observed strong responsive rela- 
tions between the barometrical and electrical condi- 
tions of the atmosphere; although temperature and 
wind influence the barometer as much as moisture, 
he has ascertained that, as the barometer rises so does 
the positive condition of the air increase. Peltew, for 
this reason, attributes barometric changes to the elec- 
tric changes produced by moisture and not to mois- 
ture itself. 

That a strong reciprocal relation exists between 
Atmospheric Electricity and Terrestrial Magnetism is 
readily demonstrated — indeed they are one manifesta- 
tion of Light in two aspects; as we have said, the one 
is a polar force moving out of equilibrium, the other 
a polar force whose dual principles are in a perfect 
state of equilibration, There are several instructive 
10. 



110 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

natural demonstrations of the reciprocal relation we 
refer to : M. Arago states that in the Yicentin Hills 
there is a fountain which at times, especially after a 
long drought, is quite dry, and then, on the approach 
of an electric storm, it suddenly overflows, the over- 
flow filling a canal with a turbulent stream. At a 
short distance from Perpignan there is an artesian 
well, which was furnishing a large amount of water, 
when the supply suddenly diminished, and it was 
feared that some obstruction had gotten into the lower 
part of the hole ; but, as suddenly as it had diminished, 
it returned to its former yield : one day, on the ap- 
proach of a storm, a rumbling noise was heard under- 
ground about the well, then an explosion, and a plen- 
tiful flow of water came. Thermal springs often 
announce the approach of a storm by becoming 
strongly agitated, and the agitation subsides immedi- 
ately after the storm. The vapor which issues from 
the crater of Vesuvius is strongly positive and fre- 
quently vivid lightning belches forth, with terrific 
thunder at times. The great fog of 1763, which 
covered the greater part of Europe, was strongly pos- 
itive ; a volcanic origin was suspected. 

It is well known that Lightning is the flash, or 
series of flashes, that is evoked by the discharge of 
Electricity from a positive into a negative cloud or 
into the negative surface-vapors of the earth ; that 
the air being a non-conductor, the discharge creates 
a vacuum, and, as " Nature abhors a vacuum," the 
chasm is immediately closed with a report more or 
less loud in proportion to the volume of the discharge 
and the consequent extent of the chasm, and this re- 



LIGHT IX ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. Ill 

port is what we call thunder j that between the oppo- 
site Electricities there is always a mutual attraction, 
and between two volumes of the same Electricity there 
is a mutual repulsion. We have said that Lightning 
is the immediate consequence of a want of equilib- 
rium between opposing currents of Electricity, and is 
caused by Nature's act of producing equilibrium — 
the ordinary Scientific statement that between the two 
" fluids" "the tendency is to equilibrium" is true, 
and is a recognition simply of the fact that the law of 
harmony obtains here as throughout Nature's domain. 
Between two opposing currents there is always a space 
of neutral quality, of which the positive ingredient re- 
pels the positive current, and the negative ingredient 
repels the negative current — thus the neutral forms a 
resistance to the coming together of the opposite cur- 
rents ; this resistance successfully opposes the attrac- 
tion, until it becomes weakened or the attraction in- 
tensified. Whatever the condition of the Electrical 
charge of the atmosphere, the surface negative corre- 
sponds in condition ; when a positive current of great 
tension descends towards the earth, the earth responds, 
the attraction overcomes the resistance, the forces 
meet, and the flash and report attest the violence of 
the concussion ; or, intense heat rarefies the air, the 
resistant neutral becomes attenuated and w r eak, where- 
upon heat-lightning follows, gratefully cooling the 
atmosphere and neutralizing the excess of negative 
electricity in the air we breathe. 

The importance, and value to us, of the law of har- 
mony is in no one respect more evident than in the 
maintaining or restoring of the equilibrium between 



112 BLUE A.ND RE© LIGHT. 

positive and negative Electricity ; an excess of the 
former in the air we breathe - brings into our midst 
epidemics and diseases of the inflammatory type, such 
as Scarlet Fever, Diphtheria, Small Pox, etc., while 
an excess of the latter as surely brings epidemics and 
diseases of the gastro-enteric order and excessively 
debilitating and wasting type, such as Cholera, Dys- 
entery, Typhus and Typhoid Fevers, etc. A health- 
ful season, one in which we escape epidemics and in 
some measure diseases not of the epidemic types, is 
one wherein the two electric forces maintain their 
equilibrium or Nature promptly enforces her law of 
harmony when either exceeds its just proportions. 

In the preceding chapter, we closed our arguments 
against "the wave theory" and in support of "the 
impulse and tension theory," with the remark : " No 
wave can be conceived of capable of carrying an elec- 
tric flash, while tension of ether provides a suitable 
conductor." Just as the Sunbeam receives an im- 
pulse from the Sun and upon contact with ether ex- 
cites tension with it, creating conductors upon which 
to travel upon its errand of blessing, so when the elec- 
tric contest gives forth its flash, in precisely the same 
way and of precisely the same material the flash of 
light provides for itself conductors upon which it trav- 
els, whether to destroy property and life or to scatter 
benefits in its path. The zigzag course it often takes 
does not militate against our view, because the elas- 
ticity of the ether conductors allows it liberty to 
select its course, selecting as it does the congenial 
vapors that are not themselves already charged, and 
shunning alike the clouds whose positivity repels it 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTBICTTY, ETC. 113 

and the obstructions that would hinder its swift 
flight. 

There are not several kinds of Lightning, as pop- 
ular text-books seem to teach — there is but one kind, 
assuming different aspects, according to the distance 
at which the discharge occurs, and the density or 
rarity of the medium or media through which it has 
to travel. It is well known that rarefied air is pecu- 
liarly favorable to the movements of electric flashes, 
and when the atmosphere is subtile the discharge of a 
large, tensely charged cloud is prone to move in mass, 
and the flash to assume the appearance of a ball of 
fire — this is called " ball-lightning," and is naturally 
the most destructive form of Lightning ; when the dis- 
charge occurs at a considerable distance from us, and 
the atmosphere intervening is dense or loaded with 
positive Electricity, the flash chooses a zigzag course, 
and is called " zigzag-lightning ;" it takes the name 
of "forked-lightning" when the flash divides to avoid 
an obstruction near its source ; when the discharge is 
at a great distance and vivid flashes occur in rapid 
succession, they seem to be blended, appearing as one 
vast sheet, and this is appropriately called " sheet- 
lightning," so, also, the reflection of flashes below the 
horizon presents the same appearance, though less 
vivid, and bears the same name ; when the discharge 
is near us, the flash often moves in a direct line and is 
designated " straight-lightning ;" the flashes of " heat- 
lightning" may be like those of the zigzag, straight, 
or sheet, though they are comparatively faint, and 
often are so faint that they constitute what is known 
as " glow-lightning," because the clouds are smaller 
u»* H 



114 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

and not heavily charged; "glow-lightning" is usually 
unattended by thunder and is not followed by rain. 
Lightning changes the surrounding clouds, lessening 
their capacity to hold water, and the excess falls in 
rain, and it disturbs the air which in recovering its 
balance creates a more or less violent wind. 

We have spoken of the affinity of the vapors that 
pervade the atmosphere for positive Electricity : water 
in every form is an excellent conductor of positive 
Electricity, but especially so when tepid or warm; 
substances that, when dry, repel it, when moist or wet, 
attract it — it is for this reason that Dr. Franklin de- 
clared : " It is safer to be in an open field [during a 
thunder-storm, than sheltered from the rain by a tree 
or wall, because] when the clothes are wet, if a flash 
in its way to the ground should strike your head, it 
may run in the water over the surface of your clothes, 
whereas, if your clothes were dry it would go through 
the body." 

We have, in the preceding chapter, stated that a 
Sunbeam, on its way to the earth, gives some of its 
Blue ray to color the atmosphere and some of its ca- 
lorific ray to the vapors that pervade it — but we did 
not state that the vapors actually absorb about two- 
thirds of the calorific ray. " In consequence of this 
heavy draft upon the heat ray, the vapors become 
warm and attract positive Electricity, which is de- 
posited upon the surfaces of each globule, and, when 
thus charged, the vapors cease to act as a con- 
ductor. We have explained, earlier in this chapter, 
how the vapors ascend into the regions of the heavenly 
bodies, absorb Electricity, and, coming down to the 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 115 

earth again, bear their load with them ; we have stated, 
too, that each drop of rain, hail-stone and snowflake 
brings down fresh supplies of positive to harmonize 
with the earth's negative and produce Magnetism. 

The earth itself and all solids and liquids upon it 
and gases about it are negative, with a few exceptions, 
among which are dry air and dry earth, and this is 
the reason why the earth and its contents and inhab- 
itants attract the positive and are good conductors; 
the ground where a lightning-rod is intended to dis- 
charge must be moist or it will not receive the pos- 
itive, because dry earth is positive, like dry air, and is 
therefore a non-conductor. The metals are all good 
conductors, but pure platinum and copper are the best. 
So remarkable is this characteristic of copper that it 
has been observed that men working in copper-mines 
or factories never have an attack of Cholera or simi- 
lar diseases : the copper attracts to itself the positive 
and imparts it to man, the fluids in whose body are 
among the best of conductors, and the positive, har- 
monizing with the negative always present in man, 
tends to equilibrate the physical forces and princi- 
ples within him, and thus to render him less liable to 
disease ; but if he receives an excess of the positive he 
becomes liable to inflammatory disorders. Notwith- 
standing the fact that the fluids in man's body are 
perfect conductors, when a flash of lightning strikes 
him it seldom spares his life — the reason is that in 
passing through him, its action upon his nervous sys- 
tem is so violent that it succumbs, and he dies. It is 
worthy of remark that, while a living man or beast is 
one of the best conductors of positive Electricity, the 



116 BLUE AND KKD LlfcKHLT. 

corpse of either absolutely rejects it — the reason is : 
the moisture in the one case makes the body strongly 
negative, and therefore it attracts the positive, while 
at death, decay having commenced, the body becomes 
more or less positive and rejects Its kind. 

That water itself is strongly negative, its great af- 
finity for the positive amply shows, and doubtless in 
the large proportion of water that everything in Na- 
ture contains we may see one reason why the earth 
and almost everything in or upon or about it is nega- 
tive : In the Vegetable Kingdom we find the propor- 
tion of water is from 20 to 99 per centum ; and ani- 
mals consist largely of water — e. g. a man weighing 
150 pounds contains 116 pounds of water. The 
water of the sea and of large lakes and streams is 
positive at and a little below the surface and negative 
from that point to the bottom ; the Sunbeam that 
strikes the surface of water has but about one-third of 
its calorific ray with it and the water quickly absorbs 
that — hence the water just as far as the heat ray has 
penetrated is warmed, and attracts positive Electri- 
city from the air, but below that it is cool and nega- 
tive. It is well for us that the vapors of our atmo- 
sphere are so partial to the calorific ray, for were it 
not for the moisture in our air, our delightful earth 
would be completely ice-bound and become a frozen, 
lifeless waste. 

Among the most fascinating experiments with the 
electric flash are those connected with the analyzing 
and measuring of its light. The success hitherto has 
not been great, though sufficiently so to be most 
interesting and to encourage the hope that farther 



LIGHT 'IS ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 11? 

developments will be made; enough has been ac- 
complished to identify the electric flash with ordinary 
light ; the differences that its spectrum exhibits from 
that of a Sunbeam are not greater than those between 
the various flashes, and these differences are readily 
accounted for. The flash is the product of the pure 
Electricity derived from the Sun influenced by vapors 
and gases of a non-solar character, and, hence, we find 
that, while the principal colors of the pure Sunbeam 
are always more or less clearly defined, there are un- 
mistakable evidences of the presence of earthy gases 
and other earthy substances. Professor Kundt, of 
Zurich, has been the most successful in experiments 
in this most fascinating field ; he has analyzed up- 
wards of fifty flashes by means of a pocket spectro- 
scope. As the scope of this work would not permit a 
detailed notice of the dark lines that appear on the 
Solar Spectrum, called " Fraunhofer's Lines" from 
the eminent Physicist who discovered most about 
them, we purposely avoided referring to them at all in 
the chapter on " The True Science of Light/' and now 
we only refer to them to remark that the principal differ- 
ences between the spectra of the several electric flashes, 
and between them and that of the Sunbeam, is found 
in the lines that cross or mark the color-bands ; as 
these lines are attributable in the case of the Sunbeam 
to atmospheric influences upon the beam in transit, so 
in the case of each flash they are to be traced to effects 
produced upon its light by gases that cross its course. 
The electric flash has a peculiar intensity of action 
and is proportionately more susceptible to foreign 
influences than a Sunbeam. As might be anticipated, 



118 BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 

the various flashes show these influences in greater or 
less degree in proportion to the length of their 
journey. As seen by the eye, the light of " straight- 
lightning " is the purest white, and that of " forked- " 
and "■ zigzag-lightning " is purer than that of " sheet- 
lightning/' which has a reddish appearance — oc- 
casionally violet and bluish, though the distant 
" glow-lightning " has specially the violet and bluish 
aspect ; the spectroscope makes the degrees of purity 
plain. "We see in Professor Kundt's discoveries the 
important fact verified that a cloud discharging into 
the earth has usually a far greater degree of tension 
than those discharging into neighboring clouds far up 
in the air. 

But we pass to a brief consideration of the earth's 
Electricity, Terrestrial Magnetism. We have de- 
fined this as " a polar force moving in equilibrium," 
and have intimated that it is composed of the two 
forces of Electricity, each being controlled by the 
other, and the two acting in concert. Before proceed- 
ing to notice the character of this harmonious com- 
pound and its important agency in every department 
of Nature's operations, it may not be amiss to men- 
tion the origin of the name by which it is designated, 
though no doubt our reader is already conversant 
with it : 

A Magnet is a substance so charged with Electri- 
city that it attracts certain other substances to itself; 
a Magnet is natural when it exhibits this quality in 
its natural state, and artificial when the quality is de- 
veloped into action within it, by friction or contact with 
a natural Magnet. The first natural Magnet discover- 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 119 

ed was the " Loadstone " which was found in Mag- 
nesia, the most easterly division of ancient Thessaly, 
Greece ; the name " Magnet," therefore primarily in- 
dicated no more than the place where the wonder was 
found. Natural Magnets of iron are found in con- 
siderable quantities in Sweden and in some districts 
of New Jersey, and to a more limited extent in other 
localities. The Magnet contains within itself the dual 
principles of Electricity, and the points where it shows 
them chiefly are called respectively its positive and 
negative poles. Certain substances though they do 
not naturally show magnetic power, possess it in such 
a degree that it is readily developed into action — 
e. g., a piece of iron placed in contact with either 
pole of a Magnet readily exhibits the same power of 
attraction, and a piece of steel, though less promptly, 
is readily converted into a Magnet. 

Before considering the special phenomena of Mag- 
netism, let us notice some of the analogous phenomena 
of Electricitv and Magnetism : 

In both, there are the two opposite forces, the pos- 
itive and the negative. 

In both, the two forces attract each other and each 
'repels its kind. 

In both, there is between the two forces a neutral 
force, so to speak : in Electricity, as we have seen, the 
two forces are never present in the same body, and 
the neutral places itself as a resistant wall between 
two opposing clouds or a positive cloud and the neg- 
ative earth ; in a Magnet, however, the two forces are 
always present actively in the one substance, and the 
neutral appears midway, in the same substance, sep- 



1 20 



BLUE AND RED. LIGHT. 



a rating the two and thus preventing their blending 
and neutralizing each other — the central point where 
the neutral is placed is called the equator of a Mag- 
net ; the equator shows neither attraction nor repul- 
sion upon bringing near or placing in actual contact 
with it iron or other magnetic matter, because the 
attractive power of each ingredient of the neutral is 
rendered inoj>erative by the presence of the other. 

The presence of this equator is the distinctive cha- 
racteristic of a Magnet; in a magnetic body, the two 
forces are present, but iii a neutral, inactive state. 
The artificial Magnet is simply a magnetic substance, 
the two forces in which have been polarized, or fixed 
apart, with the neutral between ; this conversion of a 
magnetic substance into a Magnet is called magnet- 
izing. The two forces are not separated with equal 
ease in all substances ; in some, as in soft iron, con- 
tact with a comparatively weak Magnet separates them 
instantly, while in others, as in hard steel, they yield 
only to a powerful Magnet and then only after more 
or less delay. In the former case, however, the effect 
is only transient, and in the latter it is permanent. 

The one difference between Electricity and Magnet- 
ism is that in the former the two forces are never 
found in one substance, while in the true Magnet they 
must both be present in an active state but in exact 
equilibrium, and in a Magnetic body both must be 
present though neutral and inactive. The forces of 
Electricity and Magnetism, are however, the same and 
their source is also one, Light. We have seen that 
the atmospheric vapors absorb the greater part of 
Jie calorific ray, and the actinic ray passes almost 



LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 121 

entire into the earth; the former becomes charged with 
the positive, and the latter with the negative, force; 
thus the negative becomes the characteristic of the 
earth and the positive of the air. Then the rain, the 
hail and the snow, fall, bearing the positive with them ; 
the positive upon entering the earth is compelled to 
come into a state of harmony with the earth's neg- 
ative, the two poles acting in equilibrium constitute 
Magnetism. Hence, the Earth itself becomes a pow- 
erful Magnet, and everything earthy partakes of its 
nature in some degree: some substances are natural 
Magnets, with both poles and the neutral equator nat- 
urally developed, others are magnetic, containing the 
two forces in a neutral condition, but more or less 
susceptible to magnetization, while still others are said 
to be diamagnetic, because they contain but one force; 
in consequence of the absence of the second force 
these substances are always repelled by either pole 
of a Magnet, which attracts only substances contain- 
ing both forces. Faraday attempted to prove that all 
bodies of earthy matter were magnetic; those contain- 
ing but one force he called diamagnetic. But the 
presence of both forces in each body is essential to 
Magnetism, and is the one thing that distinguishes it 
from Electricity. Hence, we hold that what he called 
diamagnetic bodies were simply bodies containing one 
electric force, and therefore not magnetic in any sense. 
We have already stated it as our opinion that 
" Electricity is a "peripheral polar force moving out of 
equilibrium (i. e. independently) and Magnetism a polar 
force moving in equilibrium" — in other words Elec- 
tricity and Magnetism are one and the same 
n 



122 



BLUE AND RED EIGHT. 



thing in essence and power: when either force 
exists separately it is Electricity, and when the two forces 
exist together they constitute Magnetism. Scientists fail 
to see this unity and therefore even Tyndall is com- 
pelled to declare : " The real origin of Magnetism is 
yet to be revealed." 

The Earth, we have stated, is itself a powerful 
Magnet: it has its positive and negative poles and 
equator. The Compass consists of a steel needle mag- 
netized and exactly poised on a pivotal point; the 
positive pole of the Magnet attracts the negative, and 
repels the positive, pole of the needle, and the nega- 
tive pole of the Magnet attracts the positive, and 
repels the negative, pole of the needle. When left 
free to choose its direction, the negative pole of the 
needle points towards the North, and the positive to- 
wards the South, — hence we know that the North 
Pole is the positive, and the South Pole is the nega- 
tive, pole of the earth ; as a ship approaches the Equa- 
tor, the needle becomes more and more erratic in its 
direction and upon the equatorial line it is as apt to 
point East and West as North and South. 

The Compass is valuable not only to the mariner in 
navigating his ship, but equally to the Scientist in 
determining the variations in the Earth's Magnetism : 

1st. We find that the needle does not usually point 
directly North and South — hence we learn that the 
Magnetic Meridian is not coincident with the Geo- 
graphical Meridian; i. e. that the Magnetic current 
does not follow the Earth's line directly North and 
South, but flows independently or obeys other in- 
fluences. The angle made by the needle with the 



LIGHT IK ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 123 



geographical line, is called its angle of declination; 
this varies in different localities, and is subject in 
each locality to the influence of Atmospheric Electri- 
city, as we have shown earlier in this chapter, 
varying with its diurnal and other variations in ten- 
sion and volume; at the beginning of the seventeenth 
century, the normal declination was eastward; in 
1660, the normal position was directly North and 
South; then it gradually declined to the westward, 
until in 1818 it reached 24° 30'; since that time it 
has slowly but steadily decreased. 

2d. We find that the needle is almost horizontal 
at the Equator, that in approaching the North Pole 
the northward point becomes depressed or dips in that 
direction until in lat. 70° 5' N.,long. 
96° 46' E., the needle is almost 
vertical, and that in approaching 
the South Pole the same phenome- 
non is observed, the southward point 
dipping until the needle is almost 
vertical at about lat. 73° S., long. 
130° E. From this we learn that the electro-mag- 
netic current or circulation passes in at the Poles and 
out at the Equator, and may be illustrated by the dia- 
gram given herewith. 

The Compass was known to the Chinese as early as 
the beginning of the second century and came into 
use among European navigators about the thirteenth. 
Invaluable as the Compass unquestionably is, it is but 
one of many valuable applications of the Magnetic and 
Electric forces that have made them contribute to the 
health, wealth and general welfare of mankind. 




124 



BLUE AHD RED LIGHT. 



Just as the atmospheric vapors are the great Store- 
house for Electricity, so the earth is the great Store- 
house for Magnetism, wherein Light has stored away 
these mighty dual forces so essential not only to the 
welfare of the inhabitants of, but to the very life of 
all things upon and in, the earth. 

Everything in Nature has within it one or both of 
the electric forces — i. e. is either electric or magnetic. 
As we have said, Faraday classes everything under tw T o 
heads : paramagnetic or magnetic and diamagnetic ; 
the first class comprises the truly magnetic, and the 
second the simply electric substances. There is a 
marked difference in the chemical combination of the 
atoms in the substances of the two classes. Formerly, 
only iron, nickel and cobalt were believed to be mag- 
netic, but Faraday has added manganese, chromium, 
osmium, platinum, palladium, cerium and titanium ; 
a given volume of the three first named contains 230 
atoms, and of the others 170. The same volume of 
an electric metal contains a much smaller number of 
atoms; for instance, gold and silver, 150; antimony 
and lead, 85 ; bismuth, 74 — the only two exceptions 
are : copper, 230, and zinc, 170. Oxygen is the only 
magnetic gas. • 

Light is not only the source of the electric forces, it 
is also the great electro-magnetic polarizer. In the 
formation of the atom it receives the polar energy 
that gives it its individuality ; its polarity constantly 
changes in dropping old, and putting on new affini- 
ties, but the tendency is to equilibrium or harmony. 
In inorganic matter the atoms are more angular than 
in the organic ; the spheroidal form being proportion- 





LIGHT IN ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY, ETC. 125 

ed to the stages of development. Each atom of matter 
contains one of the electric forces and is surrounded 
by an ethereal atmosphere of the opposite electricity 
— thus each atom is a miniature of the earth. 
Atoms approximate a spherical form ; the presence 
in harmony of the two forces makes the spherical 
form perfect; the positive force induces an expan- 
sion at the poles and contraction at 
the equatorial diameter, 
and the negative induces 
a contraction at the poles 
and expansion at the equa- 
torial diameter. The 
atomic similarity to the aggregation of atoms, the 
earth, is most remarkable in the fact that the electric 
or magnetic force of each atom has a current, like the 
earth's, passing in at the poles and out at the equator ; 
thus, atoms contain within themselves the elements of 
their own existence. 

He who studies Nature aright, in its minutest atom 
and in its sublimest wonders, even in Electricity and 
Magnetism, sees ever the God of Nature, manifesting 
Himself first in Light and in and through and by 
Light in the Universe. " Every good and every per- 
fect gift is from above, and cometh down from the 
Father of Light !" Well, indeed may James call 
God "the Father of Light" when he ascribes to Him 
the bestowal of " every good and every perfect gift," 
for Light is the blessed medium in and through and 
by which the most precious of physical gifts, even 
health and life, are given us. But God not only gives 
the inestimable blessing, he likewise sheds Light into 
11* 



126 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



man's intellect and enables him to learn how best to 
apply it and to reap its highest and greatest benefits. 
Thus has it ever been, is now and shall ever be until 
time is engulphed in eternity — His Mercy and Love are 
even more immeasurable than His universe. Time, as 
it rolls on is ever bringing to our view fresh, new 
evidences of His infinite Wisdom to conceive, His infi- 
nite Will to decree, His infinite Power to accomplish, 
and the infinite Love that permeates, influences and 
controls all the other infinite attributes of the God of 
Nature, our Father and our God. And now, notwith- 
standing all that He has permitted man to discover 
of His Power, Goodness and Love as manifested in 
Nature, through and by Light, we feel assured- that 
still greater revelations are in store for us. He is 
even now permitting man to discover new applications 
of, and consequent new benefits to be derived from, 
Light — may He bless every right effort to advance 
and promote these discoveries, and in common with 
other efforts may He bless this little effort of ours, to 
the glory of His great Name and the good of suffering 
humanity ! 



CHAPTEE IV. 

MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 

1. The Science of Motion is the Science of Life. 

2. The Science of Life teaches how to maintain the 
just proportions of equilibrated influences. 

3. Physical Life is the result of Motion, and can 
only be preserved and perpetuated by the Evolution 
and Perfecting of Forms — absolute Pest is Death. 

4. Physical Life requires a Physical Form or Body 
wherein to manifest itself, and the character of its 
manifestation, must be determined by the Form or 
Body wherein it is required to manifest itself. 

5. The Regeneration of Physical Life must be pre- 
ceded by the decomposition and disintegration of an 
earlier form or casket — therefore Physical Life is 
generated in Death. 

6. In the Material World, Decomposition and Re- 
generation are continually going on by the changing 
of the Polarity of Atoms, the Destruction of Old 
Affinities and the Creation of New by the action of 
the Dual Principles of Light. 

7. In the Higher Organisms, Physical Life is sus- 
tained and perpetuated by the Reciprocal Action of 
the Subjective and Objective Forces within and with- 
out individualized existences. 

Deduction, — These axioms lead us to the conclu- 

127 



128 



BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 



sion of the Ancient Sages that the Universal Basic 
Principle of Physical Life is a Substantial Motion ; 
that when Motion stops Physical Life ceases — abso- 
lute Rest is Death. Light is the Universal Motor 
and hence the Active Sustainer, Promoter and Re- 
newer of Physical Life — it acts by its Dual Forces, in 
Disintegrating and Reintegrating, Dissolving and As- 
similating, Breaking down and Building up; invisible 
in its subjective operations, it is manifest in the objec- 
tive phenomena of Depolarization and Polarization. 
Everything Physical Dies and undergoes Disintegra- 
tion that Physical Life may be Improved and Perpet- 
uated — if Forms were Eternalized, there could be No 
Farther Progress, and the Universe, so far as Devel- 
opment is concerned, would Cease to Move and would 
be itself Dead. 

Thus, in Seven axioms and a deduction therefrom, 
we state, in synopse, the principles underlying the de- 
velopment and progress of Physical Life, the chief 
product and result of Vital Dynamics. In the course 
of the discussion of this branch of our theme, in this 
chapter and the next ensuing, we shall have occasion 
repeatedly to employ the terms " Evolution," " Prog- 
ress" and "Development," and must here caution 
our reader distinctly and steadily to bear in mind that 
we do not use these terms in the sense in which cer- 
tain modern theorists use them — we absolutely reject 
the notion that there has been evolution, or development, 
in any sense that can imply that man has descended 
from any ancestor but man, or a mouse from any but 
a mouse. The Author of Nature and its laws, by His 
Will and His Word, commanded the earth to " bring 



MATERIAL FORMS AJSGD VITAL DYNAMICS. 129 

forth the living creature after his kind, cattle, and 
creeping thing, and beast of the earth after his kind ; 
and it was so." But we define our views of " the 
Evolution Theory" later, and here only offer a cau- 
tionary remark. 

" God has not found matter coeternal with Himself, 
and, like an architect, arranged this to His fancy ; but 
He has, out of His own eternal Omnipotence, by His 
"Will simply, evoked the world out of nothing unto 
existence. He has thought and spoken, and it was." 
So writes a learned Mystic, and his statement can 
scarcely be made stronger by the most astute Theo- 
logian of our day, in the way of declaring God's Su- 
premacy and Omnipotence in Creation. Indeed, the 
Kabbalist, in analyzing and symbolizing the succes- 
sive stages in Creation, and showing the instrumen- 
tality of Light in each stage, just as truly and loyally 
acknowledges the Supreme Will of God as does the 
Theologian who iterates the phraseology of Moses. 
The Kabbalist claims or assigns no power or function 
for or to Light independently of the great Jehovah ; 
God, manifesting Himself in Light, and working in 
and by Light as His chosen representative and agent, 
is the Omnipotent Creator — Light, as His represent- 
ative and agent, He endowed with His power and 
might, for the specific purpose of bringing motion and 
activity into exercise where stillness and inertia had 
prevailed, and thus to substitute order and life for 
chaos and death. 

Space [who can conceive it?] was filled with an im- 
palpable, imponderable, invisible nothing which the 
ancients called hyle and the moderns call ether ; there 

I 



130 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



was but one life in space, the one Self-Existent 
Life, JEHOVAH. The infinite Wisdom conceived 
the glorious plan, the infinite Will decreed its accom- 
plishment, the infinite Word issued the mandate, the 
infinite Power effected the result — "God said, Let 
there be Light, and Light was." Chaos was no more; 
darkness fled away before the Light of Life. The 
plan had been conceived, the decree made, the man- 
date issued, and the result effected — Light came to 
manifest the unknowable Supreme, and to represent 
Him in Creation, Providence, Eedemption and Glory. 
Such is the Kabbalistic Philosophy, and is there any- 
thing in it to offend the most sensitive believer in the 
written word? to militate against a single item of 
Christian Truth ? to antagonize or weaken the most 
orthodox Faith ? 

To believe and teach that God effected His own 
purposes, by an instrumentality of His own choos- 
ing, and in conformity with laws of His own decree- 
ing, does not derogate from His Glory, impugn His 
Majesty or question His Absolute Supremacy. So far 
from it, such belief and teaching actually intensifies 
our confidence in, reverence towards and love for God, 
because it assures us that He who is " the same yester- 
day, and to-day, and for ever," is still manifesting 
Himself, and will for ever manifest Himself, in the 
effecting of His purposes, in and by His chosen in- 
strumentality, and in conformity with His laws, in 
every portion and department of His Universal King- 
dom, to the glory of His great J^ame and the inesti- 
mable advantage of His creatures. 

Light, God's first manifestation of Himself as the 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 131 

Creator, endowed and vivified with Divine Power, 
and obedient to the Supreme Will, polarizes a portion 
of the universal Kyle and fixes a firmament in space to 
separate between the Celestial World and the proposed 
Terrestrial Worlds ; and now the waters are divided, 
the " waters above the firmament " being for the re- 
freshment of the inhabitants of the Celestial World 
[mark, we are not informed when or how the Angels 
were created, and are not told what the}' are. except 
that they are God's messengers and servants ; doubt- 
less, such information is " too high for us," in our 
objective state and is reserved to be revealed when we 
attain the subjective]. But this Light is the Celestial 
Light, and the next step in the plan and purposes of 
the Almighty, related to the objective worlds; so now, 
it focalizes rays from itself into objective Suns, and 
imparts to each of these the power farther to carry out 
the purposes of the "Almighty. These objective Suns 
are thus an objective manifestation of the* same God 
who manifested Himself in their Source, the Celestial 
Sun. 

As our present interest is confined to our own Sun 
and especially to our own world, we shall speak only 
of these. Observation and experiments now show us 
how certaiu results are produced, and it is perfectly 
legitimate to infer that like results were produced by 
similar causes in the past, from the beginning of time. 
Our God changes not, and the laws that regulate and 
control Nature to-day are the same laws that God 
enacted when he created our world. As ether is im- 
palpable and imponderable, we cannot experiment 
with it and demonstrate that Oxygen and Hydrogen 



132 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

were created from it ; nor can we decompose either of 
them and produce ether, because we can act upon 
neither absolutely by itself; but we know their 
properties — that Oxygen is a magnetic substance of 
positive power and Hydrogen is a substance of nega- 
tive power; we know they are opposites, because they 
readily combine — hence, we conclude that Oxygen is 
the positive, and Hydrogen the negative, polarization 
of ether. Farther, we know that a pure Hydrogen 
flame in pure Oxygen produces steam, and this steam 
is readily condensed, forming pure water [we have 
given the proportions in Chapter II.]. We know, too, 
that earth is contained in pure water, because, as stated 
in Chapter I., we have precipitated earth from pure 
Oxygen and Hydrogen in an hermetically sealed vessel, 
confirming the result by successfully repeating the 
experiment. From these facts demonstrated by scien- 
tific experiments, may we not infer that the Sun's 
flame of Hydrogen and Oxygen produced water? and 
that the dual forces of Light precipitated earth from 
the water, thus making " dry land appear ?" 

Thus we have : (1) the primordiate manifestation 
of Jehovah, Light, the power or force, the univer- 
sal motor; (2) the objective Sun and its flame of Oxy- 
gen and Hydrogen ; (3) water, and (4) " dry land," 
appearing out of the water. 

" The Sun and Stars have a perpetual motion, ap- 
parently revolving around an unseen centre," says a 
modern Scientific authority ; we have seen what this 
"unseen centre" is, the great Celestial Sun of the 
universe, around which the Astral Suns, or "the Sun 
and Stars, have a perpetual motion," revolving around 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS, loo 

it as the great Central Orb of the Universal System. 
The planetary worlds, also, all "have a perpetual 
motion/' revolving around their respective Suns and 
turning each upon its individual axis. Everything 
in and upon and about the earth has " a perpetual 
motion/' every molecule and every atom, has its own 
"perpetual motion." This "perpetual motion" is 
life — life is "perpetual motion." We see this in our 
individual existence — when the heart, the Sun of our 
individual world, stops its beating, the " perpetual 
motion" that is our physical life stops, and death 
supervenes, bringing rest from "perpetual motion." 
As soon as each member of the Universe was created 
it was endowed with "perpetual motion" dependent 
upon the central Sun, the heart, of its special system. 
The earth in motion, and prepared for inhabitants, 
according to the Mosaic account upon the "third 
day "the creation of organic matter commenced: "the 
earth brought forth grass, and herb yielding seed after 
his kind, and the tree yielding fruit, whose seed was 
in itself, after his kind." We see how the dual forces 
of the Sunlight operate now in the earth and air, de- 
composing and disintegrating old forms and reuniting 
the atoms, polarizing and integrating them into re- 
newed forms of their specific types, each type " after 
his kind." We can then readily understand how the 
earth "brought forth" the forms of the vegetable or- 
ders. And now provision having been made for food 
for animated beings, the waters "brought forth abun- 
dantly great whales and every living creature that mov- 
eth, after his kind, and every winged fowl after his 
kind;" and "the earth brought forth the living crea- 

12 



134 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

ture after his kind, cattle, and creeping thing, and 
beast of the earth after his kind." Here, too, we see 
the same dual forces of Sunlight daily working in the 
death and decay of old forms, and the creation and 
development of new forms, and can realize the pro- 
cess by which "the waters" and "the earth" obeyed 
the Divine mandate, just as readily as we see how the 
later commands to be "fruitful and multiply" have 
been, and are continuously, obeyed in the waters and 
the air and the earth. 

Perpetual motion is the condition of physical life, 
and Light with its dual principles is the source of 
motion, the universal motor, but the " unique law of 
harmony" is the mainspring and regulator, without 
which motion would produce death and Light would 
be eclipsed by, engulphed in, darkness. Perpetual 
motion, then, is Vital Dynamics, Light is the source 
and principle of Vital Dynamics, and harmony is the 
mainspring, the presiding genius. 

Creation was not the work of six days, or six periods 
of time, as Geologists phrase it, completed and then dis- 
continued; the types or orders of forms were arranged 
and the laws of Nature enacted, and in accord with 
these creation is perpetual, to cease only when time 
ceases. Each new blade of grass, each new-born an- 
imated being, is evidence of creation, attests the con- 
tinued work of a Creator, and proves the continued 
presence of a creative means or agent. The blade of 
grass is not the spontaneous product of the earth, or 
of the seed, separately or jointly — the seed and the 
earth are essentials, but there is a vital energy even 
more essential to make the seed germinate in the 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 135 

earth ; we say this vital energy is more essential be- 
cause it is conceivable that the vital energy could 
form a seed or earth as at the first from the original ele- 
ments, but neither seed nor earth nor both cooperating 
could create a vital energy — this vital energy must be 
a manifestation of the Divine Vitality. But what is 
the vital energy that produces the blade of grass from 
the seed placed in the earth ? It is the same that at 
the first of time enabled the earth to " bring forth 
grass :" it is Light. It required no other powder to 
create the world, and no more power, than it requires 
to perpetuate and renew continually the work of the 
first " six days." Those first " six days," are repeated 
perpetually, and must continue to be repeated, or 
the universe must return to chaos and to darkness. 
God is the Almighty Creator to-day as truly as " in 
the beginning/' and Light is His active Represent- 
ative, His Manifester, in creation to-day as it was 
when he said " Let there be Light, and Light w T as." 
But not only is the work of creation a continuous, 
perpetual work in our world, it is so in the universe 
beyond our world : what are the nebulse ever present 
in the vicinity of the Sun, if they are not nuclei of 
planetary worlds in course of creation, development 
(for creation is development), to be assigned their 
places in space and their orbital and axial motions 
in due time — when their respective "six days" are 
accomplished ? 

The Celestial Sunlight is the original, perpetual 
source of Vital Dynamics for the universe of Solar 
Systems as well as for the Celestial World, and the 
Astral Suns are the subordinate perpetual sources of 



136 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

Vital Dynamics for their respective Systems, each for its 
own System, and for each world of its System. Hence, 
our Sun is the perpetual source of Vital Dynamics for 
our Solar System and for each world thereof. 

The limit of the vital or creative energy of the Sun 
is the periphery of the space comprised in its system, 
and throughout that space its light perpetually exerts 
its dual principles, imparting to each atom of every 
created thing the motion that constitutes its vital 
power; the forces of attraction and repulsion, of inte- 
gration and disintegration, are implanted and sustained 
by light within each atom, and from time to time, 
when Nature would regenerate and renew vitality, 
and produce a higher development, the same light 
destroys old affinities and creates new, and the atoms 
of an old form assume a new. Now, note that this 
change is the direct result of deviation from and return 
to equilibrium between the dual forces in the atom : 
while harmony continues and the equilibrium is main- 
tained between attraction and repulsion, there can be 
no change — no decay or renewal. It is seen by this 
what is meant by the statement that there is no death 
or decay in Heaven: harmony is always absolute 
there, and death and decay can only result from dis- 
harmony. When Nature would regenerate and renew 
vitality, then, to repeat what we have said in other 
words, the negative or chemical force of light assumes 
the reins, increases the force of repulsion within the 
atom so that it subdues its opponent, attraction, and the 
atom repels and separates from its neighbor atoms ; 
the positive or polar force of light then asserting its 
power, increases the force of attraction, the atom seeks 



.MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 137 

fellowship, acquires new affinities, a new substance is 
formed, or the old affinities are revived and the old sub- 
stance is reformed — when equilibrium is reestablished. 
This is a plain statement of what we see every day and 
fail to understand : the processes of decomposition and 
composition, of disintegration and integration, of de- 
polarization and polarization, the opposite action of 
the chemical or actinic rays and the polar ray of 
light. Thus light is the vital energy that destroys 
and creates. 

We have said " creation is development," and is it 
not so ? We are wont to speak without realizing what 
our words mean — to utter great truths in common- 
place phrases, without even a faint conception of the 
grand scope of our expressions : e. g. y we see that a 
rose by cultivation may be made to improve in the 
number and excellence of its flowers, or in other par- 
ticulars ; that a pear- or a peach-tree, the natural fruit 
of which is scarcely fit to eat, may be made to produce 
most delicious fruit; that almost worthless breeds of 
cattle maybe made exceedingly valuable; that a weak, 
feeble animal frame may be made vigorous and power- 
ful ; that our own physical or mental powers may be 
improved — we see all this and comment on it and in 
the next breath denounce the doctrine of development, 
never realizing that all these evidences of improve- 
ment are overwhelming evidences that the true doc- 
trine of development or evolution is correct. If man, 
with his comparatively limited faculties and functions, 
can effect such developments as those we have noticed, 
who dares to deny or circumscribe the power of Na- 
ture, of Light, or of the God of Nature, in the same 
12* 



138 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

direction ? Mark : man cannot develope a rose out of 
lily — a pear-tree out of a peach-tree — an ox or a cow 
out of a sheep — an animal frame out of a mineral or a 
vegetable form — an arm out of a finger ! man cannot 
effect any such developments or evolutions, and Na- 
ture, or Nature's God, does not, because He has enact- 
ed laws that determine the types ; God does nothing 
that He does not permit man to imitate to the extent of 
his power and ability ! 

Nature, to develope mental and spiritual qualities, 
must have a form suited to their unfold ment. Those 
who endeavor to demonstrate an evolution passing 
from type to type of forms, making an inferior the 
parent or ancestor of a higher type, appear to conceive 
that perfection in material forms was the Almighty's 
highest aim in creation, while the enlightened student 
of Nature should realize that the unfoldment of Soul- 
life — the making of man " in His own image, after 
His own likeness " was the grand sum of God's origi- 
nal purposes in creating "the world and all things 
therein." Nature and the Bible alike teach that the 
successive stages of creation, from the command "Let 
there be Light," until He "saw everything that He 
had made, and, behold, it was very good," were de- 
signed to prepare the earth, and provide food and all 
things requisite, for man. The development of mate- 
rial forms was only to provide one suitable for the 
complete unfoldment of the Soul, Spirit and Mind 
into the image of the Supreme. God is a Spirit, and 
a physical form, however perfect, could not be " in His 
image or after His likeness " — only a complete de- 
velopment and unfoldment of the subjective faculties 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 139 

of his soul can constitute man in God's image or ele- 
vate him to be after God's likeness — " likeness " to 
God can only be found in a Godlike Soul ! 

There is another thought that suggests itself here : 
If perfect development of body were the high purpose 
of Nature and of Nature's God, man, the highest type, 
would be distinguished by physical strength, for that 
is the highest physical quality, whereas there are 
numerous orders of inferior animals vastly stronger 
than man; indeed, man in proportion to size, is almost 
the weakest physically. 

Evolution is development and development is crea- 
tion or regeneration ; but the progressive creation of 
forms is only the process by which Nature provides a 
form adapted to the highest unfoldment of the Soul. 
There is no subject so worthy of study as Nature, and 
the most interesting study in Nature is the process by 
which she provides a suitable temple for the Soul ; in 
prosecuting this study we perceive in each order and 
type of material form, the grand life-principle attain- 
ing the fullest unfoldment possible therein ; we note 
exceptional cases in each order or type of forms, in 
which physical defect or disease impairs the casket, 
and in these the life-principle goes only so far as the 
defect or disease will allow, though frequently it re- 
pairs the defect or disease to secure a fuller unfold- 
ment. We shall see, hereafter, that man alone, by 
the unholy exercise of his superior will-power, seeks 
to baffle this principle in attaining complete unfold- 
ment ; man is required to assist in the unfoldment of 
the faculties of his Soul, and far too often cultivates 
only the objective faculties, utterly neglecting the sub- 



140 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

jective. But of this we must speak in a later 
chapter. 

He who thoughtfully studies Nature must be im- 
pressed with the fact that there is a principle therein 
that is progressively unfolding in organic forms. In 
man this principle becomes individualized and is 
called the Soul — the Soul being, as we have seen, a 
manifestation of Light in both its subjective and ob- 
jective qualities. This princij>le is Light, in whose 
operations we observe, besides the dual objective forces 
of polarization and depolarization, a subjective power 
that controls the objective directing the dissolution 
and creation of material forms. Unless we recognize 
this principle as directing, we must, with the material- 
istic evolutionist, ascribe to matter itself a quality 
which implies intelligence, and believe that matter 
chooses successive forms in which to appear and then 
controls its own reconstruction — for this is the logical 
deduction from the ordinary evolution theory; or, on 
the other hand, we must deny what Scripture and 
Nature clearly teach, i. e. that God invariably employs 
agents to accomplish what He wills, and believe that 
He personally directs in each case, the dissolution of 
the old, and the creation of the new, form. We must 
believe that God has designated Light as His active 
agent in Nature, and that Light is the principle in 
Nature that by its subjective power directs and con- 
trols, and by its objective forces executes, the processes 
of disintegration and integration, and thus carries on 
the work of creation throughout time. As we have 
before distinctly affirmed, this recognition of Light 
as the power or force in and of Nature, does not seek 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 141 

to elevate Light into a God, or otherwise derogate from 
God's absolute Supremacy : God manifests Himself in 
Light, and Light exercises, not independent, but God- 
given power in fulfilling its God-given mission. 

But let us now briefly observe the operations of this 
" principle in Nature " in its objective processes, and 
through these we may also profitably seek to compre- 
hend the unseen subjective influence ; when the chem- 
ist would produce water, he must employ both the 
decomposing and combining forces of light — the first 
to obtain the hydrogen and oxygen and the second to 
make water out of them ; but, in both processes we 
see an intelligence directing, as well as the two forces 
acting : the first cannot produce the water without the 
two forces, nor can they without the intelligence to 
direct. And so, in studying the operations of the two 
forces in Nature we must realize the. important influ- 
ence of the unseen subjective principle that directs 
them. 

Bearing in mind that material forms are but con- 
venient objective media in which that unseen myste- 
rious something we call life must unfold itself, and 
through which it must manifest its unfoldment, we 
observe in Nature an infinite variety of forms, and 
consequently see manifestations of an infinite variety 
of life-developments ; and the life-development we 
find in each case, depends upon the nature of the 
forms w T ithin which the life-principle must unfold 
itself. 

Nature is divided into three distinct " kingdoms," 
the first of which comprises only inorganic matter, 
and the other two comprehend organic forms, endued 



142 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

the one with still life and the other with active life. In 
studying these three kingdoms we shall discover that 
Nature adapts material from the first in creating the 
forms of the second, and from both in creating bodies 
for the third ; we shall find, too, that in the inorganic 
mineral kingdom, though there is no life, there is 
constant testimony to the influence of the directing 
" principle " of which we have been speaking, in the 
production of innumerable simples and compounds 
that are indispensably essential to the life of both the 
other kingdoms ; and farther, we shall doubtless dis- 
cover a wonderful adaptation of forms to every con- 
ceivable kind and degree of life-development, and still 
more we shall marvel if we study aright the mysteries 
of life, at the wonderful system that pervades the two 
life-kingdoms : e. g., we cannot but marvel when we ob- 
serve that, under the guidance and control of the sub- 
lime life-principle, there are ever present in each form 
the two antagonistic forces, one destroying, the other re- 
pairing and restoring ; the latter sustained by the life- 
principle, more than repairing and restoring, actually 
adds to and increases the vigor of the form until the 
life within has attained the fullest development that the 
form will permit, and from this point we notice a de- 
cline, the life-principle is no longer interested in pre- 
serving the form, the repairs and restorations no longer 
keep pace with the decay, and the form passes away, and 
then a new form is reared with capacity for a higher 
life-unfoldment — this upbuilding, sustaining, decay and 
reconstruction are repeated again and again, until the 
type or class of forms has attained its acme. Then, 
we find a type or class commencing at a higher min- 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 143 

imum and attaining a higher maximum, and then a 
still higher scale, until life-unfold ment within the 
kingdom has attained the highest state to which it is 
capable of being brought. Whereupon we discover 
that Nature's resources are not yet exhausted : another 
kingdom is created with capacity for a far higher 
state of life-unfoldment. In this kingdom, we find, 
as in the one preceding, a series of types or classes 
comprising a vast number of distinct forms. The 
lowest type is but little, if any, above the lowest of 
the former kingdom, but this second life-kingdom 
soon shows that it was created to provide forms that 
would admit of far higher life-development, for the 
successive types of forms ascend, like the rounds of a 
ladder, steadily upward, until in man the zenith of 
material forms is reached. Physical life can attain no 
higher unfoldment than in the form of man, and Na- 
ture has reached its ultimate power of developing life; 
but the God of Nature would have a still higher de- 
velopment, and He implants within this form the 
germ of a higher life, which may be unfolded to some 
extent within the material body, but attains its full 
unfoldment only when transplanted to the Celestial 
World. But of this in a later chapter. 

We cannot do more, in this work, than in the brief- 
est manner to glance at the several kingdoms, and 
note their most conspicuous characteristics, scarcely 
more than suggesting lines of study, but hoping that 
our readers will become sufficiently interested to pur- 
sue the study of Nature in the light of truth. Our pur- 
pose is only to show how Light is the universal motor, 
the Source of Vital Dynamics, and we can only dis- 



144 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



cuss the distinctive features of the three kingdoms in 
so far as they are produced by Light. In the present 
chapter, we shall speak generally of the three king- 
doms, noticing the peculiarities in material constitu- 
tion of each, the nature of the life and character and 
extent of the life-development in the two life-king- 
doms, reserving the specific investigation of human 
life, and of the human organism, for the next chapter. 
To the Mineral Kingdom belong the air we breathe 
and the water we drink and the earth upon which we 
dwell, and thousands of substances that contribute 
directly and indirectly to our pleasure, wealth, health 
and general well-being, even if we ignore their com- 
bination by Nature with the food we eat, both 
vegetable and animal, and with every part of our 
physical organism. None who appreciate the metals 
that enter so largely into the utensils of the house- 
hold, the tools of the workshop, the implements of the 
farm, the machinery of the factory, the apparatus of 
Science, and into the millions of useful appliances of 
every walk of life, to say nothing of those that sup- 
ply us with coin, or of the gems and precious stones 
that are far from being the most precious of Nature's 
inorganic treasures, will undervalue the Mineral 
Kingdom. But we must not ignore the important 
ingredients Nature obtains from this first of her king- 
doms in the creation of the forms wherein to unfold 
the life-principle in her two life-kingdoms; even in 
man, the highest form she rears, inorganic matter 
supplies the bulk of her materials, as we shall see 
when we come to consider man in detail. Notwith- 
standing the value to us of the substances of the Min- 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 145 

era! Kingdom, however, they have not the smallest 
trace of that most precious of all natural gifts, that 
mystery, life. We find, indeed, the two objective 
forces of Light in the forces of attraction and repul- 
sion that have been imparted to each atom, but the 
subjective principle must work from without. 

We have before, more than once, mentioned an intrin- 
sic difference between this and the other kingdoms, which 
we repeat because it is peculiarly worthy of consider- 
ation in this connection : the atoms of inorganic mat- 
ter are angular, while those of organic bodies are sphe- 
roidal in the lower forms and becoming spherical as 
they advance in the scale of development ; this clearly 
shows that Nature, in developing forms, adapts her 
materials to the requirements of each case : the atoms 
of an inorganic substance being required, she unhesi- 
tatingly appropriates them to a higher purpose, but 
first she trims off the objectionable corners, or other- 
wise modifies them ; then having adapted them to 
their new use, she obtains or creates other desired in- 
gredients and fitting each atom to the place it is 
designed to occupy in the new structure, she puts them 
together, fixing or polarizing them in the exact form 
she desires ; meanwhile to each atom she has imparted 
the dual forces that, maintained in equilibrium, will 
keep them in their places and thus preserve the form 
of the aggregate substance, until she shall require 
their atoms for still higher and more excellent forms, 
when, as we have seen, she suspends or destroys the 
equilibrium, and they part asunder, to be again sub- 
jected to suitable changes and modifications, read- 
justed to new forms, have additional ingredients 

13 K 



146 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



brought into ties of affinity with them, and become 
parts of new structures. In each and all of these 
processes Light is the operator. 

The first of the two life-kingdoms is, of course, the 
Vegetable, and the second the Animal, Kingdom. 
That the elementary ingredients in the forms of both 
are essentially the same, Chemistry sufficiently attests, 
and both derive their vitality from the one source, 
Light. Yet we see that their forms are utterly and 
entirely different and the life of one is in no one re- 
spect like that of the other — the one we have desig- 
nated still life, the other active life, and the correct- 
ness of these designations will soon be seen : 

In both the Vegetable and Animal Kingdoms, the 
commencement of life-forms consists of simple cells. 
The lowest form of the former is found in the Pro- 
tococcus permesina ; these comprise microscopic spheri- 
cal globules having a transparent covering, filled with 
a red, oily substance. They are species of Algse, and 
are of various colors. These minute organisms give 
to the snow in northern latitudes, at times, a peculiar 
red color. Ehrenberg who has observed these strange 
little vegetables very closely, has found with them cer- 
tain microscopic animahula which he has called Philo- 
dina roseola. How this low form of vegetable life 
can exist upon the top of snow is a mystery Ehren- 
berg has not solved. The lowest life-form of the 
Animal Kingdom are the Protozoa, most of which are 
microscopic; they consist of a jelly-like substance, 
which has associated with it inorganic constituents in 
the higher forms, chiefly carbonate of lime. They 
have no digestive organs but live by imbibition; thev 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 147 

possess pulsation, show sensibility and are guided in 
their movements by instinct. Thus, a simple cell ap- 
pears to be the starting-point in life-forms in both of 
the organic kingdoms, and in both we find that, as 
we advance in development, the cells unite and form 
tissues. But soon we find a marked difference ap- 
parent in the forms of the two species of physical life : 

Organs essential for a higher state of development 
begin to show themselves in the animal forms that 
never occur in the vegetable kingdom ; in this branch 
of Nature, the vital forces that sustain and develop 
life are purely objective, derived entirely from with- 
out ; there is within no soul or responsive centre of 
vitality ; and, besides the life-forces of plants are more 
or less intermittent, depending in considerable degree 
upon the seasons, and even upon thermometric, barom- 
etric and electric variations ; while animal life is, es- 
pecially in the lower forms, also somewhat subject to 
these external influences, the something within that 
serves as a reservoir of vitality acts as a regulator. 
The tissues in the plant are directly worked up into 
the various forms of body, while in the animal they 
are united to form organs which in turn are united to 
form bodies. There is not a tissue in the animal form, 
from the humblest type to man, but what consists of 
cells — even the hair and the nails are aggregations of 
cells. 

The plant has a circulatory system, but no beating 
heart or pulsating arteries ; it is said to exhale and 
inhale, but it has no lungs, and its so-called respira- 
tion is simply the direct action of the Sunlight driving 
in and drawing out certain gases or vapors ; it is said 



148 



BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 



to feed, but here again the term expresses too much— 
with the exception of two or three species to be noticed 
later, plants bear no part in receiving or digesting or 
assimilating the substances that sustain their life and 
with the same exceptions, plants have no perception, 
consciousness, instinct, or volition ; they have certain 
sexual j)i'operties that resemble the sexual organs of 
the animal in their functions, but they are dependent 
for copulation upon birds, insects, the wind or other 
foreign aid ; and in the germination of their seed they 
bear no part. In short, plant-life J s a receptive, in- 
active, still life ; Light acts in and for it, in a special 
sense in which it does not act in and for animal-life : 
it must not only prepare its food, but must feed it and 
then assimilate the food and convert it into cells, adjust 
the cells and fix them into tissues, and so throughout 
completing the process; even the circulatory system 
ceases to act as soon as the genial warmth of the Sun- 
light is withdrawn or the approaching winter abates 
its power; plants are largely composed of carbon and 
hydrogen, but the chemical force of Light must draw 
the former from the earth and the latter from the 
water for it, and the polar force must apply them to 
the plant ; under the Sunlight, the plant is said to ex- 
hale oxygen, and in the dark to exhale in the form of 
carbonic acid, part of the carbon given to it by the 
Light. Speaking of the carbonic acid exhalation, sug- 
gests a word upon the beautiful process by which 
Light applies a constituent of the earth to the forma- 
tion of plant-structure: it extracts carbon from the 
soil, forms it into carbonic acid with the help of some 
oxygen, introduces it to the cells of a leaf, by which 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. i4 ( 3 

it is absorbed, meeting in the pores water, salts and 
the organic matter of the sap. A microscope now 
shows an immediate vibratory movement by. which 
molecules are formed, and as soon as these have at- 
tained their growth the vibratory motion ceases; other 
quantities of the same materials are sent in, go through 
the same vibratory motion and the molecules attach 
themselves to the previous number, and so little masses 
are formed which chemists call granules of starch ; in 
the same manner the most complex substances in the 
vegetable forms are created. 

It is noteworthy that the processes by which vege- 
table and animal life are sustained are chiefly oppo- 
site : the first is one of deoxidation, the other of oxida- 
tion — the one throws off oxygen, the other seeks it. 
Also, that wherever vegetable life is abundant, animal 
life is usually equally so ; this no doubt is due in a 
measure to the fact that the one furnishes food for the 
other — but it is no less due to the fact we have 
just remarked on, that the life-process of the one is 
opposed to that of the other, and thus the one prepares 
the atmosphere for the other ; it requires no argument 
to show that the latter reciprocates favors received. 
Indeed, we may almost consider the two sorts of life 
as representing the opposite principles of Nature, the 
passive and active, or feminine and masculine. 

We do not deem it necessary to trace the develop- 
ment of life and forms in the Vegetable Kingdom 
from the Protococcus to the Droseraeece, the highest 
life-development reached therein ; it will suffice for 
our present purpose to notice the three types, or the 
three species, of one type, which show a kind of sensi- 



1 50 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



bility and instinct together with something resembling 
the digestive organ of the animal : The " Pitcher- 
plant," "Venus's Fly-trap," and the "Sundew" are 
the plants to which we refer : the Fly-trap and the 
Sundew are dissimilar and yet are certainly species of 
one class or type, the Droseracece, and probably the 
Pitcher is related to them. At any rate, they are alike 
in voracity : if a fly or any other insect alight within 
reach of their tentacles or bristles, they promptly cap- 
ture and eat it ; they are provided with a juice similar 
to the gastric juice of animals, and actually digest not 
only insects but small pieces of meat that may be given 
to them, and the product goes to the nourishment of 
the plant. 

In the animal kingdom, the next type above the 
Protozoa are the Badiata, the lowest order of the In- 
vertebrata. The highest forms of these have a mouth 
or opening, around which there is a circular row of 
ganglia connected by commissural bands of nerve- 
fibres and nerves leading off from the ganglia to the 
digestive canal and the reproductive organs. Their 
nervous system is adapted to simple requirements of 
their life. They live in water. They have sensibility 
and evince a trace of instinct not exceeding that of the 
Droseracece. 

The next step brings us to the Articulata and Mol- 
lusca, where we find ganglionic centres set apart or 
developed to meet the wants of a higher life. These 
have organs of locomotion, deglutition and respiration, 
with a nervous system attached to each. We do not 
find consciousness developed until we come to that 
stage where organs of special sense appear, though, as 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 151 

we have seen sensibility and a low order of instinct 
exist below. As the seat of consciousness is at the 
base of the brain and there is no indication of brain 
in the Invertebrata, such as appears in the Vertebrata, 
the inference has been that none of the former have 
consciousness; this is a mistake, surely; their nervous 
system is ample for their requirements, and where we 
find organs of special sense there must be conscious- 
ness or the organs would be valueless. 

We must remark in the Vertebrata a still higher 
form, with a complete nervous system clearly defined; 
even among the lower types of this general division, 
we see a spinal cord consisting of linear aggregations 
of ganglia, at the upper end of which there is a rudi- 
mentary brain, wherein are located the organs of 
special sense and the seat of consciousness. Among 
the most conspicuous features of this type are a more 
pronounced sensibility, instinct and consciousness than 
in those below, and in the higher forms (below man) 
is seen a low order of intelligence, with passions and 
emotions. We do not use the term consciousness in 
the sense in which it is ordinarily used — as we under- 
stand the term it signifies purely an objective power 
of discerning and understanding external things. The 
instinct of the higher types of the Vertebrata is itself 
xlmost intelligence, but they have actually a species 
and degree of intelligence scarcely surpassed by that 
of men the objective faculties of wdiose souls are de- 
veloped to the suppression of the subjective, and ex- 
ceeding that of men whose souls are entirely uncul- 
tivated. The horse affords a ready illustration of 
this; some horses show a capacity for learning, for 



152 



BLUE AKD BED LIGHT. 



development of intellect that well-nigh entitles them 
to be credited with reason. 

And now we have reached the zenith of physical 
perfection, man, the highest form of created bodies, 
who may attain the high privilege of being God's 
image and likeness, if he but cultivate the faculties 
within his Soul. 

Thus we see a unity with diversity throughout 
the wonderful aggregation of wonders we call Na- 
ture — one source of materials for the forms, and di- 
versity in their combination; one source of vital 
forces, with diversity in the manner and degree of 
the life-unfold ments. Nay, we see more : we see in the 
diversity not only the infinite Wisdom, Beneficence 
and Power of the Author and Creator of Nature, but 
the marvelous unity of purposes, that, constituting 
Light His sole representative and agent, created by 
and through its agency, forms adapted to every kind 
and degree of life-unfold men t up to man, the Syn- 
thesis, with capacities for a degree of unfoldment 
that, if accomplished, will make him so Godlike that 
he will be " in the image " and " after the likeness " 
of Jehovah Himself, which it is evident throughout 
was the grand sum of His purposes. 

In the next chapter we propose to discuss " The 
Human Organism and its Vital Dynamics," and a 
grander theme pen cannot essay. Man's physical 
frame, with its nervous and arterial systems and its 
centres of force, is unquestionably the most com- 
plicated mass of mechanism, and the most perfect, 
ever created, and is moved by a dual vital power 
within that mere human intelligence can never com- 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 15l> 

l^rehend — he who would understand it aright must be 
illuminated by the same Celestial Sun of Suns which 
is its original source. Marvelous, indeed, is this dual 
vital motor that, if allowed full scope, will elevate 
man to so high a plane of excellence that he will be 
"in the image " and "after the likeness" of the Creator 
Himself and a worthy citizen of the Celestial World. 
We hope to make plain the stupendous purposes of 
" the Father of Light" in creating " the world and all 
things therein/' and especially in creating man, the 
Synthesis of the Universe, the perfection of material 
form. 

Meanwhile, in closing this chapter, let us take a 
reviewing glance over the ground we have traversed 
in our investigations thus far, summarizing what we 
have learned about Light as the power or force in and 
of Nature, the universal motor, the sole source of vital 
dynamics : 

Walker defines the word Science thus : " Know- 
ledge; certainty grounded on demonstration," and the 
etymology of the word sustains the definition, but it 
certainly will not do to be so restrictive in the use of 
the term, or we shall have to conclude that Science 
is a very limited field for study. " Ganot's Popular 
Physics " offers us the following : " Science is a know- 
ledge of the laws that govern the Universe," — this is 
scarcely more favorable to the Science or Scientists of 
modern times; we are afraid that Ganot, under his 
definition, would scarcely take high rank as a genuine 
Scientific scholar, and all the great authorities of our 
day would hesitate in accepting a definition that would 
exclude their theories. Were we to insist on Walker's 



154 



BLUE AND KED LlttHT. 



or even Ganot's definition, we scarcely know where 
we should look for a modern Scientist in the field of 
Light. 

We have not found an approximately correct an- 
swer to the initial, fundamental question: What is 
Light? We have seen that an authority of no mean 
rank tells us it is " that force in Nature which, acting 
on the retina, produces the sensation of vision," and a 
higher authority tells us it is "the vibration of a sub- 
stance," while Tyndall and others are content to tell 
us what it is not. Ganot defines " Optics " as " that 
branch of Physics which treats of the phenomena of 
light," and then informs us that " Light is that physi- 
cal agent which, acting on the eye, produces the sensa- 
tion of sight." Now, of course, our reader is aware 
that " Optics " is the smallest fragment of the Science 
of Light Then, when we pass the initial question 
and the most unsatisfactory answers, we find in modern 
treatises on Light chapters of theories with an occa- 
sional item of Science, according to Walker. 

We do not realize fully, however, how little mod- 
ern " Scientists " know of Light, until we look into the 
popular treatises on Physics and find extended dis- 
quisitions upon and attempted definitions of "Physi- 
cal Agents," " Forces of Attraction and Eepulsion," 
"Motion and Rest," "Accelerating and Retarding 
Forces," " Centrifugal and Centripetal Forces," etc. 
etc., and, throughout, not a word to indicate a suspi- 
cion on the part of their authors that Light has aught 
to do with these agents, forces, etc. Light to them is 
no more than something that "excites the sensation of 
vision," and permits objects, by the exercise of a ca- 



MATERIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 155 

price called selective absorption, to paint themselves 
with its colors [see pages 73, 74 and 75]. 

But if modern Science knows little of the True Sci- 
ence of Light, the ancient Philosophy knew much — 
nay, knew all — about Light in its subjective power, 
and thence we have learned that the Science of Light 
actually comprehends all other Sciences, Physical, 
Metaphysical and Psychical ; that Light is the original 
of all forces, the universal motor, the centre and source 
of vital dynamics [see pages 23, 56 to 63, 68, 96, 97, 
100, 102, and the present chapter especially]. 

We have learned that Light was, " in the begin- 
ning," has been ever since, and will continue to be 
until the end of time, God's special, peculiar mani- 
festation of Himself in creation ; that the Celestial 
Sun is the great Central Orb of the Universe, the 
source of the Astral Suns (or the Sun and Stars), and 
the centre around which they revolve ; that the law of 
harmony, which we have seen pervades all the uni- 
verse, is absolute in the Celestial Light and relaxed 
in the objective Suns in order to adapt their light to 
the necessities of the inhabitants of the several worlds 
in their respective systems; that in consequence of 
this relaxing of that unique law, Nature applies the 
light and heat separately, and even employs single 
rays in special operations, and man, too, is thus en- 
abled to analyze the objective light and employ its 
rays in various ways ; that, though relaxed, this law 
is not abrogated, the Almighty still enforces it when 
man presumes to disregard it, physically, mentally or 
morally ; that, in proportion as any one of God's crea- 
tures disregards His laws, He enforces the penalty — • 



. IUUA!»l.l_d IJW..L *.,- 



mill UUiiiJt III.UWU 



156 



BLUE AND HET> LIGHT. 



for instance, a disregard of the laws of health destroys 
the equilibrium within, and the penalty, disease, is 
proportionate to the infraction, but He permits us, by 
restoring the equilibrium, to escape the penalty and 
recover health ; that He places in our reach means 
for restoring the equilibrium of health and, if we seek 
aright to learn, enlightens us as to the mode of apply- 
ing the means. 

Later chapters will specially be devoted to the elu- 
cidation of the laws of health, the ascertaining of what 
is health and what disease, and the discovery of the 
best means and methods for expelling disease and 
restoring health. 

We have learned that in the mental world, as in the 
physical, disregard of the law of harmony entails dis- 
orders of the mind, and in the moral world sin is dis- 
regard of that law and its penalty is the withdrawal 
of Light, and, if persisted in, the penalty becomes the 
darkness of hell. That the happiness and glory of 
Heaven are due to the one fact that absolute and uni- 
form harmony reigns therein at all times forever, and 
sorrow and sighing, pain and sickness, decay and 
death, consequently cannot enter there ; that this world 
is the world of darkness solely because man disobeyed 
God and defied His law, thus entailing not only upon 
his posterity, but upon the entire world, a condition 
of inharmony in which the true Light cannot shine, 
and the withdrawal of Celestial Light constitutes 
Spiritual Darkness ; that, as ordinary darkness favors 
disease and ordinary light promotes health, so in an 
infinitely greater degree Spiritual Darkness produces 
sorrow, pain and death, and Celestial Light produces 



MATEKIAL FORMS AND VITAL DYNAMICS. 157 

happiness, health and life ; that, as the natural world 
is in a state of profound spiritual darkness, so the 
natural man is in a state of spiritual blindness and 
death ; that, in Christ, " the Sun of Righteousness," 
the true Light was gloriously manifested, and those 
who receive that Light into their Souls no longer 
" walk in darkness," but become " new creatures," are 
"born again," and are transformed into "children 
of Light;" that " whosoever will," may be enlightened 
by that glorious Light, if he will but seek that en- 
lightenment by earnest self-denial and devotion ; that 
he who cultivates the subjective faculties of his Soul, 
even while yet in this world of darkness, is not of it, 
but is a " child of Light," a citizen of Heaven, and to 
him death is but a more complete realization of the 
eternal blessedness of Light; that the "child of 
Light" cannot "hide his Light under a bushel," but 
must " set it on a hill to give Light to the world," and 
thus become a "Light of the world;" that, when 
Christ was in the world corporeally manifesting Celes- 
tial Light, men could not " see the Light," because 
they " loved darkness rather than Light," and, even 
were it possible for a dark Soul to attain Heaven, it 
could not be happy there, because, to enjoy the Light 
and consequent delights of the Celestial World, the 
Soul must be in harmony with that Light, and, hence, 
that he who would reach Heaven and be forever 
happy there, must cultivate the spiritual part of his 
Soul, and bring it into a state of harmony with God 
and Heaven by becoming a " new creature," a " child 
of Light;" that the "natural man," even if he be an 
Astronomer, " cannot see the Kingdom of God/ ? 

14 



158 



BLUE AND KED LIGHT, 



while the humblest " child of Light," shall have a 
foretaste of its joys and glories in this life, and at the 
last abide therein " forever blest." 

Harmony is the sublime law of physical, mental and 
moral health and life — the law of God, and of Heaven ! 
May we then seek to understand and obey it aright in 
body, mind, Soul and Spirit. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL 
DYNAMICS. 

"I will praise thee; for I am fearfully [incom- 
prehensibly?] and wonderfully made;" "Thou hast 
made him [Man] a little lower than the angels, and 
hast crowned him with glory and honour." David, 
"the sweet singer of Israel," illuminated by Celestial 
Light, had a high estimate of the human organism 
and a still higher conception of its crowning glory 
and honor, the Soul ! and the Man who knoics himself 
aright can scarcely refuse or neglect to praise the 
Almighty, or refuse or neglect to perform the part 
assigned him by God in the care of his body and the 
cultivation of his Soul — he who knows himself must 
realize that God has not merely created a marvelous 
frame and placed within it a still more stupendous 
system of machinery to move the frame, but has pro- 
vided a sublime centre of vital force, capable not only 
of keeping the machinery in action and impelling the 
form through earthly life, but of elevating the higher 
nature within, fitting it for eternal life and carrying 
it in safety through the world of darkness to the realms 
of ineffable light and joy and glory ! but, realizing all 
this that God has done, he will learn that the frame 
must be kept in repair, the machinery in running 
order and the Soul in active exercise. 

159 



160 



BLUE AND KED LIGHT, 



Man, physically considered, is the masterpiece of 
creative skill ! the highest type of material forms ! 
the noblest creature that matter is capable of being 
moulded, created or developed into. Considered 
as a living creature, Man's superiority over all an- 
imated beings is still more evident, and is so great 
that the most thoughtless perceive it. But we can- 
not begin to estimate how " fearfully and wonder- 
fully" we are made, until we study the vital forces 
within ; nor can we fully realize the entire " glory and 
honor " of Man's organization until we attempt to un- 
derstand and define that incomprehensible fountain of 
objective and subjective life, whence all the vital forces 
derive their vitality, the Sun of the human system, the 
Soul ! The inferior animals, as we designate all an- 
imated creatures below Man, are only less wonderfully 
made, are provided with systems of vitality within, 
and have each a centre of vital energy, a Soul, but 
the highest of them all is so far below Man that the 
most ignorant and unthinking perceive, if they do not 
conceive, the difference. 

Man has been called the Synthesis of the Universe, 
because he has within him the subjective principles 
of the Universe, the Soul and Spirit, together with 
the objective factor of the Soul; but he is also the 
Synthesis of the material creation, for in his physical 
composition we find elements of the Mineral and of 
the Vegetable and Animal kingdoms of Nature. "In 
the beginning," while space was filled with hyle, or 
ether, unpolarized, inert, black, "without form and 
void," the Almighty " Father of Light" conceived the 
marvelous plan of manifesting Himself in Light, and 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYN AMICS. 101 

through Light in Creation ; the grand object being to 
develope in corporeal form a Soul of Light " in His 
own image and after His own likeness," a complemen- 
tary, complete manifestation of Himself in Nature. 
To this end, the Rouach EloJiim brooded over the 
waters; God said "Let there be Light, and Light 
was" — His first manifestation, but not corporeal. 
Darkness fled, chaos ceased, Light prevailed and 
order and beauty were developed. Creation was not 
completed, however, until its Synthesis, Man, "be- 
came a living Soul." 

Now, alas ! Man forfeited his " likeness " to the 
Creator by disobedience, and Spiritual Darkness, 
Spiritual Chaos, came upon the world ; but the Al- 
mighty would not be baffled in His sublime purpose, 
and, even in the hour of punishing fallen man, an- 
nounced the accomplishment of that purpose in Christ, 
the perfect realization of the Divine essence mani- 
fested in the human form — " No man hath seen God 
at any time ; the only begotten Son, which is in the 
bosom of the Father, He hath manifested Him;" 
"Without controversy, great is the mystery of godli- 
ness [God-likeness] ; God was manifest in the flesh." 
" The seed of the woman," Christ, was " in all points 
tempted like as we are, yet without sin" — the objec- 
tive faculties of His Soul could not lead Him astray 
because the subjective were completely developed and 
perfectly unfolded, and He was " the Sun of Right- 
eousness," the Celestial Sun — absolutely the Almighty 
Jehovah "manifested in the flesh," and could truth- 
fully say "I and my Father are one!" He it was 
of whom Isaiah spoke when he exclaimed to " Zion," 
u* L 



162 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



the church of the Living God : " Arise, be enlightened, 
for thy Light is come, and the Glory of Jehovah is 
risen upon thee. . . . The Sun shall be no more 
thy light by day; neither for brightness shall the 
moon give light unto thee : but Jehovah shall be 
unto thee an everlasting Light, and thy God thy 
Glory. Thy Sun shall no more go down ; neither 
shall thy Moon withdraw itself: for Jehovah shall 
be thine everlasting Light." Then he adds the assur- 
ance : "Thy people also shall be all righteous" — but 
the millennium has not yet come, and we await the ful- 
filment of this promised result of the Messiah's com- 
ing, which will occur when the world receives " the 
Sun of Righteousness" and ceases to " love darkness 
rather than Light." Meanwhile, though no man can, 
in this world of darkness, attain to so perfect a " like- 
ness" to God as did our " elder brother and exemplar," 
we may, by "taking up our cross and following" 
Christ, in holy living and good works, become " chil- 
dren of Light " and we have the encouraging promise 
that "we shall be like Him" when "'we see Him as 
He is." 

We opened this chapter with a quotation from Psalm 
139, and we quote a few more words from the same 
passage, which show that the Psalmist knew whereof 
Man is made : " My substance was not hid from thee, 
when I was made in secret, and curiously wrought in 
the lowest parts of the earth. Thine eyes did see my 
substance, yet being unperfect; and in thy book all 
my members were written, which in continuance were 
fashioned, when as yet there was none of them." Is 
not this a striking picture of the Psalmist's view of 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 163 

God's care and forethought in Man's creation? his 
idea appears to be that God, like a careful workman, 
set down in a book the details of the human form, 
each member, or part, with the materials to be used in 
its construction. But it is more : it is a recognition 
of the fact that, in the act of creating inorganic mat- 
ter, even " in the lowest parts of the earth," the ulti- 
mate design of using it in producing Man was borne 
in mind. Chemical analysis shows that the Psalmist 
was correct in his view that the members of the body 
were developed, or at least the materials prepared, "in 
secret, and curiously wrought in the lowest parts of 
the earth;" for it demonstrates that a very large per- 
centage of the materials that enter into, not only the 
members, nor only into the bones and flesh, but act- 
ually into the life-centres and -tissues; even into the 
brain, consists of inorganic matter, sometimes modi- 
fied, adapted and worked-up into special forms or 
compounds, but often without change, precisely as it 
occurs in the earth. But let us note some of the 
more important of these inorganic constituents of the 
human organism : 

Water. — We have before alluded to the large pro- 
portion of water in the material form not only of man, 
but of all organic things. Water is the most import- 
ant of all substances in Nature, — nay, there is water 
in Heaven : the " water above the firmament/ 7 and 
the globe of the objective Sun, we have seen, is chiefly 
composed of water ; but for water, in the form of va- 
por, in our atmosphere, warmed by the calorific ele- 
ment of Light, there could be no life upon our planet ; 
while its importance in the springs, rivulets, rivers, 



lt>4 BLUE AND KED LIGHT. 

lakes, seas and ocean, is obvious to the child when 
first he begins to exercise his reason ; and without 
water no substance could exist — even the flinty rock 
contains water. The importance of water to vege- 
table life requires no demonstration ; those who think 
not why, recognize it, when they water the garden or 
the pot-plant. From 20 to 99 per cent, of vegetable 
forms is water, and of animal forms it is the chief 
ingredient: just as the plant shrivels and withers and 
dies in proportion as the needful water is withheld, 
so the man or beast could not sustain life within his 
body without water. Water is the only liquid God 
has created, and man can devise nothing to take its 
place even in the smallest proportion (hence the an- 
cients regarded Water as one of the four primary ele- 
ments) ; water alone supplies moisture to the atmo- 
sphere, the earth, the plant and the animal, and nothing 
can be made to supplaut it or do its important work : 
other liquids may have their uses (for instance, alcohol 
as a solvent for certain substances not soluble in water), 
but their field of usefulness is not in man's body any 
more than in the vegetable body. 

The human organism contains nearly four parts 
water to one of all other ingredients combined — i. e., 
a man weighing 150 pounds contains 116 pounds of 
water. This is distributed through the system as fol- 
lows : 

Percentage of Water. 

Bone 10 to 20 

Hair 40 

Cuticle 50 

Nerve 57 

Skin 60 to 70 

Fibrous Textures 65 to 70 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 165 

Percentage of Water. 

Artery 70 to 75 

Cartilage -j 

Muscle [ 72 to 77 

Glands J 

Blood 77 to 80 

Wall of Intestine 82 

Brain 80 to 84 

Fat 

The purposes which water subserves are different 
according to the matter with which it is connected; 1. 
It imparts to the tissues the necessary suppleness 
and extensibility — e. g., a piece of tendon desiccated 
shrinks into a nearly inflexible rod, resembling dried 
glue, but, if macerated in water, recovers its original 
pliancy. Even to the harder bones it imparts strength. 
It will be observed that the amount of water in the 
various parts, is proportionate to their relation to vital- 
ity — thus, the bones have the least, hair but little 
more, and so on, until the artery has an average of 
73 per cent., the muscles of 75 per cent., and the brain 
has the most, more than four-fifths being water. 

2. Water is invaluable, indispensable to the system 
as a solvent to prepare the way for all the chemico- 
vital processes by which the integrity of the living 
body is maintained; and a deficiency in the water- 
supply is soon apparent in a derangement of these 
operations even before the constitution of the tissues 
is sensibly affected. It is well known that chemical 
action is impossible between the atoms of solid sub- 
stances ; a solid must be vaporized or dissolved before 
its atoms can be freely attacked by the chemical force. 
Alimentary material for the uses of the Organism must 



166 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



be dissolved ere it can be applied ; food received into 
the stomach would produce evil rather than benefit 
but for water to dissolve it. It is water, too, that con- 
tinues to act as solvent for the nutritive matter after 
it has found its way into the current of the circula- 
tion, and has undergone that assimilating process that 
prepares it for application to the renovation of the 
solid tissues : water forms an average of nearly four- 
fifths of the " vital fluid " which courses in minute 
streams throughout the body, imparting the vigor of 
life to the tissues it traverses. But, the Avater of the 
blood not only brings to the living tissues the mate- 
rials for repair and development, it also takes up 
the products of their decay and disintegration and 
conveys them, by a complicated but perfect system of 
sewerage, out of the body. 

Lime, Phosphate and Carbonate of. — 1. The 
Phosphate of Lime, or " bone-earth," is second to 
none of the solid inorganic components of the human 
body either in amount or the important mechanical 
purposes it directly serves, while eminent investiga- 
tors ascribe to it an equal importance as contribut- 
ing to the chemico-vital processes of the economy. 
Healthy bones contain an average of from 48 to 59 
per cent., those containing most that are specially re- 
quired to possess power of resistance — of the Dentine 
of teeth it forms 6Q, and of the Enamel nearly 90 per 
cent. This calcareous salt is, however, by no means 
confined to the bony frame, it is present in all the soft 
tissues, and in solution, or suspension, in all the fluids 
of the system, those conveying in nutriment and those 
eonveving out excrement. 2. The Carbonate of Lime 



HUM AH ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 167 

is always present, though in much smaller proportions 
than the Phosphate. 

Chloride of Sodium occurs in nearly every part 
of the Organism of Man, both solid and fluid, in close 
and intimate relations to the organic constituents, the 
chemical and physical properties of which are mate- 
rially affected by it ; it is second only to water in im- 
portance of the inorganic components in a chemical 
point of view. In a state of health, the proportions 
of salt in the tissues and fluids are definite and con- 
stant, the variations being very slightly perceptible 
after even an excessive eating of salt food ; all in ex- 
cess of the normal amount appears to be rejected and 
passes off chiefly by the kidneys. In some diseases 
the quantity of salt in the blood is liable to great va- 
riations. The proportion, however, in health, differs 
greatly in the several tissues, and in the same tissue 
at the different stages of its development. 

Besides these, there are : Phosphate of Magnesia, 
Fluoride of Calcium, Silica (only in the hair as a 
normal constituent), Hydrochloric Acid (an important 
chemical agent, especially in the gastric fluid), Alka- 
line Carbonates (these, according to Professor Liebig, 
keep the chief solid constituents of the blood in a 
fluid state; but for alkali the water could not dissolve 
the oxides of iron or other metallic oxides, and farther 
they promote the metamorphosis of the malic, citric, 
tartaric and other organic acids that pass into the body 
with the food), and Alkaline Phosphates. Though 
Soda is the chief base of the Alkaline Carbonates and 
Phosphates, Potash is also present in appreciable 
quantities. Iron is, of course, a constituent of the 



168 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



human body, but it is chiefly as an element of He/ma- 
tin, which Ave shall mention among the organic constit- 
uents. Sulphur and Phosphorus, like Iron, must be 
noticed among organic ingredients, because though 
themselves inorganic, they appear chiefly in intimate 
relations to organic compounds. It was at one time 
claimed that Arsenic was constantly met with in the 
bones, but subsequent researches show that it is never 
present as an ingredient, and its presence must always 
be attributed to some exceptional introduction. Cop- 
per and Lead are found, the former in the bile and 
biliary concretions, and the latter in the tissues and 
fluids of the body, but neither of them is a constitu- 
ent (it is noteworthy that Copper appears to replace 
Iron in the blood of some marine animals, both Mol- 
luscous and Articulated). A peculiar cumulative prop- 
erty of Lead causes it, when received into the circu- 
latory system, to attach itself to certain tissues in 
considerable quantities, often occasioning paralysis of 
certain muscles or groups of muscles, or other serious 
evils. 

Notwithstanding the large amount and importance 
of the inorganic components of the human organism, 
however, its organic constituents claim a higher rank ; 
while it is difficult, where each ingredient has its part 
to contribute, which no other can supply so well, to 
pronounce one more important than another, it is not 
amiss to recognize a higher rank for those that enter 
specially into the life-centres and vivaducts of the 
system, as do the principal organic compounds in the 
body. These come from the earlier inorganic king- 
dom, but by way of an organic go-between, wherein 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 169 

they have once undergone Nature's developing man- 
ipulation, and are therefore the better fitted for use in 
the more delicate and essential works of the grand 
machine, requiring less to adapt them to the import- 
ant functions now to devolve upon them. The chief 
organic components of the body are : 

I. The Histogenetic Substances, or the Tissue- 
Creators. These substances have either been intro- 
duced into the system, or generated from organic and 
inorganic matter otherwise introduced, as the mate- 
rials of its fabrics, undergoing needful progressive 
metamorphoses. The organic matter of the Histo- 
genetic group, with the exception of the fatty sub- 
stance, is of the azotized or nitrogenous class. 

II. The Calorific Substances, or the Heat-pro- 
ducers. These, too, either enter the system as com- 
ponents of the food or are formed within by- the met- 
amorphosis of portions of the Histogenetic substances 
or of components of the tissues themselves. They are 
all of the saccharine and oleaginous classes. 

III. The Constituents of the Actual Living 
Tissues, and 

IY. The Excrementitious Substances, or the 
products of the Disintegration and Retrograde Met- 
amorphosis of the Tissues. 

Of course, this classification is only general or rela- 
tive, as it is obviously impossible to make an absolute 
classification where the several classes are so closely 
connected materially, as well as in their functional 
work, that they cannot be isolated. Thus, fatty sub- 
stances must be regarded as Histogenetic, because they 
seem essential to the production of all the tissues, and 

15 



170 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



form an important constituent of the adipose and ner- 
vous ; yet they as clearly must be considered Calorific, 
since their production within the body contributes 
largely to the combustive process, in which a much 
larger proportion is daily consumed than can be de- 
manded for the repair and renewal of the organized 
fabric; and, again, fat belongs also to the third class, 
being an essential component of the living tissues. 
Still we must not imagine that it, like the Histoge- 
netic substances proper, undergoes actual organization, 
as it simply combines mechanically with the other 
ingredients, and that so loosely that it is readily 
separated when the system demands the separation. 

A thoughtless reading of the classifications would 
lead to the conclusion that the third must be almost 
identical with the first class, and chemically no doubt 
it is, but -the molecular character of their components 
is very different ; indeed, the properties of the living 
tissues can only be chemically examined by first re- 
ducing them back to the forms or the state in which 
they entered the body. Then, here we meet another 
transition link : Fibrin, one of the Histogenetic com- 
pounds, so exactly resembles "liquid flesh" that it 
claims a place in the third class. 

The close connection between the fourth and third 
classes presents another difficulty : Excrementitious 
substances are separated from the blood into which 
they have been received back by the agency of gland- 
ular structures of whose organized tissues they form 
part for a time. This difficulty is augmented by the 
relation of the fourth to the second, a material part of 
the products of disintegration being utilized in the 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 171 

calorific process, undergoing metamorphosis within 
the body into saccharine and oleaginous matter little 
differing from those received as food. 

Hence, as the foregoing classification, though the 
only one physiologically practicable, is yet not exact, 
we shall not adhere to it tenaciously, but shall permit 
the chemical nature of substances to influence our brief 
notice of the organic constituents of the " fearful and 
wonderful " machine called man : and in doing so we 
must make a partial re-classification, treating: 1. The 
compounds of the Albuminous type, or "protein-com- 
pounds,'' both as the materials for, and the metamor- 
phosed components of, the living tissues ; 2. those of 
the Gelatinous type under the same progressive forms; 
3. the Oleaginous compounds, as related to the first 
and second, and measurably to the fourth of the phys- 
iological classes ; and 4. the Saccharine substances, 
under the second and fourth classes : 

1. The Albuminous Compounds comprise a series of 
constituents of primary importance in histogenesis, or 
the formation of tissue, as the tissue of all natural 
forms, vegetable no less than animal, is largely com- 
posed of albumen. Albumen, the nominal is also the 
actual base of this group, with which we find Casein, 
Globulin and Fibrin — these are what are called 
" protein-compounds/'' a name first applied to them 
under a mistaken notion that they contained a certain 
organic base, free from sulphur and phosphorus, which 
was called Protein. These compounds cannot be re- 
solved by analysis, like complex inorganic matter, into 
two or more compounds that maybe resynthesized into 
their original j and therefore no exact clue has been 



172 



BLUE AND RED EIGHT. 



obtained to their very complex composition. The 
protein-compounds are, however, extremely suscept- 
ible to the air at ordinary temperatures, decomposing 
spontaneously with great rapidity; this decomposi- 
tion ultimately resolves them, with oxygen from 
the atmosphere, into water, carbonic acid and am- 
monia, and various organic compounds may be 
formed by a less complete disintegration ; again, 
by the help of oxidizing agents, the formic, acetic, 
butyric, caproic, and other organic acids of the same 
type, that occur naturally in the body, and the or- 
dinary fatty acids, may doubtless be produced in the 
same way. The ready spontaneous disintegration of 
these substances affects other substances in the body, 
and thus adapts them to extensive usefulness in the 
organism ; it is found, e. g., that at a certain stage 
of decomposition, a protein-compound converts starch 
into sugar ; at a later stage converts the sugar into 
lactic acid, mannite and vegetable mucus; and at a 
still later stage, lactic acid becomes butyric acid, hy- 
drogen and carbonic acid. This property of influen- 
cing changes in other substances, whilst themselves in 
process of decay, obviously augments their value, by 
adding a value as ferments to their histogenetic im- 
portance ; this action also shows their right to a place 
in the calorific class. 

Of all the protein-compounds, Albumen is the 
special pabulum of the tissues ; indeed, the other his- 
togenetic materials must be reduced to the condition 
of Albumen before they can be appropriated by the 
living system. A convenient illustration of the latent 
energy in still Albumen, as well as of its nutritive 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 173 

quality, is presented by the ordinary hen's egg, of 
which it is the main ingredient. Just as the store of 
material in the egg, under a steady, gentle warmth, 
developes into bones, muscles, nerves, tendons, liga- 
ments, membranes, skin, bill, feathers, etc. of the 
chick; so the like tissues of the human body are 
formed and repaired from the albumen of the human 
blood. According to Mulder, Albumen is composed 
as follows : 

Carbon 53.5 per cent. 

Oxygen 22.0 do. 

Hydrogen 7.0 do. 

Nitrogen 15.5 do. 

Sulphur . 1.6 do. 

Phosphorus 0.4 do. 

Professor Liebig denies the presence of Phosphorus 
as a constituent, and claims that it has no existence in 
any article of food, or in any tissue of the body except 
in combination as Phosphoric Acid. 

As a rule, Albumen is a constituent of all the nutri- 
tive fluids of the body, as the blood, the chyle, the 
lymph, and the serous exudation that percolates 
through the interstices of the tissues ; it is also found 
in considerable abundance in the tissues themselves, 
but may not always be a constituent. The presence 
of Albumen in excretory matter indicates either dis- 
ease of the excreting organ, or a marked alteration in 
the composition of the blood or in the mode of its cir- 
culation. 

Casein replaces Albumen in the milk; the two 

differ chiefly in chemical properties; the only positive 

difference appears to be that the former contains less 

Sulphur than the latter, and it certainly contains no 

J j -■■ 



174 



BLUE AND KE1> LIGHT, 



Phosphorus which Albumen possibly does. It is the 
Casein in the milk that coagulates when "rennet" 
comes in contact with it — Albumen, on the other 
hand, is insensible to the influence of "rennet." 
Casein, like Albumen, is always intimately associated 
with other substances; it has a special affinity for 
Phosphate of Lime. 

Another of the Albumen family is Globulin, which 
is found, as a constituent, in the red blood-corpuscles 
and in the cells of the crystalline lens ; it is so nearly 
identical with Albumen proper that it is regarded by 
chemists as Albumen modified by its combinations. 

But the most important compound of the Albumen 
group is perhaps that known as Fibrin, chemically 
almost one with Albumen but physiologically very 
different ; indeed, so marked is this difference, in view 
of the chemical similarity, between the two that Fibrin 
must be credited with the distinctive presence of the 
vital principle. It is the only one of the protein-com- 
pounds that evinces an independent, spontaneous ac- 
tion, in the direction of organized structure: e. g., 
while retained in the living body it exists in solution 
in certain fluids, but upon escaping from vital control, 
as when withdrawn from the body or when the body 
dies, it coagulates spontaneously, and the coagulum, 
when formed under favorable circumstances, exhibits 
a definite organic structure, simple indeed, but closely 
resembling that of the tissues that form a large part 
of the human fabric. Fibrin is, therefore, a substance 
of the highest physiological importance. It is found 
in all fluids that are being applied to the nutrition of 
living tissues, or are in course of preparation for that 



HUMAN OKGA^DSM AJ^JJ ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 175 

purpose ; it is one of the most characteristic constit- 
uents of the blood, is found as an important ingredient 
of chyle and lymph, and is a component of the " plas- 
tic " exudations. On the other hand, it is never found 
in the secreted fluids. Fibrin is a JBistogenetic substance 
in the act of conversion into living tissue, its molecules 
showing a tendency to assume spontaneously one of 
the arrangements characteristic of organization. As 
we have said, the chemical composition of Fibrin does 
not appreciably differ from that of Albumen, and we 
will not pause to speak of it in this light. 

Hwmatin next demands a short notice : it differs 
very considerably from the protein-compounds in its 
chemical constitution, though four of its five ingre- 
dients are the same as theirs — Iron being the fifth and 
Sulphur and Phosphorus being absent ; but Mulder's 
analysis shows a marked difference in the proportions 
as compared with Albumen : 

Carbon 65.3 per cent. 

Oxygen 11.9 do. 

Hydrogen 5.4 do. 

Nitrogen 10.4 do. 

Iron 7.0 do. 

We see here a large increase in the amount of Carbon, 
while the Oxygen falls off nearly one-half, and Hy- 
drogen and Nitrogen each falls off nearly one-third, 
while a considerable proportion of Iron makes its 
presence felt. It was thought that the Red color of 
the blood was due to the Iron, but experiments have 
shown that the Iron may be withdrawn without affect- 
ing the color — we shall not here attempt to account 
for the color, but shall do so in due time. It has not 



176 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



been satisfactorily ascertained how Hsematin is pro- 
duced, but it is doubtless generated by the vital force 
in the blood-cells from the Albumen of the fluid in 
which they float, the Iron being introduced into the 
system by many articles of food. Hsematin is the 
color-constituent of the red corpuscles of the blood, 
and is not normally present in any other fluid or solid 
of the body. Hoematoidin, found in sanguineous effu- 
sions, such as those in the substance of the brain or 
skin, and elsewhere, is Heematin in a state of retrograde 
metamorphosis. We cannot take space to state the 
grounds upon which we base the hypothesis, but must 
be content to affirm, that Hsematin is Albumen in 
course of preparation for the nutrition, strengthening 
and vivifying of the muscular and nervous tissues ; a 
single well-known fact is worthy of note here, as 
strongly confirmatory of this statement: the nervo- 
muscular power of an animal always bears specific 
proportion to the number of red corpuscles in its 
blood. 

Doubtless, the color, Red, carries with it the vital 
polar energy of the ray of Sunlight that gives it birth, 
and H^matin is the representative of the polar-force 
of Light! 

2. The Gelatinous Compounds form a large propor- 
tion, perhaps fully one-half, of the tissues of the human 
organism. Their principal physical characteristic 
consists in their ready solution in boiling water, and 
their becoming a jelly when cooled. Some tissues dis- 
solve more readily, and leave much less residue, than 
others. Gelatin is thus discovered to be a consider- 
able constituent, often the chief one, of bones, car- 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 177 

tilages, tendons, ligaments, skin, mucous and serous 
membranes, etc., and in some instances it appears al- 
most alone. Gelatin is found in two forms, Glutin, 
or Gelatin proper, and Chondrin. They differ in 
their chemical constitution and in some minor points, 
but agree in their very slight solubility in cold, and 
prompt solubility in hot water, and in forming a jelly 
upon cooling. 

Glutin is -the form yielded by the white fibrous 
tissue wherever found and by the animal basis of 
bone; it is so decidedly glutinous that 1 part to 100 
of water forms a jelly of evident consistency on cool- 
ing. Tannic acid is its most active reagent, contact 
with which in solution produces a white cheesy pre- 
cipitate that is so pronounced that it is visible in 1 
part of Glutin to 5000 of water ; this is the only acid 
that throws down Glutin from its aqueous solution, 
and alkalies only precipitate a small quantity of bone- 
earth. Care must be exercised in boiling, for boiling 
too long deprives it of the glutinizing property, and 
causes it to part with Phosphate of Lime ; the same 
effect is produced by repeated dissolving with ex- 
posure to air. According to Gannal, the Gelatigenous 
tissues are alw T ays the first of solid animal structures 
to putrefy ; Glutin shows a much greater tendency to 
putrefaction than Fibrin under similar circumstances. 
There is no Phosphorus and only 0.50 per cent, of 
Sulphur in Glutin, and it exhibits a decided partiality 
for forming definite chemical combinations with the 
Phosphate and Carbonate of Lime. Boiling in Caustic 
Potash for some time decomposes Glutin, and throws 
off Ammonia, producing two new compounds: Leucine 

M 



178 blue a:nd ked light. 

and Glycine ; the latter is simply Gelatin-sugar, which 
is an organic base of certain excrementitious sub- 
stances. 

Chondrin in its general properties differs little from 
Glutin, but it is obtained from cartilages alone, and 
then only after long-continued boiling, and it is easily 
precipitated by certain reagents which do not affect 
Glutin. The difference in composition between Glutin 
and Chondrin, and between them and Albumen and 
Hsematin, may be seen by comparison of the follow- 
ing with the tables of the two named ; like the former 
tables, this is from Mulder : 

Glutin. Chondrin. 

Carbon 50.4 . 50.0 

Hydrogen 6.7 6.6 

Nitrogen 18.3 14.4 

0x ygen 1 24.6 29.0 

Sulphur J 

It is very remarkable that though nearly, if not 
quite, one-half of the human tissues are Gelatigenous, 
not an atom of Gelatin is found in the blood or in any 
of the healthy fluids. This clearly indicates that the 
Gelatinous form is never assumed until the Albumen 
is ready for immediate conversion into fibrous tissue, 
and, therefore, Gelatin never belongs to the first of the 
physiological classes, and it does as clearly belong to 
both the second and third, and in a measure to the 
fourth, though when it reaches the excrementitious 
fluids it quickly loses its peculiarities. The most 
striking difference between the Gelatinous and Pro- 
tein-compounds is, therefore, to be found in their 
physiological characteristics : the functions of Gelatin 



HUMAN ORGANISM A^l> ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 179 

in the system are purely mechanical, the Gelatigenous 
tissues being notably those that bind parts together, 
resist tension and antagonize pressure; on the other 
hand, the properly vital tissues are largely Albumi- 
nous. 

3. Mavgarin and Olein are the two forms which the 
Oleaginous Compounds assume in the human fabric; 
the latter is a permanent, fixed oil, or fluid fat:, retain- 
ing its fluidity even below the Fahrenheit zero, while 
the 'former is solid when separate from Olein, but in the 
body it is dissolved when it enters the latter. Mar- 
garin is a spermaceti-like fat, melts at 118° F., and 
may be specifically designated human fat, as it is not 
found in most animals, being replaced in them by 
Stearin ; it is, however, the principal solid constituent 
of vegetable fats. 

The Oleaginous substances serve important purposes 
throughout the system and claim a place in all four 
of the physiological departments. Of course much 
of the fat required for its uses is introduced into the 
body with the food, but a large proportion is created 
or generated within from the Albuminous, Gelatinous 
and Saccharine contents of the organism, the Liver 
being the chief fat factory of the complex machine. 
It would be interesting to notice the processes of 
healthy fat-making, and no less that by which " fatty 
degeneration " is produced, in the living system, and 
possibly still more interesting to remark the very pe- 
culiar, if not mysterious, production of "adipocere" 
in dead bodies — but Ave have not the space to spare, 
as these processes have no place in the scope of our 
present work, 



180 



BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 



The importance of the Oleaginous Compounds to 
the human economy cannot be measured by the pro- 
portions of the adipose tissues, for they furnish a most 
considerable portion of the nutriment and material for 
repair of the nervous tissue, and their presence in the 
blood and chyle indicate a still wider range of use- 
fulness in promoting the general nutrition and main- 
tenance of the physical and vital portions of the or- 
ganism. Then, again, it must be borne in mind that 
"the remarkable process, resembling combustion, upon 
which the needful warmth of the body depends, is due 
more to this class, than any other, of the compounds 
that Nature introduces into and produces within, the 
animated fabrics of "warm-blooded" animals. 

There are two forms of non -saponin" able fat, called 
" lipoids," which appear to be normal constituents of 
the blood ; these are Cholesterin, or " biliary fat/' and 
Serolin, but they are probably only excrementitious 
products. 

4. The Saccharine Compounds belong more exclu- 
sively to one physiological class, the second, than any 
other of the organic constituents of the body. Glu- 
cose, or "grape-sugar," is the form in which Saccha- 
rine matter is normally present in the blood and chyle. 
We shall not dwell upon this class of compounds, 
beyond remarking upon two . or three facts specially 
noteworthy : Cane-sugar when introduced into the 
system, passing into the circulatory currents, is neither 
assimilated nor removed by combustion, but finds its 
way out of the system, unchanged essentially, by way 
of the Kidneys; on the other hand, Glucose, even 
when introduced into the system in much larger quan- 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 181 

tities, is entirely appropriated to useful purposes, not 
a trace of it being discoverable in the excrements. 
Indeed, when an insufficient quantity of the required 
sugar is received in food, the Liver generates liberal 
supplies from starch and other sources. The Liver is 
the chief sugar-creating organ, but we have seen that 
the protein-compounds, in certain stages of decompo- 
sition work in the same direction. The Saccharine 
product, Lactic acid, is recognized as one of the most 
important agents in the combustive processes of Na- 
ture in the human organism, although it distinctly 
identifies itself with the fourth physiological class. 

Lactic acid is a constant constituent of the gastric 
juice, and though its presence in healthy blood cannot 
be demonstrated by direct experiment, its certain pres- 
ence in the gastric, urinary, cutaneous and other secre- 
tions, prove by induction that it must exist in the 
blood, even if only long enough to pass through. In 
a healthy condition of the system, Lactic acid is de- 
composed by the respiratory process, or eliminated 
from the blood by the secretory operations, as fast as 
it enters the circulation : its evident presence in un- 
healthy blood is due to excessive introduction or to 
the checking of the eliminating processes. 

A very brief notice of the Excrementitious Sub- 
stances will suffice here : these are the products of the 
disintegration of the tissues and of superfluous ali- 
mentary matter. The Sewerage system of the animal 
organism is no less wonderful than the Circulatory, 
and is equally essential to the welfare of Man. And 
in this light, this class of substances appears no less 
important than the Histogenetic or Calorific class. 

16 



182 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



Still, as they are produced from the substances already 
noticed, a mere recognition of them is all that we 
deem requisite here. 

We have now, briefly it is true, only in epitome in- 
deed, but as fully as the scope and design of our work 
demand or justify, noticed the principal constituents 
and ingredients of the material form of Man. Won- 
derful, as unquestionably is the fact that so many and 
such various materials have been employed in creating 
a casket for the Soul, far more wonderful is the manner 
in which these materials have been progressively cre- 
ated and developed, until exactly adapted, each for its 
special place in the stupendous fabric ; still more won- 
derful is the manner in which the prepared materials 
have been brought together, adjusted, combined, as- 
similated, and unified into a form that is simply per- 
fect in every light in which it can be viewed ; still far 
more wonderful is the provision made for the con- 
tinuous development and repair of this perfect form; 
and this brings before us the absolute wonder of won- 
ders, the invisible, imponderable, impalpable, and yet 
mighty, something within that we call LIFE, which 
is the manifestation of an incomprehensible Divine 
principle that we call the SOUL, an emanation direct 
from the LIGHT OF LIFE, the Celestial Light! 

As we have said, the prime object in Creation w T as 
the providing of a form adapted to the highest pos- 
sible unfoldment of that principle in Nature called 
Life that in Man is individualized into the Soul; 
when the successive creative evolutions had produced 
forms adapted to active life, each form was endued 
with the Life-principle which developed the form, and 



HUMAN ORGANISM AND ITS VITAL DYNAMICS. 183 

itself within, to the extent to which the character and 
capacity of the form would permit. When the high- 
est type was reached, we are told by Moses, " Man 
became a living Soul !" Hence, the material form 
is not Man — it is but the casket within which Man 
may be unfolded— Man is A living Soul! The 
Soul could not be fully unfolded without a suitable 
body, and the body was provided. This body con- 
sists of Bones, Teeth, and Cartilages, which form its 
solid frame, with the Ligaments which unite them, 
and the Tendons which communicate motion to them 
from the Muscles; the Skin, with its appendages, 
which envelopes the exterior of the frame, the Mucous 
Membranes extending into all the cavities, and the 
Serous Membranes lining the shut sacs ; the Blood- 
vessels and Absorbents, which distribute the nutritive 
fluids, and the Glands to eliminate unnecessary or ex- 
hausted substances from these; the Muscles which 
communicate motion by way of the Tendons to the 
osseous framework and to the contents of the canals 
and tubules that convey alimentary and other sub- 
stances through the system ; the Nerves which excite 
the Muscles and serve as the instruments for the re- 
ception of sensations and for the operations of the 
Mind ; the Areolar tissue which connects together the 
preceding, and the Adipose which is commonly dif- 
fused more or less through this — each of these having 
a structure and a mode of vital action in some degree 
peculiar to itself, and hence possessing distinctive vital 
endowments. Thus, we find but one Vital Force, and 
more than one Vital Reservoir or Centre — one orig- 
inal Life-principle concentrating its energies in suit- 



184 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



able centres, each of which has the peculiar power to 
disseminate its portion of vitality in the channels pro- 
vided for it. We propose now to consider, in the 
ensuing chapter, the Centres and Original Source of 
Vital Dynamics within the Human Organism, and 
the great Actual Source. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE CENTRES AND ORIGINAL SOURCE OF VITAL 
DYNAMICS WITHIN THE HUMAN ORGANISM, 
AND THE GREAT ACTUAL SOURCE. 

The simple Cell is the Type and the Base of Or- 
ganization, and Organization is Life ! The hum- 
blest Plant and the perfected Human Organism have 
a common starting-point — a simple Cell. Each Cell 
is an Organism, and therefore each Cell has within it 
the principle we call Life, in its essence the same — in 
its source the same — in its dependence the same, as the 
Life of the most complex Organism. In other words: 
there is but one Actual Independent Life, Jehovah, 
manifesting Himself in the Celestial Sun, which thus 
becomes the Centre and Source of Creative Energy, or 
of Life-unfold ment; for Life unfolding is generation 
and generation is creation — organic forms are mani- 
festations of Life, the successive types, from the simple 
Cell to the complex Human Organism, being progres- 
sive manifestations of the one principle, Life, in higher 
and higher degrees of unfoldment, from mere existence 
to individualization in the Human Soul, and in the 
individualized Soul appears the germ of a still high- 
er Life — Subjective Faculties which, in proportion as 
they are carefully cultivated by self-denial, holiness 
and devotion, impart to the Soul the image and like- 

16 * 185 



186 



BLUE A^Ji) liEL- LIGHT. 



ness of the Author of Life, and thus accomplish the 
original purpose of the Creator. 

Perhaps the most interesting study in Nature con- 
sists in tracing the unfoldment of the Life-principle 
from the Cell upwards, and the necessarily corre- 
spondent development of forms from the minute Cell 
to the perfect Human body. We have, in an earlier 
chapter, skeletonized the study, and our space and the 
character and scope of our present work forbid more, 
however much pleasure and profit we might derive 
from presenting, and our reader from studying, Na- 
ture in this aspect. 

A careful prosecution of this study shows that, 
though each Cell has life, and possesses within itself 
the germ of development, an aggregation of Cells in 
any number at once destroys the independence of cell- 
life and produces mutual dependence — each cell of an 
aggregate body is necessarily dependent upon each and 
all other cells of that body. The cell no longer lives 
by itself, and can no longer live for itself; it must 
now live for the body of which it constitutes a part. 
An aggregation of cells must have, not a number 
of independent lives, but one life — the two, or the 
hundred, or the thousand, or the millions, of cell- 
lives must be so intimately combined and blended, so 
actually unified as to become one life ! The hitherto 
separate organisms must be reorganized into one. Of 
course, this complex Organism possesses all the powers 
and functions of its component organisms, but they 
must be not simply brought together, they must be 
united — there must be ever present an equilibrium, a 
harmony, for antagonism between cells within a body 



THE CJ&NTfUES (ETC.) OE VITAL DYNAMICS. 187 

must produce death. To produce this harmony, there 
must be developed a Centre of Vitality, to regulate the 
equilibration of life throughout the Organism, appor- 
tioning its needed portion of the aggregate vitality to 
each cell. Thus, in the first aggregations of cells into 
animated bodies, the combined lives were harmonized 
into one ; and in later forms, as a larger number of 
cell-lives were embodied, a Centre of Vitality was de- 
veloped to insure harmony ; in still later forms, where- 
in the number of cell-lives demanded more than one 
centre, harmony was insured by the development of a 
centre of centres, a Soul, as in the higher types of 
animals. At last, in Man, the main centre became 
individualized into a self-conscious Soul, with certain 
attributes and powers not found in any other aggrega- 
tion of Life, and with a consequent authority and re- 
sponsibility of which we shall speak hereafter. 

Of course, two Cell-lives combined possess a greater 
and higher power than one, or even than the two sepa- 
rately, could attain, and so we find, from step to step, 
as higher organizations are reached, still greater and 
higher powers and functions appear — each successive 
step is a step forwards and upwards. Each successive 
advance in Life-development we see manifested in an 
improved type of material form, and conversely in 
each progressively improved type of form we look for 
and discover a higher Life-unfoldment. We cannot 
see Life, but can see its manifestation in material 
forms, and hence can realize that in a horse Life is 
vastly higher and developed in a far greater degree 
than in an insect or even in a reptile. So, likewise, 
we can see that in Man the character and degree of 



188 BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 

Life-unfoldment is immeasurably higher and grander 
than in the horse. The Life-principle is the same in 
insect, reptile, horse and Man — but how different the 
manifestations ! 

We have here, however, to consider Life as mani- 
fested in Man, whose material form, we have seen, is 
"fearfully and wonderfully made," even if we con- 
sider only the nature, number and variety of its in- 
gredients and constituents. We come now to consider 
it as a stupendous complex Organism, comprising nine 
distinct systems, with each its own Centre or Organ of 
Vital Force, all controlled, directed, regulated, and har- 
monized by the Soul, Divinely constituted and assign- 
ed the post of authority — at once the Pilot, Captain and 
Engineer of the mighty, though delicate and fragile, 
Human Machine, over the troubled seas, and through 
the trying tempests of the probationary earthly voy- 
age. 

The Nine Organic Systems are : 

1. The System of Organs for the Digestion and 
Assimilating of Food, thus Preparing Materials for 
Development and Repair. 

2. The System of Organs for Eliminating Disinte- 
grated and Morbid Products, and Casting them out 
of the Body = the Excrementory System. 

3. The System of Organs for Distributing and 
Supplying to each and all parts of the Organism the 
Materials prepared for Development and Repair = 
the Circulatory System. 

4. The System of Organs of Reproduction. 

5. The System of Organs of Locomotion. 

6. The System of Organs of Special Sense. 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 189 

7. The System of Organs for Distributing Vital 
Energy through the Organism = the Nervous System. 

8. The System of Organs of Intellect and Con- 
sciousness. 

These eight Systems are recognized by Physiolo- 
gists universally ; there is a ninth system, not so re- 
cognized, yet of as much higher rank than the eighth 
of the above as that is higher than the seventh, sixth 
and fifth, and these than the other four — we mean the 
System of Subjective Organs, the Organs that repre- 
sent most especially the Subjective portion of the Soul, 
and elevate Man above the Chimpanzee, the Horse, 
etc. — the Organs that make him a Responsible Being, 
and gain for him Immortality — the Organs of Self- 
Consciousness, of Conscience, and of Intuition. 

It must be observed that the first four classes of 
Organs are possessed in common by both kinds of 
organic Nature, though modified in character, func- 
tions and mode of exercise by the addition of succes- 
sive classes; just as the combining of cells modifies or 
changes Cell-life, so the successive development of 
new Organs necessarily modifies or changes the func- 
tions of the earlier ones. This is readily understood 
by any who will but think : The first three are essen- 
tial to the maintenance of Life, the fourth to the 
propagation of forms of any one type — hence, Vege- 
table Life must have them in some degree. But, we 
have seen that Vegetable Life is still life — it has no 
power of locomotion, and cannot seek its food ; and, 
farther, except in three exceptional instances which we 
have mentioned, Plants cannot be said actually to 
possess the first three of the organic functions enume- 



190 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



rated above ; they are directly fed and cared for by the 
Sun, and in the exercise of the fourth, they are de- 
pendent upon the wind, birds, insects, etc. But when, 
in animated life, powers of locomotion are developed, 
of course all is changed — the animal must now seek 
his food and minister to the necessities of his higher 
system. And so, too, when the sixth sort or class of 
Organs are unfolded, the fifth as well as the former 
four are more or less modified and adapted to the new 
order of life. The Organs of Special Sense succeeded 
the Sensibility of the lower animal. Then, the In- 
stinct that accompanied Sensibility was of a very low 
order, became more pronounced as Sensibility gave 
place to Special Sense, and developed into a low order 
of Intellect, which in turn continued to develope until 
in Man it attained a high degree of unfoldment, and, 
meanwhile, the Consciousness, that first attended the 
Organs of Special Sense, and was then of the very 
lowest, grew in strength and functional power, until, 
when the Organs of Intellect were unfolded and 
necessitated the creation of a habitation for it, Con- 
sciousness took its seat with Intellect at the base of 
the newly-developed brain. 

With the development of Intellect and Conscious- 
ness, mere animal Life would attain its highest possi- 
ble unfoldment ; but these could not be fully unfolded 
in a mere animal form. Throughout the successive 
types, no one Organic System attained its complete, 
ultimate extent of unfoldment until a higher System 
of Organs was developed with a higher type of form 
to afford greater scope, and so now, to secure the com- 
plete, ultimate unfoldment of Intellect and Conscious- 



'THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 191 

ness, the Subjective Organs of Self-Consciousness and 
Conscience were developed with the highest possible 
type of material form to afford scope for the highest 
unfoldment possible in mortal guise; to secure the 
complete, ultimate unfoldment of these Subjective 
Faculties the Immortality of Celestial Life was prom- 
ised to Man, opened out to his Subjective Sight, and, 
to encourage and assist Man in unfolding these high 
and holy endowments One was sent in whom the Sub- 
jective Faculties were so gloriously unfolded that He 
was the Living Embodiment of Light, the Personal 
Manifestation of Jehovah, as a Son is of his Father 
— " the Word made flesh," " the Sun of Righteous- 
ness," " the Light of the World," " the Light of Life," 
"the Author and Giver of Life," "the Elder Broth- 
er" of "the children of Light," and "the Everlast- 
ing Light" of His true followers, in this life and in 
the Eternal Life beyond, for he is "the Light of 
Heaven." 

Just as we have seen the successive development of 
each new class of Organs modified those preceding by 
increasing their capacities for unfoldment, so the de- 
velopment of the Subjective Organs has modified all 
the others and increased their capacity for unfoldment, 
and this is seen in some measure even in some intel- 
lectual and scientific giants whose Subjective Faculties 
were themselves not cultivated. But of this we shall 
speak more fully later. In the preceding chapter, in 
making a physiological classification of the ingredi- 
ents and constituents of the human body, we found it 
impossible to secure exactness, because some of the 
compounds and simples naturally belonged to two or 



J 92 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



more classes — so, in classifying the Organs we meet the 
same difficulty only in a greater measure. The Human 
Organism is one comprising nine classes of vital func- 
tions, and the Organs necessarily have a mutual depend- 
ence upon each other, and exhibit a mutual cooperation 
in the general economy ; some of the Organs possess 
more than one class of functions : e. g., the Liver is an 
important Assimilating Organ, as well as the leading 
Excrementory Organ, the Bloodvessels are constantly 
performing the two-fold work of supplying materials 
for repair and eliminating needless or pernicious sub- 
stances and morbid products, etc., etc. Nevertheless, 
we find that, in a state of health, all the processes go 
on in the entire Organism in an orderly and regular 
manner, disintegration and integration, decay and gen- 
eration, depolarization and polarization — the workings 
of the two forces of Light with whose operations we are 
familiar in every phase of Nature — because the grand, 
unique law of God, the law of harmony, enforced in 
the Universe by the Celestial Sun, in the Solar System 
by the Astral Sun, is enforced in the Human Organ- 
ism by its Sun, the Soul. In obedience to that law, 
under the control of the Soul, each Organ performs 
every duty assigned it, whether it be to disintegrate or 
renew, to remove effete matter or generate new, to bear 
away the products of decay or bring the materials for 
repair. In exact proportion as this law of harmony 
is regarded, health is maintained, and the slightest 
disregard of it, as well as more flagrant disobedience, 
entails a proportionate penalty in the shape of disease. 
The office of the physician is simply to endeavor to 
remove the penalty by seeking to restore to the law 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 193 

its due observance, and if he cannot do this the ulti- 
mate penalty must ensue in death. 

The difficulty we have stated in making an exact 
classification of Organs, is even greater when we at- 
tempt to describe and define their functional ope- 
rations in and for the Organism ; and it seems best 
to make a general classification into three classes: 

(1) The Organs essential to Organic Life in General ; 

(2) The Organs peculiar to Animal Life ; and (3) the 
Organs that distinguish Man from all other creatures. 
We shall find it impossible to adhere rigidly even to 
this general classification, because, as we have seen, 
each successively developed Organ or System of Or- 
gans modifies all that have preceded it, changes their 
functional powers and the mode of their exercise, in 
some measure. Thus, the processes of Digestion, 
Elimination, Nutrition and Excretion are essential to 
Organic Life, for all healthy life comprises continuous 
decay and renewal, and these demand the removal of 
the products of decay, the reception of food, its con- 
version by digestion, assimilation and elimination into 
suitable nutritive material, the carrying of this to the 
several points of demand and its application to its 
purpose — these operations demand similar apparatus 
in both still and active life; but we find that in the 
one the Sun is the actor and the plant the quiet re- 
cipient of the action, while in the animal the feeling 
of hunger produces the consciousness of the want of 
food, the will impels, and the power of locomotion 
enables, him to seek it, when found the consciousness 
and will call in the aid of the nervo-muscular forces 
in securing and devouring it. Then, in the exercise 

it N 



194 



BLTTE AND RED LIGHT. 



of the fourth class of Organs essential to life, those of 
reproduction, the reader can trace like differences in 
the two sorts of life. So, too, when we come to con- 
sider the Organs peculiar to animal life, we readily 
discover in each successive type the influence of high- 
er in the operations of the lower functions — e. g., the 
Lion, in quest of food, is conscious only of hunger, 
knows nothing of the processes within his body that 
produce that consciousness, nor does he recognize any 
questions of right or wrong in seizing and devouring 
whatever he can, he knows nothing of theft or mur- 
der, he knows only that he is hungry and the prey 
suits his taste ; but Man has higher Organs to con- 
trol his animal propensities and direct his animal 
functions. 

This general classification suggests a thought the 
expression of which we do not deem out of place here: 
Man is called the Synthesis of creation, and we see 
not only in his material form materials from each of 
the kingdoms of Nature beneath him, but his Organ- 
ism brings before us the inferior Organic systems, with 
a higher, nobler System of Organs to elevate and en- 
noble them ! He is called the Synthesis of the Uni- 
verse, and we find in him an aggregation of Systems 
each with its centre of Vital Force, and a Subjectively 
Individualized Soul to control and direct them, just 
as in the Universe we find an aggregation of Systems 
each with its Objective Sun, and a Mighty Subjective 
Sun to control and direct them. 

Bearing in mind, then, the influence of his higher 
Organs in the exercise of the lower, let us briefly con- 
sider Man under the three heads indicated above : we 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 195 

shall be compelled to note influences of the second or 
third class upon the first, and of the third upon the 
second, but shall endeavor to make clear the peculiar 
character and functions of each class of Organs under 
its special head : 

1. The Organs essential to Life in Gen- 
eral. — In the Human Organism, as in all organized 
forms, Vitality must be equally sustained throughout 
to maintain the integrity of the complex whole; and, 
conversely, the integrity must be maintained to sus- 
tain the Vitality. So soon as Vitality ceases within, 
the body dies, and so, in the case of any part thereof, 
an arm or a leg, for example, whenever Vitality de- 
serts it death ensues, in that part at least, and the 
whole body sympathizes with the dead part — if it be 
a vital part, the whole body dies; and, conversely, 
Vitality cannot be sustained in a dead body, or a dead 
part of a body. Just as Life requires a material form 
wherein to manifest itself, so the form must be kept 
in healthful repair to insure vigorous Life. Now, 
every exercise of Vital Force within a material form 
is a strain upon it and exhausts it in proportion to 
the extent or violence of the strain ; Vital Force is 
constantly in exercise, except in the hours of sleep 
(and even then it does not loose the reins, it only 
slackens them), hence there is a constant exhausting 
of the material form ; as each cell of the Organism 
contributes its share of Vitality to the entire mass, so 
each cell receives its share of Vitality from the com- 
mon centres, and thus each cell throughout the Organ- 
ism undergoes its share of the exhaustion, if this be 
general. Complete exhaustion entails loss of Vitality 



196 



BLUE ANT) RED IJOHT. 



and loss of Vitality is death. Were an entire part of 
the Organism to become completely exhausted at one 
time, the entire part would die — so, necessarily the 
body would die if entirely exhausted. But, the hu- 
man body, though one, is an aggregation of cells, each 
cell an aggregation of particles — and the God of Na- 
ture has, in His infinite Wisdom, so ordered that, 
although the exhaustion is constant, it is complete 
only in particle by particle — and thus particle after 
particle dies, its polarity ceases with its Vitality and 
it falls away from its fellow-particles, to be immedi- 
ately replaced by a new one. In this way, by a con- 
tinuous disintegration of exhausted, and integration 
of new, particles, the Organism is kept in repair and 
Vitality is sustained. The opposite processes must be 
performed in exact equilibrium — a single new, must 
always instantly replace a single dead, particle. Of 
course, the exhaustion will be always proportionate 
to the strain and that in turn will necessarily depend 
upon the measure of the exercise of the Vital Energy 
— hence, the number of particles dying and falling 
away is greater or less at different times, and the sup- 
ply must always be exactly equal to the demand. But, 
observe farther, the new particles must invariably be 
identical with those they replace — an Albuminous 
particle cannot be replaced by a Gelatinous, nor a 
Gelatinous by one of Hsematin, although these are 
nearly allied. 

Now, the materials from which the new particles 
are made must come from without, and Man himself 
must procure and introduce them into his body. The 
demand for solid matter is made known to his con- 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OE VITAL DYNAMICS. 197 

sciousness by the feeling of hunger, and for liquids by 
that of thirst; his intellect, influenced by his taste in 
some measure, selects the article or articles of food, 
his will determines upon their procurement, and the 
necessary Organs aid in procuring what he desires ; 
the sensori-rnotor nerves now induce the reception of 
the food into the mouth, and its mastication and iu- 
salivation ; the food, coming in reach of the pharyn- 
geal muscles, is propelled down the oesophagus, the 
muscular coat of the oesophagus responds bearing it 
into the stomach. The Saliva has already modified 
the food somewhat, and upon entering the Stomach, 
another secretion, the Gastric Juice, farther modifies 
it, and, by the assistance of the high temperature 
maintained in the Stomach, the continual agitation 
produced by the contractions of the parietes of the 
Organ effects a more or less complete reduction of it ; 
some of its more nutritive components are dissolved 
by the Gastric Juice and prepared for immediate ab- 
sorption, while others require the action of the biliary 
and pancreatic secretions ; at last the components of 
the food are ready for reception into the Circulatory 
System: nearly all the nutritive portions are received 
into the Bloodvessels and Lacteals of the Alimentary 
Canal, the residue passes into and along the Intestinal 
Tube, the particles of nutritive matter being farther 
extracted from it in the passage, the indigestible mat- 
ter is at last ejected from the body. Thus far the 
action upon the food is almost purely chemical, and 
is what is known as Digestion ; the products are 
Chyle and Excrement. 

The Chyle is now prepared for the process of Ab- 

17 * 



198 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



sorption, and is absorbed into the Bloodvessels and 
Lacteals. And now commences the important pro- 
cess of Assimilation. The portion absorbed by the 
Bloodvessels undergoes important changes in its pas- 
sage through them and through the Liver, as also 
does that taken up by the Lacteals — both portions 
have entered upon the process of being organized, 
vitalized, and the Chyle is nearly in the condition of 
true Blood, when, passing into the Sanguiferous ves- 
sels, it is sent to the Heart which transmits it to the 
Lungs, and here the Kespiratory function eliminates 
the superfluous Carbonic Acid and introduces Oxygen, 
the objective polar force, which, under the Life-prin- 
ciple already imparted, is to apply the now organized 
nutritive matter to the repair of organs, nerves, mus- 
cles, and tissues of every kind. Thus is the food taken 
into the mouth at last fully converted into " Vital 
Food." Meanwhile, the Lymphatics have gathered 
up the excess of Blood that has been left over from 
the repair of the tissues in their way, and bear it to 
and through the portions of the organism that depend 
upon them for sustenance. 

Then returning from the Lungs to the Heart, the 
" Vital Food " is sent forth by that hollow muscular 
Organ to traverse the Organism, imparting Vital 
nourishment wheresoever it goes. 

Note : to estimate the important influence and ac- 
tion of the circuitous circulatory course of the Chyle 
of the Lacteals, on its way from the Stomach to the 
Heart, we need but to compare its condition at the 
commencement and close of the journey : we find that, 
when first absorbed by the Lacteals, it shows no in- 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 199 

dications of Vitality or Organization, but in passing 
through the Mesenteric Glands the Albumen of the 
Chyle- becomes vitalized into granules : this granular 
base becomes the granules and nuclei of Cells, the 
nucleus of a Cell beingsimply an aggregation of these 
granules. It is well known that no Cell can be formed 
without the granular base; the aggregation of granules 
into a nucleus of course increases the Vitality of a 
Cell. Now, as it has been demonstrated that nutri- 
tive matter must include or become Fibrin before it 
can become part of a Vital Tissue, it is not unreason- 
able to infer that this granular base is Fibrin. But 
of this we shall have occasion to speak presently. Na- 
ture appears sometimes unable to repair structure, and 
it is because of a low condition of vitality in the system 
which stops the formation of the granular base, without 
which the Blood is impoverished and incapable of de- 
veloping Tissue. 

There is scarcely a necessity for speaking specifical- 
ly of the Organs of Reproduction, as our reader can 
readily see, first, that they belong to this general class, 
and, secondly, that they, like the others, are only in a 
limited degree dependent upon or influenced by the 
higher Organs, while they are entirely dependent upon 
each of the three lower Systems. 

2. The Organs peculiar to Animal Life. — 
In entering upon the consideration of our second gen- 
eral division, we recognize the fact at the very thresh- 
old that this System of Systems has a common 
centre of Vitality, the Brain, though we shall see 
that, unlike the preceding, it embraces one System 
which is, to some extent, in some of its functions, in- 



200 



BLUE AND BED EIGHT. 



dependent of that centre; in this division we shall 
find it best to commence with the Brain, and trace to 
and from it the Organic operations that find in it their 
final and initial termini ; the Systems of this general 
division are comprised in the generic term : Nervous 
System. Employing the term Nervous System in this 
generic sense, we find it radiates into six Systems, 
each, as we have intimated, having its local habita- 
tion, or seat, in the Brain ; these seats and Systems 
are: 

1. The Cerebrum, or Frontal Brain — the seat of 
the Psychical Faculties, and, as we shall see hereafter 
in specially considering our third division, in some 
respects of the Subjective Organs of Self-Conscious- 
ness, Conscience and Intuition, though, as we shall 
likewise see, the Subjective Faculties are not to be 
regarded as actually having an assignable habitation 
— like the Subjective Sun of the Universe, which 
manifests itself objectively only in and through the 
Astral Suns, the Subjective Organs of the Soul man- 
ifest themselves objectively in and through the higher 
Objective Organs, and in this view may be said to 
have their seat with them in the Cerebrum. 

2. The Sensory Ganglia — the scat of the Organs 
of Sensibility and Special Sense, of Consciousness and 
Instinct. 

3. The Cerebellum, or Posterior Brain — the seat 
of the Animal Passions and Emotions, and of Muscu- 
lar Coordination. 

4. The Medulla Oblongata — the seat of Or- 
ganic Nerves of Respiration, Circulation (except that 
of the Capillaries) and Deglutition. 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OP VITAL DYNAMICS. 201 

5. The Spinal Cord — the seat of the Organs of 
Locomotion and of Manual Movements. 

6. The Sympathetic Ganglia — the seat of the 
Organs that control the processes of Secretion, Assim- 
ilation, Capillary Circulation, Nutrition and Excre- 
tion. 

The intimate relations subsisting between all these 
Organic systems, the very absolute character of their 
mutual dependence upon each other, is so readily dis- 
covered that the student of physiology is impressed 
with it in the first lessons he learns of the applications 
of Vitality in the Human Organism — indeed, it is 
scarcely possible to view a single Vital act as per- 
formed by one Organ or System. To separate the 
functions of the Nervous System, to study the specific 
functions even of the Organs of Locomotion or of 
Sensibility, one must go to the lower types of an- 
imated Nature, wherein the higher Organs are not 
found — as we have already said, as soon as a higher 
Organ is developed, it begins to influence all those 
beneath it, and in the successive types we observe 
that the higher the Organ the more pronounced is its 
influence upon those below. 

A glance over the six departments of the Nervous 
System, with their respective functions, as given above, 
shows (1) that the Nervous System is the centre and 
source of Vital Energy for the Human Organism; 
and (2) that the Organs of the first general division, 
which we designated as "essential to Organic Life in 
General," and which Physiologists denominate " Or- 
gans of Vegetative Life," are in the animal and in 
Man brought under the control of higher Organs of 



202 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



the Nervous System — indeed, this supervisory au- 
thority over the lower functions constitutes an im- 
portant part of the duties devolving upon the Ner- 
vous Organs. But this glance does not indicate 
another fact that it is indispensable to know and keep 
in mind if we would successfully apply medicines or 
other curative means to the Human Organism in dis- 
ease : i. e. } that the sixth of the branches of the Ner- 
vous System does not have its seat in the Brain, and 
is actually an independent System in many important 
respects — it is absolutely dependent upon the Life- 
principle alone, and only in a remote or slight degree 
upon the distinctively Intellectual faculties. 

The first five branches have their centres in the 
Brain and constitute the Cebebbo-Spinal System, 
the sixth has its centre in the Semi-lunar Ganglion, at 
the back of the Stomach, and is the Ganglionic or Sym- 
pathetic System. Its seat sufficiently indicates the 
character of the latter System — it is the aggregation 
of the Vegetative functions. The Cerebro-Spinal is 
the Active- Vital or Animal-Life System, while the Sym- 
pathetic is the Still or Vegetable- Life System. Not- 
withstanding the lower rank, however, of the latter, 
its value and importance to the Human Organism 
must not be underrated : upon its harmonious and 
regular functional working depends the maintenance 
of the integrity of the material form, and, as we have 
seen, upon the integrity of the form depends the per- 
fect unfoldment of Life ; hence, this system may be 
regarded as the homely foundation of the more or less 
elaborate superstructure — in other words, if the Sym- 
pathetic System, or one of its Nerves, refuses, in any 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 203 

measure, to perform its functions, just in that measure 
the Cerebro-Spinal System will be unable to effect its 
high purposes. The most illiterate and unthinking 
realize, if they do not understand, that a failure in the 
digestive apparatus to accomplish their work impairs 
the mental faculties in exact proportion to the extent 
of that failure; and this simple fact of every man's 
every-day experience or observation affords absolute 
proof of the value and importance to the Human 
economy of the humble Sympathetic System — in fact, 
functional derangements are all traceable to the Ner- 
vous System in some of its branches, and the Sympa- 
thetic certainly bears its full proportion of respon- 
sibility. 

When Light came forth in response to the Will 
of the Almighty, its first act in bringing order 
and beauty out of chaos, Life out of Death, was the 
exercise of its polarizing power, in producing forms 
out of the universal hyle or ether that hitherto was 
" without form and void," and in the whole material 
world the dual forces of polarizing and depolarizing, 
integrating and disintegrating, by their antagonism 
preserve and perpetuate motion, and motion is life. 
These dual forces are the only original forces in Na- 
ture — all other forces, call them what we may, are 
but modifications of these — attraction has its source 
in the polarizing, and repulsion in the depolarizing, 
principle of Light, and the centripetal and centrifugal 
"forces" are but attraction and repulsion. There 
can be no physical life without continuous change in 
material forms, and forms can only change. by the 
operation of these two forces — the old polarity must 



jm- ' i JMm.RWi > JiJjmLi.iiiujttmiuj! i ii <m i m i m t ±iM \ )UUL}nj. i uK^K3i",...-uu^J. > fj-,>£ ' i- .. ' .- ^- j-i . u - ' - • jw 



204 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



make way for the new, the old form for the new; Life 
is a principle which cannot cease or wane — it wears 
out a body and yields it to decay, or it exhausts par- 
ticles and demands their removal and the substitution 
of new ones as the condition of its continuance therein. 
In the outside world, the Sun is the direct actor — in 
the vitalized Animal and Human forms, the Nervous 
System is the actor, and in both there is a hidden, un- 
seen but potent, Life-principle that guides the work 
of the two hands of the actor — in the outside world 
this Life-principle is an emanation from the Celestial 
Sun, in the Animal it is the same but abides within 
and in Man it becomes individualized in the Soul, 
and forms the Subjective faculties thereof. Thus the 
Nervous System is the objective Sun of the Animal 
and of the Human Organism. The Vital Force, im- 
parted to and residing in each Cell, is concentrated in 
the Nervous System, the Ganglia become the reser- 
voirs for the Organism and dispense the Vital Ener- 
gies to the fluids and tissues, enabling each Cell and 
each aggregation of Cells to perform its part in the 
Physical and Psychical Economy. As the Sun in the 
exercise of his office requires conductors upon which 
his beams may travel to their respective destinations, 
so the Ganglia in the exercise of their functions re- 
quire conductors for their beams ; in the Solar System, 
the ether meets the demand and in the Human Organ- 
ism the Nerves are the carriers. The Nerve-centres, 
or Ganglia, may thus be compared to a Vital battery 
and the Nerves to conductors. 

Is the Nerve Force then, as formerly imagined 3 
identical with Electricity? There are so many appar- 



THE CENTRES (eXC.) OE VITAL DYNAMICS. 205 

ent identities in the characteristics of the two that we 
cannot either wonder at the mistake, or censure those 
who fell into it — but there are insuperable difficulties in 
connecting them : e. g. y the immense difference in their 
velocity : the electric flash travels at the tremendous 
rate of 280,000 miles per second, Nerve Force at the 
rate of only from 32 to 40 yards per second — the 
former travels then 16,000,000 times as fast as the 
latter ; again, a normal temperature of 98° is essential 
for healthy Nerve action, while electricity is retarded 
by the slightest access of heat, which expands the 
conducting wire and impairs its polarity. 

Before attempting to define the nature of Nerve 
Force, however, it may be best to note its composition 
and construction : We have already declared the fact 
that the Life-principle manifests itself primarily in a 
simple Cell, and that the Human Organism is but an 
Aggregation of* Cells. It is noteworthy, that, various 
as are the different tissues, fluids, etc. of the Human 
Organisim they are all composed by the Aggregation 
of Cells and the Cells themselves are all built up on 
the same plan ; we find that in the development of a 
Cell, a cell-wall, more or less spherical, is formed, 
which contains and floats in the peculiar granular 
base of the Vitalized Chyle; the granules within, 
when there is sufficient Vitality present, combine into 
a nucleus, which increases as well as results from the 
Vitality already contained in the granules ; as soon as 
a cell is thus developed it evinces its Vitality by that 
" perpetual motion n of which we have spoken. 

But, how then is it that cells so alike in their con- 
struction, and whose base 3 as we have before shown, 
18 



206 



HhUK AND RED LKiHT, 



is the Vital Fibrin, act so differently, discharge so 
many radically different, even antagonistic, functions 
when aggregated into secretions, blood, flesh, nerves, 
ganglia, bones, tendons, muscles, etc? There is but 
one way to understand the diversity of action in sim- 
ilarly constructed Cells — it is to realize the presence 
of the Life-principle with a controlling influence and 
authority. It is this principle that assigns to each 
Cell its place and functions in the complex Organism. 

The Nervous System is composed of these Vital 
Cells, combined into two tissues essentially different in 
structure and functions : in appearance one is white, 
the other gray — the white constitutes the Nerves, the 
gray the Ganglia. The Ganglion consists of nucleated 
Cells and granular matter imbedded in protoplasma 
and a fatty substance containing phosphorus, called 
phosphatic fat (the amount of phosphorus in the 
Nervous System is least in infancy and old age and 
greatest at the prime of life). The Nerves are tubular, 
consisting of a sheath containing protoplasma and 
phosphatic fat, and passing through the centre of this 
pulpy compound is a slender, delicate fibre called the 
Axis Cylinder of Rosenthal, which is the essential part 
of the Nerve ; it is in this tension is excited in Nerve 
action. This is the conductor, and the pulpy com- 
pound through which it passes is the non-conducting 
insulator. A number of these Nerves, as they leave 
and enter the Ganglia, are united in a common sheath 
called Neurolemma. 

But we must not omit to notice one very striking 
feature in the Nervous System : I. e. the remarkable 
vascularity of the Ganglia — they comprise Cells, 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 207 

granules and bloodvessels ; the copious supply of blood 
has two evident purposes : to supply the necessary 
conditions of Nerve action, and to maintain its nutri- 
tion. In the Nervous System, as in all parts of the 
Organism, a sufficient supply of nutritive material to 
keep it in repair and in healthful vigor is of the ut- 
most importance; as it is the chief centre of Vital 
Force, it is most subject to the wear and waste of 
Vital strain, and requires the most unremitting sup- 
ply of Vital Food. The Excretions bear strong evi- 
dence of the great rapidity of the decay and repair of 
the Nervous tissues, in the presence therein of the pro- 
ducts of the decay, while the cortical substance of the 
Brain shows Nervous tissue in all stages of prepara- 
tion for replacing the decay ; and these evidences are 
always proportioned to the functional activity of the 
System. 

The Nerves are similar in structure, but very differ- 
ent in functional action : the Sensory Nerves carry im- 
pressions from without to the Ganglia, and Motor 
Nerves carry from the Ganglia to the various muscles 
and organs of the body — the former take their name 
from the fact that they receive sensations, and the lat- 
ter theirs from the fact that they convey those sensa- 
tions to the muscles and organs and command motion 
or action therein or thereby. Then there is another 
class of Nerves that connect the Ganglia, and are 
therefore called Commissural or Connecting Nerves; 
these not only connect the Ganglia, but also connect 
the Spinal Cord and Brain — thus establishing the 
unity of the Nervous System. The grand symmetry 
of the System may be realized when we see that thus 



208 



BLVE A2NJJ KED L.1U-HT. 



an impression or sensation received from without the 
body finds a Nerve tension to the base of the Brain, 
where, in the Sensory Ganglia is the seat of Special 
Sense and Consciousness ; thence another Nerve ten- 
sion carries it to the Cerebellum to excite man's Animal 
Passions or Emotions, or to the Cerebrum to excite his 
Intellectual powers ; thence, again a Nerve tension 
bears it to the Spinal Cord to produce visible motion 
or action. But there are motions sometimes in which 
neither the Animal propensities nor the Intellectual 
faculties seem to be consulted ; e. g., when the foot of a 
sleeping man is pricked or tickled, he draws it away, 
spontaneously, as it were, without awaking. On the 
other hand, a sound reaches the tympanum of a man's 
ear, a Nerve bears it to the Auditory Ganglion, and 
he becomes conscious of the sound ; another Nerve 
bears it to the Cerebellum or Cerebrum, which com- 
municates it to the Spinal Cord, and the Head turns, 
so that the cause of the sound can be made visible 
to the Optic Nerve ; this receives the impression and 
conveys it to the Optic Ganglion, which sends its re- 
port to the Cerebrum, the man realizes that the sound 
proceeds from a falling building or a swiftly approach- 
ing Locomotive Engine, and that he is in peril ; the 
Cerebrum having decided upon a means of escape, 
atiother Nerve conducts the command to the Sjnnal 
Cord, and from it another to the Muscles, whereupon 
the body is moved out of danger. The intimate rela- 
tions of the Ganglia and their Systems of Nerves is 
such that all these transmissions are almost instanta- 
neous. Then, again, the intimate relations, and the 
acknowledged superiority of the higher over the lower 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 20^ 

Organs, may be illustrated thus : a raau is made to 
realize, by the sense of sight, hearing or touch, that 
another man is about to inflict some bodily injury 
upon him ; the Cerebellum suggests retaliatory action, 
but the Cerebrum counsels him to be content with 
merely protecting himself — it may be merely human 
intellect that gives this counsel on the ground of its 
being the safest or easiest course, or on some other 
purely selfish ground, or it may be the higher Sub- 
jective Faculty, " Conscience,'" that seeks to restrain 
his Animal Passions, on the higher ground of moral 
right. The reader needs not that we should remind 
him that the higher faculties of the human intellect may 
be so blunted by non-exercise or by continued disre- 
gard of their teachings, that the Animal Passions in 
time become the master of the man, converting him 
into a brute — of course, the " Conscience " may be so 
frequently disobeyed, or so entirely neglected, that its 
" still, small voice " will be silent, and give no warn- 
ing. On the other hand, Conscience may be so culti- 
vated and thereby developed in a man as to make his 
Animal Passions powerless for evil — even his thoughts, 
as well as his words and actions may be brought under 
the absolute dominion of Conscience. 

The Cerebro-Spinal Nervous System is thus seen to 
be always, except in a limited class of spontaneous 
actions, under the control of the Brutalized, Human- 
ized or Celestialized Will, but the Sympathetic Ner- 
vous System is, as a rule, independent of the higher 
Organs, and, in view of its functions, as before stated, 
it is well for the Organism that it is so — for, could the 
mind directly influence the important operations of 
18* 



210 



BLUE A^ r l) RED LIGHT. 



structural repair and renovation, we should see a far 
larger number of instances of morbid growths and 
impaired Vitality resulting from idiosyncrasies of the 
Brain. The Sympathetic System is influenced by the 
Animal Passions or Psychical Faculties only indirectly 
through the influences they produce upon the body — 
the Sympathetic Nerves are indeed very quick to re- 
spond to the condition of the body : for instance, if 
the body be injured by even an external cause, loss 
of appetite soon announces a derangement of the 
Nutritive functions, resulting in a decreased demand 
for food, while the Liver, Kidneys or Skin is very 
apt to indicate a correspondent disturbance in the 
Excretory functions ; a bruise on the flesh is some- 
times followed by the growth of a Cancer, which is 
of course the direct effect of defective Nutrition caused 
by an innervation of the Sympathetic System (all mor- 
bid growths are consequences of derangements of the 
Nervous System interfering with Nutrition.) 

A familiar illustration suggests itself, in the dis- 
comfort experienced in the Stomach, and consequent 
faintness, resulting from the crushing of a finger or 
toe, or any part dependent upon capillary circulation; 
now, this is the Sympathetic System responding to an 
external injury — but note how it acts when it recovers 
from the first shock : it sets the proper Organs at once 
at work without consulting the Cerebrum or Cere- 
bellum — of course, the Senspry Department has ap- 
prised its superiors, but they do not directly interfere; 
their only share in the cure is to keep the general tone 
of the body in a favorable condition, or restore it if it 
has become deranged, so as to prevent illness and 



THE (JE.NT.RES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 211 

physical prostration — or, at most, the Cerebrum sug- 
gests such assistance from without as may be accept- 
able to Nature, it may be the calling in of a Surgeon 
or Physician ;. but the charge of the actual repairs de- 
volves on the Sympathetic System, under whose direc- 
tion the Nutritive Organs and the Capillary Blood- 
carriers proceed to cure the hurt to the extent that it 
admits of cure, or if it be incurable they withhold the 
material for replacing the portion that is doomed, and 
it decays. When the assistance of a Surgeon or Phy- 
sician will accelerate the cure or the removal of the 
wounded part, Nature accepts the assistance, but Na- 
ture will permit no undue interference — or at least 
will not cooperate with a meddler. Mortification, or 
gangrene, results. from the inability of the Sympathetic 
System to carry on the Nutritive processes, either from 
its own impairment, or the condition of the part af- 
fected. 

We pause here to remark : the Capillaries are operated 
by two sets of Nerves, called Vasa-motor, one set each 
from the Spinal and Sympathetic Systems; they form a 
minutely-anastomosing network; their office is to carry 
the Vital Fluid to the portions of the Organism not 
reached by the arteries ; they receive the blood from 
the arteries and return it to the radicles of the veins. 
All the changes which take place between the blood 
and the surrounding parts, whether ministering to the 
operations of Nutrition, Secretion or Respiration, occur 
during its transmission through the Capillaries, and 
the larger trunks merely bring to them a constant 
supply of fresh blood, the supply being regulated by 
the demand created by the actions to which it is sub- 



212 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



servient, and to remove the fluid which has circulated 
through them. Still, it must not be supposed that 
Nutrition is only carried on by the Capillary Blood- 
vessels. Their importance to the essentially Vital 
tissues is seen in the fact that they traverse and re- 
traverse them constantly ; in the Nervous System 
e. g.y they go in and out so frequently that they may 
be called part of the System. Their important service 
in Nutrition accounts for their being placed specially 
under the control of the Sympathetic department of 
the Nervous System. 

What is Nerve Force, and how does it operate? 
We know that it is the Vital Motor, the Organizer, 
and the manager of the animated Organism; its pres- 
ence is what converts Still into Active Life, and its 
progressive development constitutes the types of ad- 
vancement from the inferior Animals upwards to 
Man, whose " crowning glory and honor " lie in the 
zenith of this System, the Cerebrum, with its grand 
Objective Psychical Functions and its grander Subjec- 
tive Faculties. We know that it embraces a number 
of Vital Centres, each with its afferent and efferent 
Conductors of its Vital Principle — Conductors with 
an inward, and conductors with an outward, tension. 
We know, moreover, that the Nerve Force, excited 
by external or internal causes of a physical nature, in 
turn excites mental and physical motions and action, 
while, conversely, the mind, in certain conditions of 
activity, effects changes in the material fabric. 

But all this knowledge does not satisfy our desire 
to learn what is the nature or character of the Force. 
We have seen that, while it resembles, it is not, Elec- 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 21 8 

trieity; besides the insuperable obstacles to i identify- 
ing the two already given, the following occur to our 
mind : (1) A Nerve will conduct Electricity, but not 
nearly so well as copper wire, while the latter will not 
conduct Nerve Force under any circumstances; this 
has been clearly demonstrated by cutting out a piece 
of Nerve and inserting a corresponding piece of cop- 
per wire. (2) A ligature around a Nerve-trunk en- 
tirely suspends its power of conducting Nerve Force, 
while it does not in the least impair its conducting of 
Electricity. And (3) Nerve Force passes directly 
along the Nerve along which it is directed by the 
Ganglion, but Electricity cannot be confined to a 
single Nerve — it is apt to desert the Nerve for the 
first tissue that invites it. 

It will be recollected that we demonstrated, in 
Chapter III., the identity and diversity of Electricity 
and Magnetism, showing that they were identical in 
their source and in essence, but diverse in their condi- 
tions of exercise (see pages 98, 99, 109, 118-122). 
And now we will add : The Nerve Force is correlated 
to Electricity and Magnetism, being more nearly allied 
to the latter — it is identical with them in its origin 
and similar to the latter in its exercise. The ancients 
knew this : Hermes and Pythagoras taught it ; Syne- 
sius found it among the souvenirs of the School of 
Alexandria and sang it in his hymns — hear this : 
" One single source, one single root of Light flashes 
and spreads out in two branches of Splendor ; one 
breath circles around the earth and vivifies under in- 
numerable forms all parts of animated Nature." The 
discovery of "Animal Magnetism " has been wrongly 



214 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



ascribed to Mesmer, as we see; Mesmer simply redis- 
covered what had been known and forgotten in this 
branch, as Newton, Franklin and others did in other 
branches, of the Science of Light. Mesmer saw in 
elementary matter a dual force which in motion pro- 
duced volatility, in repose fixity. It is the same force 
that dilates matter into vapor, congeals water into ice 
— a force that is forever and everywhere dissolving 
and coagulating, repelling asunder and attracting 
together, disintegrating and integrating, depolarizing 
and polarizing; it is eternally destroying and creat- 
ing, and never rests. Nerve Force is the dual prin- 
ciples of Light concentrated within the Animal and 
Human Organisms — in the latter ennobled by hav- 
ing intimately combined with it the Celestial Light 
of Life. 

As we have said more than once, there is in all Na- 
ture, of every kind and form, a hidden but potent 
Life-principle — this principle is a direct emanation 
from the Celestial Sun — it controls and directs all 
motion, and its authority is recognized by the objective 
forces in the outer world, and in the inner world of 
Animated Organisms, and Man excels all other cre- 
ated beings simply because this Life-principle is indi- 
vidualized in his Soul, which thus becomes a Personal 
Manifestation of Celestial Light as that glorious Light 
is the marvelous Manifestation of Jehovah. It is 
this Life-principle that by sustaining equilibrium be- 
tween the antagonistic destroying and creating forces, 
enforcing the Divine law of Harmony, maintains life, 
and just so soon as it withdraws its supervision, equi- 
librium is destroyed and Death succeeds. 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 215 

To state our definition of Nerve-Force in the most 
concise terms, we would say : 

Nerve-Force is the Dual Objective Forces 
of Light harmonized by the Subjective Life- 
principle, Animalized in the Animal, Person- 
ified or Individualized in Man ! 

It must be borne in mind that the expressions 
Nerve Force, Vital Force, Vitality and Vital Dynam- 
ics are almost synonymous, all designating one Force, 
the only difference being that the first is applied spe- 
cially to those developments of the Life-principle in 
which the Vital Functions are brought under the con- 
trol of a Nervous System, while the other three may 
be applied equally to any kind of Life-unfoldment — 
Nerve Force comprehending simply a more complete 
and intensified Organization of Organic Life. 

3. The Organs that Distinguish Man from 
all other Creatures. — We come now to consider 
the "crowning" "glory and honor" of Man, tin at- 
tributes that transform the Animal into Man, that 
make "Man a Living Soul" capable of unfoldment 
into the very image and likeness of the glorious Jeho- 
vah. The Subjective Sun works in exercising a super- 
visory control over the Objective Forces of Light in 
every department of Mature in our own and all other 
worlds of the Universe — it constitutes the Life-prin- 
ciple, the Vital Intelligence, in every created thing 
from a planet to the humblest, most insignificant 
worm, plant or organizing cell ; it is incomprehen- 
sibly present in the simple Cell and in the highest 
type of form composed of Cells aggregated ; it is the 
secret, hidden, but ever potent principle that controls 



216 



BLUE AND BED I.TGHT. 



and directs the evolution of forms, which are all, from 
the simplest to the most complex, developed by it for 
its own manifestation ; the Subjective Life-principle 
can only manifest itself Objectively in an Objective 
form, and the sole purpose of the creation of material 
forms is to manifest this Life-principle. The One 
Incomprehensible, Ineffable, Self-Existent Life, Jeho- 
vah, was as Infinite, All-Wise, Illimitable, Almighty 
in the Dark Abyss of Chaos as in the created, devel- 
oped, unfolded Universe — but He willed to manifest 
His Infinitude, Omniscience, Omnipresence and Om- 
nipotence, and the first expression of that Will was 
by His Word in the command "Let there be Light," 
and " Light was " forthwith and henceforth the sole 
manifestation of the Self- Existent Life, and the sole 
Life-principle in Heaven and in all the worlds of the 
Universe. It is that unique and universal Life-prin- 
ciple that Objectively manifests itself in the Astral 
Suns, and not only endows them with their Objective 
Forces, but controls and guides and directs them in 
the exercise of those Forces. 

Now, as we have said, and iterated, the original 
and sole purpose of Jehovah when He first said "Let 
there be Light," was the Personal manifesting of 
Himself in " Man, the Living Soul," and in Christ 
this purpose was perfectly realized. We have shown 
how, step by step, from the simple Cell to the perfect, 
Human Organism, this grand purpose of the Creator 
was evolved in Organic forms— how Still Life rose 
higher and higher until its highest type evinced the 
lower characteristics of Active Life — how Active Life 
unfolded from the merely pulsating Protozoa, one 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 217 

step at a time, until, in the highest types of Animal, 
Objective Faculties of the highest order manifested 
their presence — how, when the very highest type of 
material form was developed in the Human Organ- 
ism, the germs of a higher Life than could be fully 
unfolded in a material body appeared in Subjective 
Faculties that demand an Immortal Life to attain 
their completest unfold men t. We have shown that 
the Life-principle was and is one and identical in 
essence, though diverse in the character and degrees 
of its unfoldment. In the forms of Still Life, it ope- 
lates from without, and in the lowest forms of Active 
Life it does not yet find a centre within the form ; 
but at length it developes Organic centres within ma- 
terial bodies, and in higher evolutions it concentrates 
the Organic functions into a Nervous System which 
it makes a mighty reservoir and source of Vital En- 
ergy. At last, in Man it individualizes itself into 
Faculties, becoming part of his Organism. 

This, then, is Man's characteristic "crowning" 
"glory and honor": The Subjective Life-principle is 
part of his Soul, not merely abiding therein and acting 
thence, hut an integral part of it. However, this is not 
only a "crowning" "glory and honor" — it involves 
a vast, terrible responsibility. In the inferior types, 
wherein the Life-principle is not part of the Organ- 
ism, it acts but is not acted upon — there is no power 
of cultivating it in them, and hence they have no 
responsibility. But in Man, the Subjective Faculties, 
which are the Life-principle individualized, must be 
cultivated or they will be over-ridden and defied by 
the subordinate Objective Faculties — and Man is di- 
19 



218 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



rectly accountable for the cultivation and unfold men t 
of these Faculties. When the Subjective Faculties 
are cultivated, they unfold and grow in influence and 
power until they control and direct all the Objective 
Faculties to the attainment of higher unfoldment, and 
the entire Man is ennobled. 

But let us note the peculiarities of these Subjective 
Faculties, wherein they differ from the Objective 
Faculties even of the highest Organs : 

1. They cannot be assigned a specific seat or hab- 
itation in the Organism ; being the Personal repre- 
sentative of the Celestial Sun, the Individualization 
of the Subjective Life-principle, they necessarily per- 
vade or permeate the Organism throughout — they are 
Omnipresent in the Human System, just as Celestial 
Light is in the Universal System ; as Celestial Light 
manifests itself Objectively only in and by the Astral 
Suns, so the Celestial Faculties of the Soul manifest 
themselves Objectively only in and by the Objective 
Organs. Thus, when the Organ of Anger prompts 
Man to a deed of violence, Self-Consciousness compels 
him to realize the influence of such a deed within and 
upon himself, Conscience to estimate the moral cha- 
racter of the deed, Intuition, Imagination and Pre- 
science to see its ultimate penalty — if these triumph 
and the deed is unperformed, we only see the triumph 
of the Subjective Faculties as manifested in the opera- 
tions of the Objective Organs. 

2. They are peculiar to Man. But of this we have 
spoken fully enough, except that it may not be amiss 
to allude to the foregoing illustration as applicable as 
an illustration here: If the Organ of Anger in a Dog 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 219 

prompts him to a deed of violence, he may be re- 
strained by the sense of fear of immediate conse- 
quences; his instinct or low order of Intellect may 
tell him that the Dog or other object of his anger 
is too strong for him, and this may restrain him — 
but there is no one of the higher Moral Faculties 
to suggest nobler motives than physical fear or 
cowardice. 

3. Duly cultivated, they open Man's Subjective 
Eye to see " the hidden things of the Spirit of God," 
which are "foolishness to the carnal-minded ;" he is no 
longer " blind," but can see and know not only the true 
qualities of earthly things, but the mysteries of Heav- 
enly things; no longer a " child of darkness" incapa- 
ble of seeing anything beyond this fleeting, unsatis- 
fying world of effects, he is "born again," a "new 
creature," with his "eyes opened" not only to "see 
the kingdom of God," but to understand "the breadth, 
and length, and depth, and height," and the ineffable 
glory of the " love of God," and to have a foretaste 
of the " unsearchable things that God hath prepared 
for them that love him." The highest earthly genius, 
the most comprehensive intellect, the most faithful 
investigation, cannot find out God or the things of the 
Causal World — the ablest, most painstaking philoso- 
pher, even the pvofoundest theologian, knows naught 
of true Celestfal Light except he be enlightened by 
that Light in "the inner man" — and this illumina- 
tion can only be secured by cultivating the Subjective 
Faculties of the Soul. 

But 4. The grandest peculiarity of these Subjective 
Organs is the power they possess of morally and 



220 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



spiritually regenerating Man: were he the vilest 
wretch in the world, full of wickedness, possessed of 
a legion of Devils, these mighty Faculties can so 
utterly and absolutely transform him that he may 
truly be said to be "born again." A Man cannot be 
illuminated by the cultivation of his Celestial Facul- 
ties and fail to show the fact in his life ; a " child of 
Light" must be a "Light of the world." As we 
have before shown, it is by cultivating and unfolding 
these Faculties Man assumes or acquires the image 
and likeness of God ; he becomes, while still a resi- 
dent of this "world of darkness," a citizen of Heav- 
en, the " realm of Light." He has his " conversation 
in Heaven," " lays up his treasures in Heaven," and 
to him death is but a change of condition, a release 
from imprisonment in his material body, an escape 
from physical suffering and temporal sorrows, a glor- 
ious translation to " a land that is fairer than day," 
where "all tears are wiped from his eyes," where 
" there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor 
crying, neither shall there be any more pain," where 
"there is no need of the Sun, neither of the Moon to 
shine in it, for the Glory of God doth lighten it " — 
Jehovah is the "Everlasting Light" of that Celestial 
World. The Man whose " lamp is trimmed and 
burning," that is, whose Subjective Faculties are fully 
unfolded, when he passes through what is, to the dark- 
souled, the " dark valley of the shadow of death," will 
find it illuminated for him, and upon entering Heaven 
will not be a stranger there, but " forever at Home " 
amidst its glories and joys unutterable and that "never 
fade awav." 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 221 

The Subjective Organs, even when they are not 
cultivated, increase the capacity of the Objective 
Organs for a high unfoldruent: hence, we see intel- 
lectual giants whose moral character is bad — e. g. y 
Francis Bacon; and many who pervert their Objec- 
tive " talents " to the worst ends — e. g., those who, 
like Voltaire, propagate infidel and ungodly notions. 
Hence, too, we find innumerable instances of men in 
whom the moral qualities are simply neglected, dor- 
mant, who yet attain great eminence as worldly sci- 
entists, and philosophers. 

The Bible contains many Kabbalistic descriptive 
pictures contrasting the course of the Righteous, 
those whose natures are Celestialized by the cultiva- 
tion of their Subjective Faculties, with that of the 
wicked. Solomon tells us: a The path of the Right- 
eous as the glorious Light shineth more and more 
unto the Perfect Day [i. e., that of Heaven]. The 
way of the Wicked is darkness; they know not at 
what they stumble." "The Light of the Righteous 
fills them with joy; but the candle of the Wicked 
shall be put out" p. e., they shall be left in utter 
darkness]. There are many other passages in the 
Old Testament, but the finest picture of the contrast 
between the Celestialized and lost Soul is drawn by 
our Saviour Himself in the Parable of Lazarus, the 
rich poor man, and Dives, the poor rich man — we can 
read the character of each iu this world in his con- 
dition in the Eternal hereafter; the gulf that inter- 
vened vvas symbolic of the vast difference between a 
Carnal and a Godlike Soul. Then, what words could 
more strongly declare the importance of Soul-culture 

19 * 



222 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



than the words of Jesus : " What is a man profited, if 
he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own Soul ? 
or what shall a man give in exchange for his Soul ?" 

The one serious defect of what we call "education" 
in modern times, consists in the persistent effort to 
cultivate the Objective Faculties of the Mind, to the 
neglect, and too often at the expense, of the Subjec- 
tive. 

Our enlightened Republic is dotted all over with 
High-Schools, Seminaries, Academies and Colleges 
(to say nothing of the Public Schools almost innume- 
rable), with thousands of thousands of tutors, profes- 
sors, etc, all alike devoted to the cultivation of the 
Objective Mental Faculties of the young men and 
maidens of the land ; Science, Oratory, Logic, Belles- 
Lettres, Music, and every conceivable branch of study 
calculated to develope the Objective Mind (to " im- 
prove the mind " is the popular phrase), are taught, 
and even the Animal Passions and Emotions are not 
neglected — nay, we have schools and gymnasia for the 
development of physical qualities. But not a School, 
however humble and insignificant in size, devoted to 
the unfoldment of the Subjective Faculties of the Im- 
mortal Soul, is there in all the United States. True, 
there are so-called TJieological Seminaries sprinkled 
plentifully over East, West, North and South, but 
these, too, have more concern with the making of 
educated " clergymen " than with the true illumina- 
tion of the people by developing their pupils into 
" lights of the world " — what time the professors can 
spare for distinctively religious instruction must be 
largely devoted to denominational and polemical 



THE CENTRES (ETC.) OF VITAL DYNAMICS. 223 

specialties; the "educated clergyman" must above 
all things be able to defend and maintain the dogmas 
of the denomination that hires him; and in the 
churches the Objective Faculties are too much ex- 
ercised in hairsplitting questions of form and doc- 
trine, and even in inventing and seeking to establish 
doctrines that are in direct antagonism to the teach- 
ings alike of Nature and the Bible, when if men would 
but realize their own natural blindness and seek en- 
lightenment from " the Father of Light/' even the 
mysteries of Nature and Revelation would become 
plain. 

We have no quarrel with any of these "educa- 
tional " enterprises — the founders and promoters, and 
the instructors and pupils, all or nearly all unques- 
tionably mean well, and they are really doing a good 
work : the cultivation of the Objective Faculties, the 
proper training of the Animal Passions and the de- 
veloping of the physical form, are all proper, and 
those devoting money and time to these purposes are 
eminently worthy of esteem for so doing. But why 
are the highest, noblest, most elevating and enno- 
bling Faculties of the Immortal Soul so universally 
neglected? 

Were one tithe of the care and attention given to 
the due development of the Mind Objectively, be-, 
stowed upon its Subjective unfoldment, our sons and 
daughters would attain a plane of Moral and Mental 
excellence as far above the present popular standard 
as the popular standard of Mental culture in this 
country is above that of Africa. 

Were the highest attributes of our citizens generally 



!24 



BLUE AKD KED LIGHT. 



cultivated and unfolded, would we be so often pained 
and shocked by dishonesty and depravity and turpi- 
tude in high places ? The various projects for " Re- 
form " can at most be partial and temporary in good 
results, because they are all superficial, and are about 
as likely to succeed permanently as would be an at- 
tempt to purify a stream while leaving filth in the 
fountain whence it issues. True Reform, public and 
private, in the body politic and the body individual, 
must commence with the raising of the standard of 
moral right, and this can only be effected by develop- 
ing the Moral Faculties of the Soul ! 

When the Light of Truth, Justice and Moral Purity 
is thus made to shine in the Souls of the citizens of 
our favored Republic, we shall realize a true Reform 
that will pervade our domestic circles, our churches, 
our business marts, our political assemblages and elec- 
tions, our municipal, state and national offices, and a 
millennium of Heavenly Harmony will bless us as a 
Nation, transforming tfye Nation itself into a "Light 
of the World." 

" Happy is that People whose God is Jehovah ! " 



CHAPTER VII. 

HOW TO ASSIST NATURE IN REMOVING DISEASE 
FROM THE HUMAN ORGANISM. 

Harmony is the unique law of Jehovah : In 
Heaven there is perfect, absolute Harmony; its uni- 
form observance banishes sorrow and sighing, pain 
and suffering, disease and sickness, death and decay, 
and establishes joy and happiness, health and Eternal 
Life, in that Celestial World. 

The Celestial Sun is glorious in white effulgence, 
because Harmony is the law of its glory. 

In the Universal System, Harmony keeps the Solar 
Systems in their allotted positions, and maintains their 
requisite motions, in space. 

In each Solar System, Harmony keeps the Sun, 
Moon, Stars and Peopled Worlds in their allotted 
positions, and maintains their requisite motions, 
within the periphery of the portion of space assigned 
them. 

In the Peopled Worlds do we first find departures 
from Harmony, and commensurate with the extent of 
departure we find sorrow and sighing, pain and suffer- 
ing, disease, death and decay. 

Our world, the Earth, is called the World of Dark- 
ness because Man's disobedience interrupted the com- 
plete enforcement of the law of Harmony. But Man's 
fall from Light to darkness has not only brought the 

P 225 



226 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



darkness of disharmony upon the world of his pro- 
bationary abode, it also entails spiritual blindness and 
darkness upon his posterity. Spiritual Darkness in 
the world is the withdrawal of the visible presence of 
the Celestial Sun, and in Man it is the blinding of 
his Subjective Eye, the withdrawal of his Subjective 
Vision, the blunting of his Subjective Faculties. 

In the world the true Light still Shines, though 
" the darkness comprehends it not," and in Man the 
Subjective Faculties still remain, though his blindness 
does not realize their presence and importance. In 
the world the condition of Spiritual darkness is at- 
tended with physical wear and waste, death and decay 
— the Objective Sun is permitted, by the exercise of 
his decomposing, depolarizing force, to dissolve or 
disintegrate forms; but the Celestial Light, as the 
hidden but potent Life-principle, is ever present to 
enforce the law of Compensation, a modification of 
the law of Harmony, by directing the same Sun in 
also exercising his composing, polarizing force, to 
recreate, reintegrate forms, or to replace old forms 
with new. In Man the condition of Spiritual blind- 
ness is likewise attended with physical wear and 
waste, death and decay, but the Celestial Light in- 
dividualized in the Subjective Faculties Of his Soul, 
is ever present enforcing the same law upon the Ob- 
jective Forces of the Nervous System in the opera- 
tions of disintegrating and integrating. 

Perfect Harmony in Heaven, as we have seen, 
banishes death and decay — the Life of Heaven re- 
quires no change of forms, for "flesh and blood cannot 
inherit the kingdom of Heaven" and there is no 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 227 

material form there to demand perpetual decay and 
perpetual renewal ; " bodies terrestrial " are " cor- 
ruptible," and must be continually renewed, but 
" bodies. Celestial " are " incorruptible " and never 
grow old. Therefore, the very nature of our mortal 
bodies is such that the law of Harmony must needs 
be modified into the law of Compensation, or Equi- 
libration. In other words, absolute Harmony would 
perpetuate forms and prevent alike the disintegration 
of old particles to make way for new, and the crea- 
tion and integration of new particles in place of old ; 
but change, decay and renewal are essential to the 
development of material bodies to fit them for the un- 
foldment of the Life-principle, and hence the law of 
Harmony is adapted to our material world by being 
enforced as a law of Compensation or Equilibration. 
Absolute Harmony is adapted to a perfect Life like 
that of Heaven, not to a developing, unfolding Life 
like the probationary life of Man on Earth. 

Now, he who has read with any degree of care and 
thought, the two preceding chapters, must understand 
that the body, or material form, of Man is merely the 
casket for a far more important something called the 
Soul, which is Man ! the body, though the highest 
material form evolved in creation, and a grand wonder- 
ful piece of Divine mechanism, with a more wonder- 
ful complex system of motive, vital machinery within, 
is yet only mortal, destined, after at most a few years 
of vitalized existence, to dissolve into its many and 
different ingredients, while the Soul is immortal and 
must live forever and forever. Hence, the Soul should 
demand the first and most unremitting care to fit it 



228 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



for the immeasurable Eternity during which it must 
live after the frail body has passed away. 

Having a realizing sense of the incalculable value 
of the Soul and the inestimable importance of pro- 
moting its best interests in time and Eternity, we 
have dwelt much upon the necessity and imperative 
duty of cultivating and unfolding its higher moral 
principles — indeed, our chief interest in cherishing 
and promoting bodily health and vigor arises from 
the knowledge of the fact that a healthful, vigorous 
body is conducive to healthy, earnest Soul-culture — 
a slight, delicate frame may indeed, and often does, 
encase a noble Celestialized, Godlike Soul-life, and a 
strong, vigorous form may, and too often does, con- 
tain a stunted, ill-cultured, nay a brutalized or even 
devilish, Soul; but a sick, diseased, pain-racked body 
is certainly not conducive to Soul-culture, except in 
so far as it reminds a Man of its mortality and calls 
upon him to prepare for Eternity. 

While, on the one hand, a healthy physical con- 
dition is favorable to intellectual, mental and moral 
development, on the other hand, as is well knowm, 
intellectual, mental and moral health is equally favor- 
able to bodily well-being. The Soul is, as we have 
seen, the Harmonizing centre, the Sun, of the Human 
Organism, and if it be out of tune there can be no 
melody in the body; peace and contentment of Mind 
are recognized universally as essential to health, and 
what is called a the imagination' 7 exercises an unde- 
niable influence not only directly upon the body but 
even to some extent augments or diminishes the ac- 
tion of remedial means upon the body in disease. To 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 229 

acknowledge the influence of Mind upon the material 
form ; is but to recognize the physiological fact that 
the Nervous System is the centre of Vitality, the 
reservoir and disseminator of Vital Energy, for the 
Organized System. But we claim much more, as 
our reader must know : we claim that a Soul attuned 
to Divine Harmony must so shape the manifestations 
of Life in action that even the most remote, the most 
menial, so to speak, parts will respond to its enno- 
bling impulses, the whole character of the Organic 
Faculties and Functions, of the material members, 
and of every part of the Organism will be elevated, 
so that God's Will will become our will, and we shall 
honestly pray : " Thy Will be done." Then, in very 
truth, the Organism will be in a condition of health, 
and only external causes can derange this condition ; 
even when deranged thus there will be a more em- 
phatic bias within towards a restoration of health. 
And, at last, the time comes when, our work all done, 
the " good fight of faith " concluded, the " victory " 
fairly won over internal and external devils, we feel 
that " to depart is far better," as we are now ready to 
"lay down our Cross" and to "wear the Crown of 
Kighteousness" — "the Crown of Rejoicing" — "the 
Crown of Life" — "the Crown of Glory that fadeth 
not away." Can any sane man question that such a 
condition of Celestialized Mind must conduce to bodily 
health? 

Life is a continuous, unceasing antagonism, a per- 
petual Physical warfare. The two forces that consti- 
tute Vital Dynamics are necessarily antagonistic, or 
Life would be an inert quietude instead of incessant 
20 



230 



HLVK AND RED LIGHT. 



motion. Physical Life demands change, change, per- 
petual change ! putting off the old, and on the new, 
casting aside and taking up. And to meet this de- 
mand, Nature must not only work two-handed, the 
two hands must oppose each other — one destroy, the 
other create. 

The normal decay and regeneration, disintegra- 
tion and integration, ever going on in the human 
form, as in all Natural forms, so long as the opera- 
tions are regular and the Vital Force works in obedi- 
ence to the law of Harmony, or rather the law of 
Compensation or Equilibration, are healthful, and 
promote bodily vigor and Life-unfoldment, but just 
so soon as the dual forces that constitute the Vital 
Force cease to work in unison a diseased condition 
of the System is at once evident, sometimes as the 
cause, and always as the consequence, of their want 
of cooperation. It is very easy to understand that a 
failure of the Stomach to perform its functions, or of 
the Lungs, Heart, Liver or Kidneys in the discharge 
of the duties devolving upon it, produces a greater or 
less general and more or less severe derangement of 
the entire Organism ; but the consequences of like 
failures in the more directly vitalizing Glands or Or- 
gans are not so readily understood by those not famil- 
iar with physiology, though they are often more pro- 
nounced and more far-reaching than the others ; often 
discomfort or disorder in the Stomach is directly 
caused by tardiness of action in the Absorbents or 
Secreting Glands or Membranes. The function of 
removing the products of disintegration and the non- 
nutritious ingredients of the food we eat is no less 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 231 

essential to health than the directly nutritive func- 
tions. 

But, as we have seen, the Nervous System holds 
the reins of the Organism, more or less directly con- 
trolling all the inferior Organs ; therefore we look to 
the Nervous System as responsible for a large propor- 
tion of the functional disorders of all parts of the Or- 
ganism, and to it we usually direct our remedies. 

Now, as our reader must ere this have discovered, 
the tendency in the Nervous System, as indeed in all 
Nature, is always to equilibration — not that the oppo- 
site elements of Nerve Force, or of Light, tend always 
to work equally, for then there could be no growth 
from the foetus to manhood's prime, from the grain 
of corn to the " full corn in the ear " — but that, in 
submission to the Life-principle, each of the dual 
forces always tends to the performance of the propor- 
tion of work required of it. When any external or 
internal cause induces one force to perform an excess 
of work, the opposite is usually accelerated to attempt 
a compensative excess; and so, conversely, when one 
is retarded, the other appears to respond accordingly 
— thus Nature seeks to restore the equilibration of 
her dymanual Force. When either force varies so 
much from its allotted task that Nature cannot soon 
enough produce the compensation, the physician is 
called in to assist Nature. The physician who under- 
stands Nature and knows his own province never 
seeks to supplant Nature or to work independently 
of or in antagonism to her. He seeks to learn her 
ways and desires to follow her methods, to study and 
emulate her example in working within her domain. 



232 



BLUE JLSD RED LIGHT. 



The author of this little work fully recognizes this 
sphere of the physician, and, in recognition of the 
superior authoritative skill of Nature, has sought first 
to show the character and qualities of Nature's sole 
Actor, Light, in its dymanual Objective, and super- 
visory Subjective, aspects. He believes, not theoret- 
ically, but as the result of thirty years' earnest study, 
that Light is the Universal Motor; the Source of 
Vital Dynamics (therefore of Nerve Force) ; under 
and by authority of God, the Author, Sustainer and 
Promoter of Life. Believing, nay knowing, this, he 
cannot doubt that Light, when properly understood, 
will prove the one universal pathological agent — in 
fact, Light is the Source of the curative properties of 
medicines, and why should it not prove proportion- 
ately potent when its virtues are directly applied to 
the diseased system ? But, to apply any remedy suc- 
cessfully, we must not merely realize its aggregate 
and specific qualities ; it is equally essential that we 
have an accurate knowledge of the Human Organ- 
ism to which we desire to apply that remedy. Hence, 
after defining Light in its various manifestations, and 
noticing its peculiarities as a whole and as separated 
virtues, we have gone into as full an investigation and 
exposition of the Human Organism as we deemed 
necessary to make intelligible the application of Light 
and its rays thereto. 

Our reader has, we trust, learned to respect, as we 
do, the Ancient Sages, at whom modern Scientists, in 
their overweening self-esteem, their ignorant vain- 
glory, are wont to scoff. No one who honestly studies 
the Kabbala, and its outgrowing literature, with a 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 233 

sincere desire to learn, can otherwise than venerate 
the marvelous men whose penetration, sanctified by 
humble devotion and illuminated by Celestial Light, 
discovered the truths of Nature and Nature's laws 
and principles, and actually fathomed many mysteries 
not only of the terrestrial world, but of Heaven and 
of the Almighty. Combined with this veneration, 
will be a warm, heartfelt gratitude for the vast stores 
of true learning treasured up in the old Philosophy. 
If Light is ever perfectly understood, it must be by 
an honest application of modern Scientific appliances 
and research to the teachings of the Ancient Philos- 
ophers. 

In the department of Science comprehended under 
the generic designations of Pathology and Therapeu- 
tics, the Ancients had many eminent discoverers and 
teachers. In truth, the Ancients knew, in this as in 
other branches of Philosophy, much more than they 
are accredited with — much that has been lost and can 
only be rediscovered after a vast amount of study and 
investigation, while a large percentage of the facts 
of the Pathology and Therapeutics of our day have 
come to us. from those old sources, and not a few of 
the discoveries heralded from time to time as made by 
this or that great man are revivals of old truths. 

Paracelsus is recognized as a wonderfully learned 
man in true Philosophy and especially in Medical 
Science. He held that : " Man is made out of the 
four elements, and is nourished and sustained by 
Magnetic Power, which is the Universal Motor of 
Nature." We thus see that the therapeutics of Para- 
celsus reposes on the original Life-source, Light. So 
20* 



234 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



highly did the Ancients estimate Light as a curative 
agent that they called it " Fluid Gold,"- and "Potable 
Gold " — to understand these terms, we must recollect 
the fact, before stated, that they could, by some method 
not now known, focalize and "fix" light in wine and 
oil, and thus administer it as medicine. 

Paracelsus treated disease in two ways : Sympathet- 
ically and Antipathetically. There can be no ques- 
tion that he brought the Science of Medicine to a high 
state of perfection, and it is unfortunate that but a 
fragmentary trace of his system can now be found. 
Hahnemann, the father of Homeopathy, fully estab- 
lished the Antipathetic System of treatment, and the 
Homeopathic Practice is based upon that System. 
This mode of treatment may be explained and illus- 
trated briefly, thus : 

Every disease or derangement of the Organism, 
however general in its influential action, has some 
local centre, some one organ or tissue that it specific- 
ally attacks ; it also has a clearly defined mode of at- 
tack, and indicates its character, locale and mode of 
attack by certain symptoms. Experiments upon a body 
in health show that a certain medicine exhibits pre- 
cisely the same symptoms, and thus we infer that it 
attacks the same part in the same way. Then when 
this disease is indicated by the symptoms, we directly 
attack the disease itself by administering the medicine 
that produces the same effects in a healthy body. 
Now, it is evident that this medicine must go direct 
to the part affected, and we should infer it would aug- 
ment the disorder — we find that if the dose be too 
large it actually augments the symptomatic indications 
20* 



HOW TO ASSIST NATUBE, 235 

for a while; then they abate, and in time, more or less 
according to the nature and extent of the disorder, the 
symptoms disappear and we know that their cause has 
vanished or at least been vanquished for the present. 
Hence, the proverb " Similia similibus curantur." So 
much for demonstration — but how may we account for 
the success of this treatment? Very simply, thus: 
Nature works by antagonism in all her operations; 
when one of her forces overdoes its work, disease or 
at least a local disorder is the immediate consequence; 
now, if we attack this force and overcome it, the op- 
posite force has a clear field and may reassert its 
rights — thus equilibrium is restored, and Equilibrium 
is Health. 

The Sympathetic System, instead of attacking the 
stronger force, sends recruits to the weaker one and 
enables it to recover its powers, or, if the disorder be 
the result of excessive tension of Nerves or Ganglia, 
a negative remedy may be employed to reduce the 
tension. Thus, too, equilibrium is restored, and Equi- 
librium is Health. 

Of course, in each case, the Physician must be very 
careful in determining which plan of attacking the 
disorder is to be preferred. It may be that the loss 
of equilibrium is chargeable to the undue acceleration 
of one force, while the other is performing its normal 
duty — in that case, the former must be attacked and 
subdued, on the Antipathetic plan, by increasing the 
tension until it exhausts itself; or, on the Sympathetic, 
a negative medicine must be directed to the too-tense 
Nerve or Ganglion. It may be, on the other hand, 
that the loss of equilibrium is chargeable to the undue 



236 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



depression or weakening of one force, while the other 
is performing its normal duty- — then, the depressed 
or weakened force must be assisted, strengthened. In 
either case, we observe that the Physician's aim is 
simply to assist in the restoration of the equilibrium. 

Having determined upon the mode of attack, the 
next question for the Physician to decide is as to the 
violence of the attack. Here he finds that, though 
each case is liable to idiosyncrasies calling for peculi- 
arities of treatment, there are certain general rules to 
guide him : the activity of the attack must depend 
upon the activity of the disorder. A sudden, severe, 
acute disorder requires more powerful remedies to 
produce prompt results : e. g., a violent Fever, acute 
Rheumatism, etc. calls for a low dilution. A mild or 
sub-acute derangement demands a more patient, pro- 
longed course of treatment, with a milder form of 
medicine, a higher dilution. A chronic disease can 
be reached only by very mild treatment and long-con- 
tinued, patient care; the medicine must be of the thir- 
tieth dilution at the least, and in many cases even this 
will fail to reach the disorder, when higher dilutions 
must be" employed. 

It is specially worthy of remark that often where a 
strong form of medicine utterly fails, a very much mild- 
er, higher dilution will immediately act. There has 
been no little controversy from time to time among Ho- 
meopathic Physicians, between the advocates of high 
and of low dilutions, and, as is often the case in such 
disputes, both have been right and both wrong. As 
stated above, the dilutions should be regulated by the 
severity of the disease. In an acute attack, Rheuma- 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 237 

tism, Neuralgia, active Fever, or whatever it be, a low 
dilution acts promptly, while if a higher one be em- 
ployed it will be slow in its action, requiring the 
cumulative effect of several doses. On the other hand, 
in chronic diseases, the violence of the first attack, and 
even of the sub-acute stage has passed, and the disorder 
remains only as a slow poison in the system — a low 
dilution will, as it were, overshoot the mark, and fail 
to effect the desired result, and a twelfth or sometimes 
even a thirtieth will likewise fail, where a higher 
dilution will immediately affect the symptoms, prov- 
ing that it has hit the foe. 

This is certainly not incomprehensible : the chronic 
is the mildest form of a clearly defined disease, though 
the most difficult to expel from the system, and mild 
remedies, continued for a comparatively long period, 
come nearest to balancing the inactivity and the invet- 
eracy of the disorder. On the contrary, an acute dis- 
ease is quick and decided in its action — time may be 
very essential to subdue it before it gets unsubduable, 
and we use low dilutions. In the one case, the enemy 
is entrenched in works impregnable to direct assault ; 
we therefore lay regular siege, cut his communications, 
prevent recruits or supplies from reaching him, and 
eventually compel surrender where direct assault would 
but ensure our repulse and perhaps ultimate defeat. 
In the other case, the enemy is in the field ; his com- 
munications open, supplies and recruits continually 
arriving, time is all-important, as every hour of delay 
increases his power for mischief; we bring up all the 
forces at our command and fight him at short range 
or charge him with sabre and bayonet. We should 



238 



BLUE ANT) RED LIGHT. 



not employ the famous Corliss Engine to run a single 
printing-press (even that on which this book is print- 
ed), though a press is mightier than the pen, which 
we are told is " mightier than the sword ;" nor should 
we have attempted to supplant the Corliss Mammoth 
in Machinery Hall w T ith an engine just powerful 
enough to run a press. In short, the means must be 
adapted to the end. 

We have said the Homeopathic System is based on 
the Antipathetic plan of Paracelsus, and doubtless a 
word or two of explanation will not be out of place 
here. It must be understood that, as this work is 
specially designed to advocate and explain the em- 
ployment of Light and its rays in therapeutics, we are 
not, in what we say here, advocating Homeopathy — 
in fact, we hope to see both the great systems give 
place to a true Natural System, with Light as its fun- 
damental means : 

Towards the close of the second century of the 
Christian Era, Claudius Galeuus arose to great emi- 
nence as an Anatomist and Pathologist; he became 
the acknowledged leader of a " school," which, with a 
high character of excellence and a deservedly high 
reputation for its teachings, evinced an arrogant, over- 
bearing dogmatism that would brook no opposition, 
and, when Paracelsus took issue with some of its 
founder's teachings, the leaders exerted their great in- 
fluence and that of their adherents to crush the daring 
opposer ; this so incensed Paracelsus that he, as an act 
of most unwise defiance, publicly burned Galen's 
works. As the Galen school was the "regular" and 
popular school of medicine of that day, their influ- 



HOW TO ASSIST NATURE. 239 

ence was sufficient now to bring upon their adversary 
a bitter persecution, in consequence of which the 
world has lost the benefit of the truly wonderful 
knowledge of Nature and of Medicine that Paracelsus 
possessed — mere fragments of his teachings are now 
to be discovered. He was certainly not the inferior, 
in ability or acquirements, of Galen's disciples, or of 
any other Scientist of the time in Medicine, and in 
Nature he was without a rival. 

Paracelsus maintained that the Book of Nature, 
written by the finger of God, was the only reliable 
source of Pathological and Medical knowledge. He 
taught two systems, as we have said : the Antipathetic 
and the Sympathetic. The latter, the chief remedy 
under which was Light, " fixed/' as we have stated, 
in oil and wine, was his favorite system except in ag- 
gravated cases of excessive tension of the Nerves or 
Ganglia, when he attacked the offending part, on the 
theory of conquering it by Antipathy. 

Hahnemann, in some respects like Paracelsus, espe- 
cially in manly independence, exhibited, like his, in 
opposing the popular practice of his day, adopted the 
Antipathetic, and made it virtually his own System 
by amplifying the meagre information left by his 
teacher, into so complete and logical a System that 
many of the greatest minds of various parts of the 
world have since accepted it, and the great Homeo- 
pathic School is the result. All the blessings that 
Homeopathy has conferred upon the world, and they 
are too vast and numerous to be readily computed, are 
so many voices reciting the praises of Hahnemann. 

Still, we believe that Paracelsus was right in pre- 



240 



BLUE AND BED JLIGHT, 



ferring his Sympathetic System, is it appears the more 
rational ; and we have not a doubt of its becoming 
the Universal System, so soon as the real nature and 
properties of Nature's own and only remedy, Light, 
come to be understood — the two are to each other in 
Pathology, much the same as in religion are the law 
of Moses and the law of Christ — the one was coercion, 
the other is persuasion ; the one was evil for evil, " an 
eye for an eye, a tooth for a tooth," the other is "good 
for evil," "Love your enemies, bless them that curse 
you, do good to them that hate you, and pray for them 
which despitefully use you, and persecute you." Just 
as we believe the law of Christ is better than that of 
Moses, so we believe that the System of Sympathy, 
with Light for its base, is better than that of Antip- 
athy. 

In the following chapter, we shall show the appli- 
cation of Light, and especially of its Red and Blue 
rays, to the Human Organism, wherein it will be seen 
that in the therapeutic employment of Light the Sym- 
pathetic plan prevails, though in some cases the other 
may be found more efficacious. 



CHAPTEE VIII. 

LIGHT AND ITS RAYS NATURE'S OWN REMEDIES 
FOR DISEASE— HOW TO APPLY LIGHT TO THE 
HUMAN ORGANISM. 

GOD IS LIGHT ! James, the Apostle, calls Him 
"the Father of Light." David, the Psalmist, ex- 
claims : " Jehovah is my Light ;" and, again he tells 
God : " Thou coverest thyself with Light as with a 
garment." But John, "the disciple whom Jesus 
loved," is more explicit — he says : " This then is the 
message which we have heard of him [Christ] and 
declare unto you, that GOD IS LIGHT !" 

Surely, no Kabbalist could claim higher excellence 
and honor for Light than this ! " Thou coverest thy- 
self with Light as with a garment" — what is this but a 
declaration of the Kabbalistic doctrine that God man- 
ifests Himself in Light? And John affirms the same 
truth, only with special emphasis, in his declaration : 
" God is Light !" But we have, in the first chapter, 
stated the teaching of the Kabbala on this subject, and 
have shown that the Bible and true Science are in full 
accord in attesting the presence of Jehovah in Light as 
His manifester, His representative. We have shown 
that when God said " Let there be Light, and Light 
was," He simply sent forth a mighty creative agent, 
endowed with Divine Wisdom and Power to carry on 
forever the work He assigned it ; that the work of 
21 Q 241 



242 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



creation was not limited to "six days," or "six 
periods of time/' but was designed to be, as it is, a 
perpetual work, never ceasing until time itself shall 
cease; that, as "in the beginning" Light was the Al- 
mighty's chosen and only representative in creation, 
so it has been ever since, and must be until creation 
shall have been completed and time engulphed in 
eternity. We have no indication, in Nature or in 
the Bible, of God's choosing any other worker, or act- 
ing in or by any other instrumentality, than Light ; 
hence, we have claimed, on the high authority of the 
Kabbala, and on the higher authority of Nature and 
the Bible, that Light is the Universal Motor, the 
original and only actual source of all Natural Forces 
— of Vital Dynamics in every phase, aspect or mode 
of exercise. We have clearly distinguished between 
this Celestial Power and its Objective manifestations, 
the Astral Suns, and have indicated the important 
differences between the Celestial or Subjective Sun, 
the fountain of Celestial or Subjective Light, and the 
Astral or Objective Suns, the reservoirs and dispen- 
sers of Objective or visible light. We have traced to 
the mighty Celestial Sun, through the Sun of our 
Solar System, all the so-called Physical Forces of the 
Earth, such as Attraction, Repulsion, etc., etc., and 
have shown that Electricity, Magnetism and Nerve 
Force alike are manifestations of Light. We have 
shown that, behind the dual Objective principles of 
Light, the Subjective Life-principle is ever present, 
controlling and directing every operation, and that 
upon the presence and influence of the latter depend 
the successful workings of the former. 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 243 

In this chapter we propose to make practical appli- 
cations of the knowledge we have epitomized in the 
preceding chapters, by showing how Light may be 
employed to banish disease from the Human Organ- 
ism ; but, by way of introduction to our specific sub- 
ject, though our readers cannot actually require that 
we should do so, we deem it not amiss, and it will be 
interesting to most of our readers, to allude briefly 
again to the ancients, especially as our study of the 
old Philosophy gave us directly much of the infor- 
mation we have, and led us to the experiments from 
which we have acquired the rest : 

The ancients, we have seen, knew well the proper- 
ties of Light in all its manifestations, Subjective and 
Objective ; they knew much more than we have yet 
discovered from the inimitable symbols which are the 
only record they left of their knowledge. Illuminated 
interpreters of later days have read many of the sym- 
bols more or less fully, but no doubt there are still 
important truths to be learned from them. We were 
favored some years since with the key, and have used 
it successfully so far as we have been permitted, but 
we have yet much to learn ; nor are we at liberty to 
tell, for the present, all we have learned. The time 
may come, and we trust it may be not far distant, 
when we can tell more. 

Every symbol of the Kabbala is a symbol of Light 
and its laws, in some of its manifestations. The ten 
Sephiroth we have reviewed at some length in the 
first chapter, and do not consider it advisable to notice 
them farther here. That Solomon, " the wise man," 
was a Kabbalist of a high order is unquestionable, 



244 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



and that he was familiar with the Sephiroth and their 
significance his "Books" of the Bible clearly attest; 
to see this, recall the facts that the first emanations 
from En Sop7i were Wisdom and Intelligence; the 
Celestial Light was described as "Wisdom" (Sophia); 
that the Sephiroth, as arranged in the Plate, were 
called the " Tree of Life"; and other facts noticed in 
our first chapter. Then read in the third chapter of 
" Proverbs " : " Happy is the man that findeth Wis- 
dom, and the man that getteth understanding [Intel- 
ligence]. . . . Length of days is in her right hand; 
and in her left hand riches and honour [her right hand 
is Wisdom, her left Intelligence — see Plate]. . . . 
She is a tree of life to them that lay hold upon her, 
and happy is every one that retaineth her. Jehovah 
by Wisdom hath founded the earth ; by understand- 
ing hath He established the heavens." [The Hebrew 
word translated "understanding" clearly means "In- 
telligence" — indeed, the English words are very 
nearly synonymous.] Then in the fourth chapter, 
read: "Get Wisdom, get Intelligence. . . . Wisdom 
is the principal thing [the word "thing" is not in the 
Hebrew] ; therefore, get Wisdom : and with all thy 
getting, get Intelligence," etc. And so on throughout 
this " Book," and in the next we find the same — e. g., 
" Wisdom giveth life to them that have it," and many 
more passages of equally strong Kabbalistic tone. The 
reader of Solomon's "Books" will find he very re- 
peatedly uses the term " tree of life " — we have seen 
that he calls Wisdom a " tree of life," but so does he call 
"The fruit of the righteous," a proper "desire," "a 
wholesome tongue," etc. It will materially strengthen 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 245 

the Kabbalistic character of the cited and kindred 
passages to recollect that in the Septuagint, the He- 
brew word Chochmah ["Wisdom"] is invariably ren- 
dered ao(pca = Sophia. 

But, as we have shown, the Bible is full of Kab- 
balistic terms, as, of course, we should expect when 
we bear in mind that the Kabbala was at the first 
an illuminated (" inspired ") interpreter of Nature, 
and after the Bible was written the Kabbala likewise 
interpreted it. The passages notably that ordinary 
commentators are unable to expound, and get rid of 
by pronouncing them " figurative " (when this con- 
venient make-shift will obviously not reach their con- 
fusion, they go so far as to pronounce them " apocry- 
phal," " doubtful " or " an interpolation "), are strongly 
Kabbalistic, and he alone who comprehends the Kab- 
bala can discover the exact signification. There are 
many passages in both the Old and New Testaments 
that baffle the commentators and pulpit divines, which 
can only be fully understood and explained by those 
who are illuminated by the Light of Truth in " the 
inner man." 

" The Revelation of St. John the Divine " is espe- 
cially full of these passages, " hard to be understood " 
to the unenlightened, and an ordinary commentary on 
this Book is more amusing and entertaining than in- 
structive because of the evident difficulties the com- 
mentators experience in explaining what their Object- 
ively trained Minds cannot understand, but he who 
knows the Kabbala encounters no such difficulties be- 
cause the eves of his Understanding or Intelligence 
are enlightened to perceive " all mysteries." We have 

21* 



246 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



alluded to one or two of these, one of the most strik- 
ing being the record of John's vision of Sophia or 
Isis, " clothed with the Sun, and the Moon under her 
feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars " — 
our Frontispiece is the Kabbalistic symbol of this 
" woman " of John's vision, and affords a capital il- 
lustration of the idea of the Celestial Light " clothed 
with the [Objective] Sun" "as with a garment" — the 
Life-principle itself veiled, but revealing itself in an 
Objective form. The " Brazen Serpent," John's 
" Dragon," is excluded from the Sacred Circle. 

Our title-page shows another of the most beautiful 
and impressive symbols of the Kabbala, the "flaming 
Pentagram" of the Ancients, "His Star" that an- 
nounced to the Eastern Wise Men the dawn of the 
"Sun of Eighteousness," the "Daystar" of Peter, 
the "Morning Star" and "Bright [Brilliant = Flam- 
ing] and Morning Star" of John. It is shown within 
the Objective Sun, the Life-principle within the Ob- 
jective Orb. The letter A represents its Duality in 
Unity, the line across uniting the divergent lines, and 
the angle at the top being the point of unity where 
they emanate from the "All-Seeing Eyes" of the 
Supreme. 

Other Symbols of the Kabbala are equally impres- 
sive and equally "orthodox" and "evangelical" — 
i. e., equally in accord with " the Scriptures." For 
instance, we may mention, without illustrating : The 
" Pillars of Jokan and Boaz," one based upon water, 
the other upon land, the one white, the other dark, 
clearly tell of the dual properties of Light, and of 
the two principles of Moral Life, the "Good" and 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 247 

the "Evil." Samson, the strong, weak man, whose 
strength among men was no more marvellous than the 
sensual proclivities that made him a weak fool among 
women, furnishes the Kabbalists with materials for 
instructive symbolization : they consider that his 
strength lay in seven special locks of his hair, which 
represent the seven rays of the source of Strength, 
Light, and their being shorn from his head by the 
woman Delilah is the triumph of " Evil " in the sup- 
pression of Light; while his pulling down the pillars 
of Dagon's temple, involving as it did himself and 
all concerned in the temporary triumph of evil, indi- 
cates the electric restoration of harmony. Doubtless 
the Bible-reader is constantly struck with the force of 
the number " seven " in Scripture and its frequent 
occurrence as symbolical of might or excellence, but 
who of all the popular commentators has ever sug- 
gested the fact that the symbol is Kabbalistic ? The 
" seven stars " repeatedly mentioned by John in his 
" Revelations/' are the seven rays of Light. 

According to the ancients, the colors of Light were 
symbolic of life and death : White is the color of the 
quintessence of Light; toward its negative pole, 
White is condensed in Blue, and fixed in Black ; to- 
wards its positive pole, White is condensed in Yellow, 
and fixed in Red. Blue invites to repose, or is slum- 
ber, Black is absolute rest, the sleep of death ; Yellow 
is activity^ Red is absolute motion, the motion of life ; 
and White is the equilibration of motion, healthful 
activity. 

In Life-unfoldment, the progress is from Black to 
Red — Red is the zenith of manhood's prime ; in the 



248 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



decline of Life the course is from Red to Black ; in 
both unfold ment and decline, White is traversed, the 
healthful, elastic period of first maturity and of the 
medium stage of old age. 



White 




The White, of course, is the aggregation of Light, 
and the Black its absence; the three colors of the 
Life-scale, Red, Yellow and Blue, with the four not 
noted herein, constitute the Syllipsis, or Luminous 
Synthesis. Positive, plus Light in its extreme polar- 
ity is Life at its prime; Negative, minus Light in its 
extreme depolarity is Death. 

The ancients declared that " Light is saturated with 
Life." They regarded the Red color of the Vital 
Fluid, the Blood, as a polarization of the most posi- 
tive ray — polarized, fixed therein when the Oxygen 
of the air drives out and replaces the Carbonic acid 
introduced with the food and generated in the Excre- 
mentory Organs and Glands. 

In our earlier studies of the old Philosophy we 
found so much that was not "dreamt of" by modern 
Scientists, that we were induced to commence a series 
of test-experiments ; led to believe that there were in- 
valuable virtues in Light that might be, nay should 
be, applied to the relief of sickness and suffering, we 
determined to find out, to discover, these virtues, and 
to learn how to cure disease with Nature's own spe^ 
cifics, the integral elements of the Light of Life. 

Our experiments soon demonstrated the fallacy of 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 249 

some of the popular theories of Light, and convinced 
us that Scientists have much to learn even in reference 
to the ordinary phenomena of Light and Life. For 
instance, we had been led to infer that the Actinic or 
Chemical ray was the sole or at least chief actor in 
producing molecular changes; we found this to be 
almost contrary to the facts of Light action; the Ac- 
tinic element simply dissolves old forms, and prepares 
the molecules, or atoms of molecules, for the action of 
the Calorific ray, or rather for its next neighbor, the 
Ked ray, which is the creator of new forms by impart- 
ing new affinitive attraction to the molecules or atoms 
prepared for it. These two principles form the two 
atomic forces, attraction and repulsion, the former 
being the Red, and the latter the Blue, in action, but 
the other rays are not inactive ; they all have their re- 
spective shares in Nature's handiwork, though we 
cannot as yet assign to each its special functions; 
doubtless, the exact details will yet be discovered. As 
we have shown in the second chapter, Light works as 
an entity, though it works two-handed with five sub- 
ordinate hands to assist its two principles. One ray, 
or two rays, or six rays, to the exclusion of the rest, 
cannot carry on the most simple operations in Nature. 
He who said " Let there be Light " deputed to this 
agent the work of creation, development, evolution — 
the business of carrying on the entire operations of 
Universal Life ; within this one representative of His 
Wisdom, Will and Power, were all the forces — prin- 
cipal and subordinate — requisite for the creation of 
worlds, and for enriching them with every type of 
form for Life-vwfoldment, and not a single principal 



250 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

or subordinate force is non-essential. Hence, while 
He permitted His agent to separate its forces and to 
assign to each its duty, not one could be ignored or 
pushed aside. When Nature or Light has a single 
operation to effect, a single object to attain, she em- 
ploys one ray, but to evolve new forms out of old, 
Light must work as one, or rather it must use its forces 
in equilibrium — e. g., the single operation of disinte- 
grating a body the Actinic Blue alone performs ; the 
single operation of integrating a body the Calorific 
Red alone performs — but the dual operation of disin- 
tegration and integration must be effected by the two, 
while if the new be a form that requires more than 
mere integration, such as a plant which wants foliage, 
blossom and fruit, the other rays will be called for. 
It evinces an inexcusable stupidity or want of reflec- 
tion for a scientist to attempt to effect the growth and 
maturing of a plant under the light of a single ray, be 
it Red, Yellow, Green or Blue ; the grain of wheat, 
under Blue Glass alone, cannot grow, except a por- 
tion of the other rays steal in, or force themselves in, 
and then its growth will be proportionate to the quan- 
tity of these that gets to the roots and the growing 
stalk. We shall show, in the next chapter, that Gen- 
eral Pleasonton's experiments were radically different 
from those of Professor Draper, Mr. Gladstone, and 
others who have utterly failed because they have not 
recognized the difference between augmenting the pro- 
portion of one ray and the exclusive admittance of 
but one. We shall show, too, that General Pleason- 
ton's success was due to the single fact that the in- 
creased amount of chemical action upon the earth and 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 251 

air of his grapery enabled them to contribute more 
liberally to the nourishment of his vines; but the 
vines require more than food, and the other rays sup- 
plied the assimilating, polarizing power to supply the 
food, the coloring for the wood, leaves, blossoms and 
fruit, etc., etc. We believe, however, that with their 
increased number and size his grapes must prove defi- 
cient proportionately in quality and flavor — overfeed- 
ing can scarcely be desirable in plants more than in 
animals, hence care must be exercised not to carry 
the Blue Glass plan too far in vegetable development. 
But of this in the next chapter ; our subject in this 
chapter is the application of Light and special rays to 
the Human Organism when it is diseased. 

Our earliest experiments and observations convinced 
us that not only is Light the exclusive operator in the 
Mineral and Vegetable Kingdoms, but that in Ani- 
mals and in Man as well, Light is Life. We realiz- 
ed that there is but one original force in the Universe, 
and that force is Light ; that every created thing in 
the Universe is a manifestation of Light ; that every 
material form is developed simply and solely to mani- 
fest Light. That Organic forms are developed to 
manifest Light as Life — that Life is Light mani- 
fested within and by means of various forms; that 
Still or Vegetable Life is but the earlier Vital mani- 
festation of Light, in which the visible Sun is the 
direct actor and the invisible Celestial Sun is the 
director of the actions of the visible Sun — the Celes- 
tial Sun being the Life-principle ; that Active or Ani- 
mal Life is an intensified development of the same 
Life — the Vital Power establishing within the Animal 



252 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



body a centre, called the Soul, and acting from within 
instead of from without the body ; that Human Life is 
a higher manifestation of the same Life-principle, the 
Soul being now individualized by the Subjective Life- 
principle identifying itself with the Soul, and, in the 
character of Subjective Faculties, becoming an integral 
part of Man's Soul. 

Thus, as the result of many years of patient study 
of ancient and modern Philosophy, with constant crit- 
ical study of Human Life as seen about us continually, 
we are prepared to affirm : That the Human Organ- 
ism, though " fearfully and wonderfully made," is 
simply and only an Objective manifestation of the 
Soul within : that the Organism comprises a frame or 
body with a complex system of motive apparatus 
called Organs ; that these Organs are mutually related 
to and dependent upon each other, the highest upon 
all beneath, even upon the lowest, but nevertheless 
the higher Organs, as they ascend step by step in 
development, have a certain clearly defined authority 
over those below, and thus the Organs having their 
seat in the Brain are the rulers of the Organism, sub- 
ject only to the Subjective Faculties, " Self-Con- 
sciousness, Conscience, Imagination and Prescience;" 
and that the Soul is the personification of Light. 

We have demonstrated, in the sixth chapter, that 
Nerve Force is the dual properties of Light, acting 
w T ithin the Human System as they act in the world 
without, and Nerve Force is Vital Force, As soon 
as we had become convinced that Light is Life, 
in the earth, in the Plant, in the Animal and in 
Man, and observed how Light worked in viable 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 253 

operations, we felt assured that in Man the same 
Force must work in precisely the same way. We 
have distinctly advised our readers that the ancients 
fully understood not only th.e Science of Light (which 
we have shown comprehends all science, Physiology 
and Pathology, no less than Astronomy, Natural Phi- 
losophy, etc.), but were peculiarly expert in the em- 
ployment of Light in restoring equilibrium and health 
to the Human Organism ; their teachings induced us 
to make our first experiments in Light, and now that 
we had confirmed, to our complete satisfaction, their 
views of Light as the sole Universal Source of Dy- 
namics, Physical and Vital, we felt no doubt of their 
correctness in regarding Light as Nature's own and 
only specific for disease of all kinds — indeed, it seemed 
most reasonable that the source of Life must be best 
calculated to prolong Life by maintaining equilibrium 
in, or restoring it when impaired by disease to, the 
Organic System; and to strengthen this inference 
we have the fact that the virtues of medicines are 
largely received from Light. But we are not left to 
inferences, however reasonable; we have the testimony 
of the ancients, and the convincing success of careful 
experiments, to prove that Light, and separate rays 
thereof, are really invaluable curatives, especially in 
diseases arising from defective or excessive action of 
either factor of Nerve Force. When we take into 
account the fact that not less than four-fifths of all the 
ailments, serious or otherwise, must be traced to im- 
paired or accelerated action of the Nervous System, 
we cannot but see the incalculable value of a reme- 
dy that acts directly upon the Nerves and their (ran- 
22 



254 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT, 



glia. We entertain not merely an opinion, but a 
hopeful confidence, that the results already achieved 
are but the incipient tokens, the harbingers, of a 
glorious revolution in Therapeutics and Pathology 
— that Light will ere long completely revolutionize 
the methods of treating diseased Human beings and 
families throughout the world ; that it will drive all 
the death-laden nostrums and medicines of violence 
rather than beneficence from the materia medica of 
our day, and overwhelm the innumerable and in- 
famous army of empirics and quacks that are an un- 
conscionable blot on Human Nature and an ines- 
timable curse to the world. Pretenders in any walk 
of life are worthy of contempt, but those who dare in- 
trude unfitted into the philanthropic profession that 
cares for the sick and suffering should be scouted and 
flouted by every person of respectability — nay, Light 
itself could vouchsafe to the Human race no greater 
blessing than by the exercise of its Fire element to 
consume in a universal empyrosis the whole horde of 
ignorant or worse beings of prey who make suffering 
humanity their amusement and victims to their greed. 
We hope, however, to see Light triumph even over 
the prejudices of regular born and trained physicians, 
and believe, in very truth, that the day is not far dis- 
tant when Light will secure its just position as the 
chief and" sovereign " cure-all " for all " the ills that 
flesh is heir to." 

It is well known generally that all functional dis- 
eases of the Human Organism result more or less 
directly from the derangement of one or the other of 
the two great Nervous Systems that control the 



HOW TO APPLY LIOHT. 255 

Human Economy. It would be out of place here to 
attempt to notice, or even to mention, the thousands of 
diseases that rise in or immediately involve one of 
these centres of Vitality. 

We have already in the sixth chapter portrayed the 
Human Organism at as great length as the character 
and design of our work demands or would justify, and 
have shown that the sole condition and characteristic 
of health is Harmony, or rather a well-regulated 
Compensation and Equilibration, between the Or- 
gans, Nerves, Muscles, Fluids and all the functional 
centres and Vital apparatus — nay between everything 
within the body or identified with it. That disease 
is the direct consequence of every or any infraction of 
the law of Equilibrium, and must be proportionate to 
the extent of the infraction. As every part is essen- 
tial, not even the most trival can be ignored nor the 
most important can be permitted to exceed its required 
office without more or less serious damage to the com- 
plex and delicate Human Machine. The finger pricked 
with a pin or crushed does not confine the momentary 
pain or the more serious consequences to itself — the 
little toe alone may be visibly injured and yet the 
injury may prove fatal. 

Paul in his letters to the Eomans and to the Corin- 
thians repeatedly alludes to the mutual dependence of 
the members of the body — n. b., " The body is one and 
hath many members, and all the members of that one 
body, being many, are one body ;" " The body is not 
one member, but many ;" " much more those mem- 
bers of the body, which seem to be more feeble, are 
necessary ;" " there should be no schism in the body ; 



256 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



but the members should have the same care one for 
another, and whether one member suffer, all the mem- 
bers suffer with it," etc. This is all true, and would 
be no less true were we to substitute "Cell" for 
" member." 

The body is an aggregation of millions of Cells, 
each Cell endued with Life, and capable of living in- 
dependently ; but so soon as two or more of these liv- 
ing Cells combine, they become one Life, whether they 
be two or millions— they no longer live, or can live, 
independently ; each Cell that lives in a body as part 
of it lives for the rest, and so no Cell can suffer except 
its associate Cells suffer with it. An aggregation of 
Cells must have a Life-centre — an Organ; an aggre- 
gation of Organs into a system must have a Life-cen- 
tre — a System-Organ ; an aggregation of Organic Sys- 
tems must have a Life-centre — a Soul, with its Ner- 
vous System comprising Vital centres and conductors 
of "Vital Energy ; this Soul unfolds until, in Man, the 
Life-principle Organizes itself with it, and it becomes 
an Individualized or Personified Soul, with authority 
and responsibility peculiar to itself. [We have treated 
of this at some length before, and only iterate here so 
far as it seems necessary to the elucidation of our pres- 
ent subject.] But note: In all these successive un- 
foldments, the Cell-life continues the base ; each Cell is 
an entity, but in submitting to aggregation with other 
like entities loses its independence, its individuality, 
and becomes part of the aggregate entity, so that if it 
suffers the others suffer in sympathy, and if another 
suffers it too sympathizes in the suffering. 

As the Nervous System is the reservoir and centre 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 257 

of the Vital Energy of all the Cell-lives, so it is the 
reservoir and centre of the suffering, the disease, of 
the Cell-aggregration, the Organism. We have shown 
that the Subjective part of the Human Soul is the 
Subjective Life-principle Personified, and, therefore, 
the regulator of the Life of the Organism, the har- 
monizer of the Forces that move the Machine; we 
have shown, too, that when the Subjective Faculties 
control absolutely the Life-forces, there must be abso- 
lute harmony, or rather absolute Compensation and 
Equilibration, within Man ; where these are thus ab- 
solute, disease cannot arise from within, and when in- 
troduced from without, absolute Compensation and 
Equilibration tend immediately to banish it; if the 
power within were always superior to the evil intro- 
duced the Man could not die. But, as to every Man 
the time must come when " to depart is far better," 
when, his work all done, his mission accomplished, he 
desires to lay aside his earthly material form and pass 
into the Eternal Celestial World, God has kindly and 
wisely " appointed unto all men to die " physically. 
A few, a very few, die simply from "old age" with- 
out disease, but even the most Godlike seldom escape 
sickness and suffering — hence, we need not only to 
teach men to cultivate the Subjective Faculties of the 
Soul, as the most important remedy, but to discover 
remedies to apply from without to assist the Life- 
principle within in ejecting disease, and, hence, too, 
the need of skilled, careful Physicians to advise and 
direct in the application of these remedies. 

The functional diseases of the Human Organism, then, 
have their centre and often their source, in the Nervous 
22* a, 



258 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



System. If it be in the Cerebro-Spinal System, it is usu- 
ally at once recognized as a " Nervous affection/' even 
by those who know little about the import of the 
term ; they recognize it because there is an evidently 
augmented or decreased action of the Nerves — -an ac- 
celeration or a depression of Vital Energy. The sim- 
plest form of the former consists in the condition we 
call " Nervous " — as when we see a person unduly 
excited, it may be to tremulousness, we say : " He (or 
she) is nervous." So, too, one who is subject to ex- 
citement is called " Nervous." The simplest form of 
the latter consists in that condition of lassitude, indis- 
position to move, even to think perhaps, that so often 
succeeds an unusual strain upon the system — it is not 
laziness, but merely a relaxation of the system. 

This word " relaxation " explains the whole matter. 
Nerve action is tension — in health, the tension is nor- 
mal, or natural, in disease there is an intensifying 
or a relaxing of the tension. We have seen, in the 
second chapter, that tension is polarity — hence, dis- 
ease is an abnormal disturbance of polarity, either in 
excess of polarization or excess of depolarization. 
Healthy physical life is a perpetual and regular polar- 
izing and depolarizing, disease is the loss of this reg- 
ularity, death a depolarization of the Nerve-tension, 
decay the ultimate depolarization of Life-forms. It 
is important to bear this in mind, because every rem- 
edy must be administered upon this basis. On the 
Antipathetic plan, if the Nerve-tension be too great 
we exhaust it by augmenting it ; apply a remedy that 
increases the tension, knowing that tension carried 
beyond its limit exhausts itself. On the Sympathetic 



Plate IV.— Nerve-Tension in Health and Disease. 

DEATH 

F 




HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 259 

plan, we relax the tension by applying a negative 
remedy that partially depolarizes it by drawing to 
itself a part of the tension, repeating the application 
until the tension is reduced to the normal standard. 
Or, if it be a case of abnormal relaxation, the Sym- 
pathetic plan is the safest and we apply a positive 
remedy to increase the polar-tension. 

On page 105, we gave a circle, with a dotted line 
showing variations in Atmospheric Electricity, and 
facing this we give a " Biometric Life-Circle" to illus- 
trate variations in Nerve-tension. It will be ob- 
served that 100 indicates the "Normal or Natural 
Life Line" of Nerve-tension ; from that to indicates 
relaxation of tension, and from 100 upwards shows 
stages of acceleration. When Nerve-tension has fallen 
to about 40, Nature, even with the aid of the most 
skillful Physician and the best available remedies, 
can seldom restore tension, the system rapidly declines 
until at Physical Death supervenes — so utter is the 
prostration sometimes that the mortification or final 
decay commences before death. 

In low forms of Typhus and Typhoid, and other 
Malarial and sluggish Fevers, in Consumption and 
kindred diseases, in Cholera and kindred diseases, and 
in many other diseases where there is little or no in- 
flammation, the Nervous System relaxes, and, as a 
rule, the Physician directs his remedies to the assist- 
ance of Nature in bringing the tension up to the nor- 
mal 100. 

On the other hand, in Neuralgia, Rheumatism, and 
inflammatory diseases generally, in active Fevers, and 
in very many diseases where there is a pronounced 



260 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



tendency to excitement, the Nervous System becomes 
tense, and the Physician seeks to assist Nature by the 
Antipathetic plan of direct assault on the tension, 
or by the Sympathetic plan of allaying the excite- 
ment, soothing the excited Nerves, drawing off the 
tension. 

The extreme state of tension is found in Tetanus, 
or Lockjaw, when the line runs up to 150 or up- 
wards ; the corresponding extreme of relaxation is 
found in the Congestive Chill, in which the prostra- 
tion reaches 20 or below — in either case Death can 
scarcely be averted ; in the one because the polarity 
is so high, the Nerves so "fixed," in the other because 
the tension is so nearly destroyed, the System so near 
collapse, that equilibrium cannot be restored. 

Derangements of the Sympathetic System are of the 
same nature, arising from excessive tension or relax- 
ation, but do not manifest themselves externally in 
the same way ; this System, it will be recollected, con- 
trols the "Vegetative Organs/' wherefore, diseases 
having their centre in it affect the Nutritive func- 
tions directly and through them the entire Organ- 
ism ; the early symptoms are discomfort in the sto- 
mach and parts adjacent, in the bowels, the kidneys, 
etc., with pain of the character of dull ache ; later, 
the symptoms become more aggravated, internal fevers, 
and sometimes external, inflammation of stomach or 
other organs connected with the Nutritive processes, 
and general debility, and eventually a gradual, at 
times rapid, decline, follow. As we have before 
stated, Cancers, Scrofulous affections, Ulcers, Skin- 
diseases generally, and all morbid growths are due to 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 261 

disease in some part of the Assimilating, Eliminating 
or Excreting Organs, and as the Sympathetic Nervous 
System is the manager of these, they are all evidences 
of augmented or relaxed tension in this branch of the 
Nervous System. 

Now, we must remind the reader that Nerve Force 
like all Natural Forces, comprises two principles, a 
positive and a negative, a giver and withdrawer of 
polarity — as in the outer world, so in Man, there must 
be a Compensatory and Equilibratory relation between 
these two opposites, or Nature cannot carry on her 
work successfully. In Man, if the Soul-superintend- 
ent be not kept in a state of healthful activity, this 
relation will be suspended and disease is the result : 
if the Soul perform well its part, this relation can be 
disturbed only by external causes, such as excessive 
physical or mental effort, irregular habits of life (i. e., 
eating at irregular intervals, too much or too little, 
not having regular hours of sleep, etc.), dissipation, 
eating unwholesome food, going too much into society, 
an isolated, sedentary life — in short, excess of any 
kind in any direction; the external causes may be 
beyond our control, such as exposure to contagious 
or infectious disease, excessive heat or cold, excess of 
positive or negative Electricity in the Atmosphere, or 
any one of many causes. When the Soul is attentive 
to its controlling authority, and disease is introduced 
from without, there is evident an immediate effort to 
expel it by restoring the equilibrium, if the disease 
be slight or within the power of the Soul, equilibrium 
is restored with ease — unless the Nerve Force is too 
much relaxed or intensified to permit it, the Soul, un- 



262 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



aided, can effect the reequilibration, otherwise external 
assistance is rendered. The tendency to Compensa- 
tion and Equilibration is seen in the Fever that fol- 
lows a Chill, or the proportionate prostration that 
succeeds a Fever — in this, Nature is restoring Equi- 
librium by making one excess compensate for the 
other. 

We have in the preceding paragraph alluded to the 
fact that among the external causes that suspend equi- 
librium within Man is excessive labor of Body or 
Mind. The American people are naturally extremely 
devoted to business — of course, there are very many 
who " rust out," but the American Simonpure is far 
more likely to "wear out." The American is dis- 
tinguished, the world over, for qualities aptly express- 
ed in vulgar parlance by the word "push" — he is an 
excitable " go-ahead " sort of a creature that is far too 
apt to become so engrossed in his chosen pursuit that 
Body, Mind and Soul, even the Subjective Faculties, 
are placed in requisition, made contributory, if not 
actually subservient, to the one idea, until he becomes 
an intense moving machine, almost automatic in the 
one direction. Now, extravagant concentration upon 
one pursuit is waste of Nerve Force. To say nothing 
of the depreciation of the Mind and the lowering of 
the standard of Soul-Life that inevitably result from 
this one-idea excess, the damage to the Nervous Sys- 
tem is incalculable, permanently impairing the in- 
dividual Organism throughout, and transmitting, by 
a natural " law of entail," appalling evils to his off- 
spring and even to his posterity to " the third or 
fourth generation," in the shape of hereditary taints 



flOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 263 

and predisposition to disease that Nature, even with 
the assistance of the Physician and the Divine, can 
seldom remedy or alleviate. During excessive ap- 
plication there is an excessive strain upon the Nerves 
and Nerve-centres that fearfully accelerates natural, 
healthful disintegration, and either the integration 
soon falls behind, or the strain of keeping it up ex- 
hausts the Organs thus driven to undue labor, and in 
some way or other Nature will enforce her law of 
Compensation — in the Man himself so far as his self- 
abbreviated life-span will permit, and in those who 
receive the taint of his weakened Vitality. The 
Cerebro-Spinal System is peculiarly delicate, and 
therefore susceptible to the effects of over-work, but 
the Sympathetic also inevitably becomes involved, the 
Man becomes an early wreck, and his unfortunate off- 
spring have no " constitutions " to withstand external 
influences or to overcome internal predisposition to 
disease. 

So important do we consider these facts, in the light 
of the fearful havoc already visible in this " go-ahead " 
Republic of ours, that we have in preparation a book 
expressly devoted to this subject, dedicated with 
earnest heart and profound sympathy to the best wel- 
fare of the land we love with patriotic ardor and the 
fellow-citizens we regard with true fraternal feelings. 
There is no human foresight that dare venture to 
penetrate the future and foretell the Physical, Mental 
and Moral Whirlwind that we shall reap as a people 
if we do not cease in the mad sowing of the wind of 
excessive Nerve-strain. 

Every exercise of Nerve Force produces a propor- 



264 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



tionate disintegration of life-tissues, and so long as 
it is not excessive, is beneficial to the Organism in 
that it favors regeneration and revivification in the 
necessary integration of new tissues. A normal decay 
and renewal is always healthful — an occasional excess 
of mental or physical effort, if not carried too far, is 
doubtless beneficial rather than hurtful, in awakening 
the functions to zeal and energy, but even the most 
ordinary intellect must accept our caution against per- 
sistent, perpetual excess. 

As soon as a Man feels himself becoming, on the 
one hand, "Nervous" (i. e., unduly excitable, irri- 
table, "touchy"), or, on the other, subject to the 
" Blues " (i. e.j low-spirited and apprehensive of evil), 
careless, indifferent to any subject that should interest 
him, let him pause and examine himself — he is in 
peril and must determine its source and end, and see 
how the threatened evil is to be averted. Before seek- 
ing relief in Medicine or Light, the Man of common 
sense will ascertain the cause of his "Nervousness" or 
" low spirits," and, in so far as the cause is under his 
control, will remove it — no remedy can counteract an 
evil by attacking the effect while the cause continues 
to produce it. Trimming the top of a Tree will not 
make it healthy and productive, while the worm is at 
its Boot — depurating the Stream will not make the 
water healthful while the poison is in the Spring — or, 
to use a simile that may be more apropos, when we 
learn that the Sunlight hurts our eyes, we do not stare 
at the Sun while applying remedies. 

There are two methods of applying Light as a 
remedy for disease — an indirect and a direct : by com- 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 265 

bining its virtues with Medicines, and by the applica- 
tion in " Sun-bath." 

Our reader will recall the fact that the ancients, by 
a secret process unknown to the Science of our day, 
but which we trust will yet be rediscovered, convert- 
ed ordinary wine and oil into "Fluid Gold," or "Pot- 
able Gold," by concentrating or focalizing Light and 
"fixing" it in them — this we cannot do, but many 
years ago, when our experiments with Light had con- 
vinced us that the "accepted" Scientists were in error 
in supposing it was the ray or rays reflected by an ob- 
ject that caused it to have the appearance of color — 
when we came to be assured that the color of an object 
was part of the object, given, not lent, to it by the 
Sunbeam; that a ray or rays passing into an object 
polarized its ether- conductor therein, thus making 
itself with its virtues an integral part of the object ; 
that objects thus treated by Light were endowed with 
the essential property or properties of the ray or rays 
that took up their abode, or "fixed" their chosen con- 
ductors, therein j that objects in themselves soluble in 
the fluids of the body and capable of imparting their 
properties to those fluids or to the more or less solid 
tissues, endowed with the virtues of certain rays, thus 
became efficacious as Medicines; that, in short, the 
virtues of Medicines were due to the Sunlight or its 
action. 

When we became thus convinced and assured, we 
conceived the plan of preparing certain Medicines 
under special rays of Sunlight, not to color them, for 
they already had received their color from Nature, 
but to augment the specific virtues of the ray used 

23 



266 



BLUE Am> BED LIGHT. 



within each Medicine, to increase its action in the de- 
sired direction. We have tested this plan most satis- 
factorily, and have established the correctness of our 
hypothesis, and now we prepare certain positive Med- 
icines exclusively under Red, and certain negative 
Medicines exclusively under Blue, Light. We find 
such Medicines to act with special effectiveness in har- 
mony with the rays applied externally, and attribute 
our most gratifying success in the direct employment 
of colored Glass to the assistance of Medicines so pre- 
pared. It would be manifestly out of place here to 
specify the Medicines thus treated, or to give the de- 
tails of our method. 

The direct mode of applying color-rays is, of course, 
by compelling the Sunlight to pass through Glass the 
pores of which are filled exclusively with ether that 
will conduct only the color-ray desired, and will 
" throw down " the rest. We have already explained 
how Glass is made to pass the Blue or the Red ray, 
and have stated that Glass cannot be made absolutely 
exclusive — that the Blue will permit fragmentary 
portions of the Indigo and the Violet, and an infini- 
tesimal amount of the Green, rays to slip through with 
the Blue ; and that the Red is equally friendly to its 
Orange and Yellow neighbors, while each absolutely 
excludes its opposite. As we have shown, in applying 
a color-ray to vegetable propagation, it will not do to 
exclude all but a single ray, and the same is in a 
measure, but not equally, true in the application of 
a color-ray to the Human Organism. Our colored 
plates show that we do at times, in .special cases, ex- 
clude all but one color, but, as it will be seen here- 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 267 

after, we usually only augment the proportion of one 
color while admitting the rest, by employing a num- 
ber of Blue or Red panes, more or less according to 
the exact effect we desire to produce, in conjunction 
with plain Glass. In either case, it will also be seen 
in due time, we are exceedingly careful not to carry 
the treatment to an extreme — we apply the ray in 
baths of greater or less power, and of greater or less 
duration, according to $he condition of the patient and 
the exact result we propose to attain. In the use of 
Medicine, no skillful and successful Physician need be 
told that the results achieved depend not more upon 
the qualities of the Medicines than upon the methods 
of administration and quantity administered — and the 
same is equally true of Light as a therapeutic means. 

As to the color to be employed, we can state the 
whole truth in a single sentence : To accelerate the 
Nervous System, in all cases of relaxation, the Red 
ray must be used, and to relax the Nervous System, 
in all cases of excessively accelerated tension, the 
Blue ray must be used. 

We have clearly demonstrated the fact that these 
two rays produce the two opposite forces, or principles 
of Light — the Red the positive, polarizing, integrat- 
ing force or principle, the Blue the negative, depolar- 
izing, disintegrating force or principle. We have also 
demonstrated that relaxation of the Nervous System 
means the relaxation of its tension, or the depolariza- 
tion, disintegration of the centres or conductors of 
Vital Force, and that excessively accelerated tension 
means the excessive polarization, integration of the 
centres or conductors of Vital Force. Hence, to 



2,6$ 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 



counteract the former we employ the Positive Ray, 
and to relieve the latter we employ the Negative 
Eay. 

But, as in the outside world, to act efficiently Na- 
ture must have everything in a favorable, concomitant 
condition, so in applying Nature's forces to Man we 
must be careful to have the surroundings conduce to, 
not hinder, the end sought. The room, the atmo- 
sphere, the companions and attendants, nay the very 
clothing must be harmonious ; there must be nothing 
antagonistic in drapings, furniture, atmosphere, asso- 
ciations, or in the patient's clothes, for just in propor- 
tion to the antagonism there must be difficulty in 
effecting the purposed cure. The matter of clothing 
is of the highest importance, for, as any one may 
see, a Black garment would "throw down" the color, 
whether Red or Blue — i. e., it would not permit the 
ray to reach the patient ; a Blue garment would repel 
the Red ray and a Red garment would repel the Blue 
ray. The clothes, inner and outer alike, should be 
either white or of the color applied. Where the dis- 
order is specially localized, promptly beneficial effect 
is often best secured by applying the ray directly to 
the part affected — any article of clothing intervening 
must weaken the action of the ray or delay it. 

When we first commenced our experiments with 
Light-rays upon the Organism in disease, we had a 
sash made to occupy the lower half of a window. Our 
first trials were of Red, Blue and Violet Glass, but 
we soon found that the Blue and Violet were so iden- 
tical in action that one would serve to represent the 
Actinic or Chemical principle, and, as Blue appeared 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 269 

to act with more promptness and uniformity, we dis- 
continued the use of Violet. The Red and Blue 
Rays, then, constitute the entire materia medica of 
the Light System of Therapeutics, or all that our 
experience and investigation as yet seem to indicate 
as desirable. 

As before stated, iterated and reiterated, the Red 
ray contains the positive, active, polarizing principle 
of Light, to which all Nature owes it power of com- 
bination j it is the positive element of Physical Force, 
the Attraction that enables Atoms to draw and cling 
to Atoms, forming Molecules, Molecules to draw and 
cling to Molecules, forming Masses of inorganic mat- 
ter ; it is the positive element, the Objective life ele- 
ment, of all Vital Force, that, in the shaping hand of 
the Subjective Life-principle, imparts to the particles 
of alimentary fluid that peculiar property that is called 
Vitality and converts it into the granular base of the 
Vital fluid ; that makes these particles combine into 
nuclei; that forms the nuclei into Cells; that causes the 
Cells by their Vital motion to combine into organized 
bodies ; that continues, still and always controlled and 
guided by the Subjective Life-principle, and assisted 
by the Blue co-worker, causes the simplest Cellular 
Organisms to unfold from type to type into the perfec- 
tion of material forms in the Human Organism, and 
that, now under the responsible Personified Soul, con- 
tinues to keep the Cells united, and to integrate with 
them the new particles that keep them in condition 
of Vitality ; hence, when the positive within the Hu- 
man Organism loses any portion of its power or influ- 
ence, we employ the same Red ray to recruit and 

23* 



270 BLUE AND BED LIGHT. 

strengthen it, or to cooperate with it, in the restoration 
of the equilibrium of health. 

And the Blue ray contains the negative, passive, 
depolarizing principle of Light, to which all Nature 
owes its power of dissolving exhausted, worn-out, 
effete forms; it is the negative element of Physical 
Force, the Repulsion that prevents the eternalization 
of material forms and the stoppage of Motion and 
Life that its opposite, the Red Attraction alone would 
produce; it is the negative, the death and decay, ele- 
ment of Vital Force, that, controlled by the Subjec- 
tive Life-principle, goes before her Red colaborer pre- 
paring the way for his renewing work ; but for the 
Blue, the Red would soon die himself, and Vital En- 
ergy would cease; old forms must be dissolved to 
make way for new, old, dying particles of continuous 
forms sloughed off to make place for fresh, new living 
particles — death and decay are just as essential to prog- 
ress and development, as are generation and creation, 
death and decay are the germ of generation and cre- 
ation, and the Blue element of Light is the source of 
death and decay; but for her, Nerve Force would 
become powerless for Life-work, as the Nerves and 
Ganglia, under the Red alone, would become set, 
fixed in tension and incapable of transmitting or con- 
ducting Vital Energy — hence, when we see a tendency 
to such an extreme of polarity in the Nervous System, 
we know that the negative force within requires assist- 
ance to prevent the fixity of death, and we employ its 
original author, the Blue ray, to go to its assistance. 

Knowing the properties of the two rays in visible 
Nature, we find by experience that they act within the 




APPLICATION OF RED LIGHT, Full Bath. 




APPLICATION OF RED LIGHT, Partial. 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 271 

Human Organism as without. Hence, the Red ray- 
awakens all the dormant Vitality in the Nervous Sys- 
tem, and, if administered at the right time and in the 
right way, produces healthful activity within when 
disease has reduced the Vitality below the health 
standard ; in all cases where external symptoms show 
that the Nervous System, or any one of its parts, is, 
as it were, neglecting or losing its vivifying, vitalizing 
work, we awaken and spur it to action by means of 
the Red ray. Of course, great care must be exercised 
not to let our agent become our master, not to let it 
overdo the work we desire — in other words, if applied 
in excess, either as to amount or time, the Red Light 
over-excites the Nervous System and may produce 
dangerous Fevers or other disorders that may prove 
as troublesome as the evil we are seeking to correct. 
We seldom employ Red Light to the exclusion of the 
other rays, and it should never be so employed except 
in extreme cases when prompt action is the first con- 
sideration, and then very guardedly — indeed, it is 
extremely dangerous to attempt the exclusive Red- 
bath without a skilful Physician to watch the results 
and prevent excess. In employing Red Light, as in 
the use of medicines, each case must dictate the amount 
and duration of the bath ; but, where a Physician is 
not available, it may be well at first to try alternate 
panes of Red and plain glass ; if this be found too ex- 
citing a proportion of one Red pane to three or four 
plain ones may be tried; in either case, the bath should 
not extend beyond a couple of hours. By thus com- 
mencing with moderate doses, an intelligent person 
may learn the amount and time of bath required. 



272 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



The same cautions are equally applicable in the use 
of Blue Light. Its action is as pronounced in redu- 
cing, as that of Red is in producing, Nervous excite- 
ment. If administered in small doses, say through a 
proportion of one Blue to four plain panes, it acts as 
a gentle sedative, creating a disposition to sleep, but 
so soon as this effect is reached the bath should cease. 
In cases of extreme Nerve-tension, when prompt action 
is imperatively demanded, we employ a pure Blue 
bath, but this is rare, and as there is always danger 
in so large a dose, we are very careful to note the 
momentary effects lest the patient be reduced to a 
condition of extreme prostration — sometimes, as may 
be readily understood, the lapse from intense excite- 
ment to as extreme prostration is sudden. As a 
general rule, a dose in ordinary cases would be a bath 
of about two hours through a window containing 
alternate panes of Blue and plain glass. It is safer, in 
aggravated cases especially, to consult a Physician, in 
the use of Light as in the use of Medicines. 

As stated earlier, we are in the habit of administer- 
ing Medicines, specially prepared for the purpose, in 
connection with the Red or Blue bath. 

Before citing a few of the cases in which we have most 
successfully employed Red and Blue Light, we deem it 
our duty to offer a few cautionary suggestions : 

In all ages and all climes, there have always been 
notorious empirics and quacks, who, without knowing 
either the Human Organism or even the first principles 
of Pathology or Therapeutics, have set themselves 
forward as wonder-working " Doctors " — their nos- 
trums are pronounced by themselves sovereign remedies 




APPLICATION OF BLUE LIGHT, Full Bath. 




APPLICATION OF BLUE LIGHT, Pariial. 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 273 

for certain maladies, sometimes they are positively de- 
clared to be " cure-alls," but usually perhaps they are 
simply worthless, often dangerous, seldom efficacious, 
compounds ; but, whatever their actual nature, it is 
extremely rash to risk the consequences of their use, 
no matter how many "Certificates" avouch their mar- 
velous properties. The tendency of Nature to equi- 
librium in some persons is so strong, that she restores 
them to health in spite of pernicious drugs, and when 
they recover the " Patent " or " Proprietary " nostrum 
receives the credit of Nature's work. But our present 
interest is not with these quacks. 

It was to be expected that, when the virtues of 
Light as a curative agent began to be known, some 
persons would seek wrongfully, fraudulently to make 
money out of the discovery. And we find this has 
actually occurred. It is not our purpose, as it is not 
our province, to mention any of these Light "Quacks" 
by name ; but it is our province to caution the public, 
in general terms, against attempts to defraud them. 
All we propose to say, however, in this work on the 
subject is that: 1. There is no special virtue in one 
Blue pane of glass over any other of the same shade ; 
Cobalt Blue is the best, and glass colored in the pro- 
cess of manufacture is better than painted glass, be- 
cause the pigment applied externally imparts more or 
less opacity to the glass. 2. There is no special ad- 
vantage in any particular method of arranging the 
glass in any particular sort of frame; an ordinary 
sash placed upright in the window-frame is as good as 
any other frame in any other position. 3. The Blue 
Ray cannot be focalized — it refuses to be modified, or 

s 



274 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



changed, or concentrated, by the most powerful lens. 
The Red may be focalized by a suitable lens, but not 
by any arrangement of a pane or panes of glass, while 
the Blue cannot be focalized by any means yet discover- 
ed. 4. The idea that, when the Blue ray passes 
through, and the others are " thrown down," because 
the rejected Calorific Ray heats the glass, there is any 
special opening of the pores to admit Electricity, is 
simply absurd. The Electricity of the atmosphere is 
no more disposed to pass through Blue than plain 
glass — glass is per se a non-conductor. 

But we must proceed to cite a few of the cases in 
which we have applied the Bed and Blue rays : 

I. Mrs. B., aged 44, had been, for many years, a 
sufferer from subacute Rheumatism ; aggravated by 
stormy or even threatening weather. Had tried 
numerous Physicians and a vast quantity of Medi- 
cine, without more than the most transient relief. 
"We placed her in a bath of alternate Blue and plain 
panes. Within one week the pains ceased, and within 
a fortnight the last symptom vanished. The stiffness 
of joints for a time returned occasionally in unfavor- 
able weather, but within three months all tendency to 
stiffness ceased, and now nearly five years have passed 
since the last most remote indication of Rheumatism. 

II. Mrs. L., a widow, aged 32, had been a severe 
sufferer, for several years, from Sciatica, with ex- 
treme tenderness in the lumbar region. We instruct- 
ed her to sit daily for about two hours in a bath of all 
Blue panes, with her back bared to the Light. After 
the third sitting, the tenderness along her spine was 
almost entirely gone, while the distress and pain in 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 275 

her hips sensibly abated. This treatment continued 
but for ten days, when all symptoms had disappeared. 
III. Mr. W., aged 52, was afflicted with a dull ache 
and stiffness in his right shoulder, partially extending 
to his finger-tips; at times, the ache and stiffness in 
his fingers were intense, especially in the joints; oc- 
casionally, he experienced wandering Rheumatic 
pains in his back, the sides of his chest, and across 
the hips— the trouble was, however, generally con- 
fined to his upper extremities. Blue glass, in one- 
half proportions, brought relief at the second sitting, 
and he continued to improve at each sitting; the pains 
and stiffness having disappeared, he neglected the 
baths (though he continued to take the Medicine), 
and there were indications of the return of the dif- 
ficulty; but, resuming the sittings, within three 
months the trouble had entirely vanished, and has 
not returned since, though a sense of tension occasion- 
ally causes him to imagine it is returning and he finds 
relief in a Blue bath. 

IV. Mrs. H., aged 35 years. This was a case of 
Consumption in the third stage, with both lungs in- 
volved, the left hepatized with mucous rale through 
the upper third, and crepitation in the apex of the 
right lung; sputa copious, amounting to half a pint in 
twenty-four hours; her expectoration was a yellowish, 
ropy and frothy mucus and pus, a portion of which 
sank in water ; she had severe night-sweats, and chills 
or " creeps" regularly at 11 o'clock, A. M., followed 
by fever with flushed cheeks; at times there was great 
dyspnoea and prostration— the latter so utter that she 
could sit up only an hour or two at a time. To in- 



■ <<> * I1.-W, HU i HH PI ».B.!H 



276 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



crease the difficulty of successful treatment, there was 
a strong hereditary predisposition : her father, mother, 
brother and several sisters had died with Consump- 
tion j but one sister survived who was strong and 
robust (though troubled somewhat with Rheumatism). 
I placed Mrs. H. under Bed baths regulated by the 
effects produced. In two weeks, improvement began 
to manifest itself in all her symptoms; in another 
week, the mucous rale became a submucus, then suc- 
cessively a crepitant and a bronchial ; soon respira- 
tion was resumed through the entire left lung, and 
the crepitation at the apex of the right lung disap- 
peared ; expectoration improved, and the cough be- 
came less frequent and less distressing; with the im- 
provement in these symptoms, the chills and fevers 
and the dyspnoea disappeared, and her strength rapidly 
increased ; in two months and a half the only remain- 
ing trouble was a slight hacking cough arising from 
an irritated throat. Mrs. H. was from Boston, and 
had come to Philadelphia, to her sister's home, ex- 
pressly for treatment; in the spring after her recovery 
she returned to her own home ; she was so entirely 
cured, that she continued to enjoy excellent health 
even throughout the ensuing winter, though the 
climate had never agreed with her before. Her hus- 
band was subsequently unfortunate in his business, and 
she had become so hearty that she undertook to help 
him by opening a boarding-house ; however, though 
still apparently well, she was overtaxing her recently 
acquired strength and, late in the fall, caught a severe 
cold which developed into Pneumonia which was very 
rapid in its advances ; she was brought again to this 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 277 

city, but too late for treatment — she was already a 
dying woman sustained solely by stimulants. 

In an active and extensive practice covering more 
than thirty years, we have never known or heard of a 
case of Consumption at so advanced a stage success- 
fully treated. Her recovery was absolute and entire, 
and her subsequent attack of Pneumonia and death 
in no way derogate from the proven fact that in Red 
Light is found an exceptionally reliable remedy, with 
some assistance from harmonious Medicines, for Con- 
sumption in almost its fatal stage. 

V. Master F., aged 8 years, had a tedious conva- 
lescence from a severe attack of Diphtheria, which 
was suddenly interrupted by a very severe attack of 
Paraplegia ; the paralysis was almost complete ; he 
could not walk, and could only stand when supported 
by a table or chair. We had him arrayed entirely in 
white and placed in strong Red baths, from one to 
two hours at a time; soon after being placed in the 
Red Light, he would fall asleep and a profuse perspi- 
ration burst forth, saturating his underclothing; in 
three weeks he was walking firmly, and in two months 
was perfectly well. More than two years have since 
elapsed, and he has continued in perfect health. 

VI. Master H., aged about 18 months. This was 
a severe case of Cholera Infantum, and Maras- 
mus brought on by teething in extremely warm 
weather ; he had been under treatment by an excellent 
Physician for some time, but was steadily declining. 
As the last faint hope we determined to try the Blue 
treatment ; he had been exceedingly irritable, but the 
Blue Light immediately soothed him into a gentle 

U 



278 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT, 



sleep, and he came out of the bath calm and refreshed. 
Two months' treatment made of him a fine, healthy- 
looking child, with full, rosy cheeks and happy tem- 
per. We are confident that but for the Blue ray this 
child must have died — no ordinary treatment could 
have saved him. 

But the Blue Light was to effect farther wonders in 
him : his anterior frontinal had shown no evidence of 
closing, and one year subsequent to the above, while 
he was with his parents at the Seashore, he became 
suddenly very ill, the difficulty being confined to the 
Brain ; the cerebral derangement increasing, the Phy- 
sician in attendance advised the parents to hasten to 
Philadelphia and take him to their family Physician, 
saying that he had done all he could, and unless re- 
lieved he could not live forty-eight hours ; they sent a 
messenger to see us, and we ordered the child to Phil- 
adelphia without delay. Upon his arrival, we found 
he had actual Cerebral Meningitis, with strong 
indications of Effusion ; we placed him again under 
Blue Light treatment, and the most favorable effects 
were immediate ; in one week, he had so far recovered 
that his parents, with our consent, returned to the Sea- 
shore. This child is now a fine, rosy-cheeked boy. 

VII. Mr. R., 45 years of age, an overtaxed and 
(previous to treatment) prematurely worn-out man of 
business ; the house of which he was principal became 
involved in the financial troubles that grew out of the 
panic that burst upon and ran riot through the coun- 
try in 1873, and his anxieties and efforts to save his 
credit and standing produced an exhausting strain 
upon his mind, indeed the actual physical strain of 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 279 

sleepless nights and ceaseless work was enough to 
break him down — mind and body were continuously 
on the rack, he could neither eat nor sleep normally, 
and at last complete physical exhaustion and Nervous 
prostration naturally came upon him, for Nature 
would endure no more. The first warning was severe 
pains in the back of his head, soon followed by short- 
ness of breath, flutterings of heart, compressible pulse, 
loss of appetite, constipation and phosphatic urine. 
He was properly advised, at the first token of the ap- 
proximating peril, to leave business for a time and 
seek relief in travel ; this advice he naturally was loth 
to follow, on account of the condition of his business, 
which he felt would soon be overwhelmed by the gen- 
eral financial ruin without his head to guide. Failing 
to persuade him to this, unquestionably the wisest, 
course, we determined to try the Red Light treatment, 
especially as his prostration was unattended by any 
indication of morbid irritability, and in all our expe- 
rience as a Physician, we have never witnessed more 
remarkable beneficial results than were at once pro- 
duced by the Ked ray in this case. The very first 
bath had the most encouraging effect — it acted as a 
tonic botli upon mind and body, dispelled his gloomy 
apprehensions and gave vigor to his physical func- 
tions. Commencing with small doses, we gradually 
increased them until assured that w r e had reached the 
most effective dose in proportion of Red to plain 
panes and in length of bath. [In Light as in Med- 
icine there can be no invariable standard for doses, 
determined alone by the symptoms ; in each case, the 
Physician must take into account the tone of body, 



280 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



the normal tension of the individual Nervous System 
and the entire temperament of the patient in health — 
a proper dose for one often proves insufficient, for a 
second and an overdose for a third, even where the 
symptoms are identical.] Mr. R. rapidly improved, 
notwithstanding his continued attention to business. 
From the first, he slept more refreshingly, ate with 
better relish, his bowels became regular, and the secre- 
tions of his kidneys recovered the healthy appearance. 
Three weeks' treatment sufficed, and there have been 
no signs of relapse. 

VIII. Mr. T., aged 35 ; in consequence of long-con- 
tinued excessive physical and mental exertion, his Ner- 
vous System was entirely disordered ; unlike Mr. R., 
the derangement manifested itself in "Nervousness" 
and trying irritability; he could not sleep at night, 
was disturbed by frightful dreams ; his appetite was 
variable, sometimes ravenous, at others the very sight 
of food was an annoyance ; his bowels varied, too, at 
times constipated, at others lax ; he had frequent pains 
in his head, the least excitement unnerved him, and 
he was inclined to extreme despondency. His irrita- 
bility forbade Red Light, and we determined to ad- 
minister Blue Light with Red Light Medicine. The 
beneficial results were immediate; his entire system 
improved rapidly; five baths actually restored a 
healthy tone to his Nervous System, and he has since 
experienced no symptoms, even of " Nervousness," 
though his life is one of constant physical and mental 
activity. 

IX. Mrs. G., aged 40 years, was worn out by over- 
gestation and too-long nursing. Her Nervous Sys- 



HOW TO APPLY LIGHT. 281 

tern was so shattered that she was compelled to lie 
abed a considerable part of the day ; the most pro- 
nounced symptoms were intense spinal irritation, al- 
most constant "Nervousness/' and frequent palpita- 
tions of the heart; she had no appetite, and evinced 
very little interest in those domestic duties that had 
always been her delight hitherto. In her case, the 
prostration and listlessness called for Red Light, but 
her extreme susceptibility to the least excitement, with 
the tendency to palpitation, would be aggravated 
thereby — therefore, we employed Blue baths with 
Eed Light Medicine. Two months' treatment re- 
stored her to perfect health which has continued to 
the present time ; she says that she " was never bet- 
ter in her life." We should remark here that Mrs. 
G. ? s normal temperament is calm, with marked sen- 
sitiveness to external influences — -just the sort of sys- 
tem that often baffles medical skill, and that demands 
the utmost caution, and we feel confident that her re- 
covery would have been tedious under any purely 
medicinal treatment. 

X. Mrs. S., 45 years of age, had naturally a frail 
constitution, was from youth weak and delicate, with 
a tendency to Nervous prostration ; easily despondent, 
and ready to " give up" when ill. Her natural weak- 
ness had resulted in, and been augmented by, Uterine 
difficulties which had continued for ten years, and had 
at last broken down her entire system when she called 
on us for professional advice. Her condition was such 
that the slightest exertion completely overcame her 
and sent her to bed for days at a time ; the influence 
of "the change of life" had brought on the crisis, in 
24* 



282 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



an illness that kept her bedfast, which was directly 
attributed to a brief visit to the Centennial Exhi- 
bition ; but this last was but a feather in the balance 
— the attack was impending and the excitement of the 
visit only hastened it. We applied the Blue and 
Red Light treatment, alternating, not at equal inter- 
vals, but according to variations in her symptoms. 
Her recovery was rapid and permanent — a whole day 
at the Centennial some time afterwards did not over- 
fatigue her. She has enjoyed better health uniformly 
since the treatment than ever before. 

Bui, why should we multiply illustrative cases ? we 
have cited only ten, and these are all, in their distinc- 
tive features, only typical cases of classes treated. To 
multiply citations would but swell our little work 
without strengthening its effect or advancing its pur- 
pose to show that the Light-rays are unrivalled as 
remedial agents in the cure of diseases of almost all 
classes, especially those more directly incident to ac- 
celerated or relaxed Nerve action. 

In closing this chapter, we must reiterate our decla- 
ration that we firmly believe and earnestly hope that 
Sunlight and its rays are destined to become the 
Universal Medicine. Light is God's grandest gift 
to Man, and the half is not yet known of its incalcu- 
lable worth. " Truth is mighty and must prevail !" 
Light is mighty — it is truth — and must prevail over 
prejudice and self-interest, to the glory of its Source, 
God, and the inestimable benefit of His creatures of 
the Human race ! 



CHAPTER IX. 

LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 

A man may by observation or by experiments, or 
by both, discover great truths in Nature, and yet not 
be a Scientist ; a man may be a Scientist of high re- 
pute, with all the theories of popular Science at his 
tongue's end or pen-tip, and be unable to discover 
great truths or even to distinguish a truth, a fact, 
among theories. Because a great truth, or fact, in 
Nature is discovered by one who shows, in his at- 
tempts to impart his discovery to others, that he is not 
a Scientist, is it an evidence of mental acuteness, of 
superior Scientific knowledge, to reject the truth? 
Suppose eminent Scientists have for years been ex- 
perimenting in the same direction only to fail — sup- 
pose they have actually woven whole webs of theories 
in conflict with the truth, and demonstrated those 
theories by innumerable experiments that have re- 
sulted only in showing that the theorists did not dis- 
cover the truth simply because their experiments were 
guided by preconceived notions — suppose, even, that 
the newly discovered truth is calculated to explode 
the theoretic Science of a century and a half's growth ! 
What then ? Must we reject the truth in the interest 
of theoretic Science? or, must we reject the truth sim- 
ply because neither Tyndall, nor Huxley, nor Schel- 
len, nor some other Scientific "authority" discovered 

283 



284 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



it? But, suppose our non-Scientific discoverer has 
demonstrated his truth by experiments that have pro- 
duced results that will not, cannot be gainsaid ! and 
suppose that truth is calculated to prove a blessing to 
mankind, an inestimable advantage to us, and our 
land, and to the world ! Must we, dare we, reject or 
discredit the truth, decry the discoverer, rob ourselves 
and our land and the world of the benefits of the dis- 
covery — and that on no better ground than the non- 
discovery of the truth by a Scientist, or the blunders of 
the discoverer in his effort to explain his discovery ? 

Nay, rather, let us accept the truth and be grateful 
to its discoverer! We shall be no less worthy to 
rank with Scientists because we accept a truth at the 
hands of a non-Scientific discoverer ! And so far as 
the theoretic Science that is wounded by this truth is 
concerned, it will be the better for the wound — like 
the tree or the vine that the husbandman prunes for 
its good, Science cannot suffer by having some of its 
theories pruned away by the sharp knife of truth, even 
if an unscientific hand applies the knife ! 

We believe that General Pleasonton is entitled to 
the grateful esteem of all men, Scientific and unscien- 
tific alike. He has rediscovered a great, important 
truth, and this truth when it comes to be understood 
in all its possible applications will prove the greatest 
blessing, to the entire world, of the nineteenth cen- 
tury. That the General is utterly and absolutely 
mistaken in his theories in attempting to account 
for the virtues of Blue Light is indubitable, but 
the virtues are real no less ! That he does not know 
why or how Blue Light does certain things, does not 



LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 285 

derogate the high honor due him for demonstrating 
that it really does them. That he attributes to the 
shy the virtues of the Blue Bay of Sunlight may 
readily be pardoned in consideration of the true ser- 
vice he has rendered to "the True Science of 
Light" in directing attention to those virtues and 
inducing others to investigate the great subject — even 
his mistakes can be productive only of good results in 
inviting investigation. No one disputes Sir Isaac 
Newton's title to grateful admiration because some 
of his theories have been disproved by later researches, 
nor because his greatest discoveries have been found 
to have been forgotten truths known centuries before. 

We have already shown that Light is the source of 
Vegetable, as of all, Life, and have not only demon- 
strated that the Blue ray has an important mission, 
which it faithfully fulfils, in the economy of Nature, 
but have explained how it performs its work. But, 
having come now specifically to consider "Light in the 
"Vegetable Kingdom," we shall be pardoned for such 
repetitions as are unavoidable to make this branch of 
our subject clear and this chapter comprehensive. 

It must be distinctly recollected that the chief dif- 
ference between Vegetable, or Still, and Animal, or 
Active, Life, is that : In the one, the Vital Force acts 
entirely from without, without responsive or coopera- 
tive action from within ; in the other, the Vital Force 
establishes a centre of vitality within, and by reason 
of this centre, the Animal responds or cooperates in 
the processes of Nutrition, etc. In the plant, the Sun 
is the actor, the plant merely the recipient of the 
action ; in the Animal, the Nervous System, deriving 



286 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



its power from the only original source of Vital Dy- 
namics, the Celestial Sim, is the actor, with a more 
and more complete (in the successive types) system of 
motive machinery acted upon and cooperating with 
the Nervous-centre. Bearing this difference in mind, 
we understand why the members of the Vegetable 
Kingdom, as a rule, live only in the Sunshine — it is 
their life in a special sense; it is essential to every 
operation in them, for it performs every operation ; 
the Sun feeds the plants, eliminates mischievous ele- 
ments from its food, assimilates the nutritive elements, 
applies the nutritive products, and removes the excre- 
mentitious matter (so to speak). 

Now, note : in these operations, the Sun is the 
actor — not one Eay or two, but the seven rays, nay 
the nine, all have their proportion of work to perform 
in the unfoldment of life in a plant, and in the devel- 
opment of the root, stalk, branches, leaves and blos- 
soms, which manifest that life. The , Blue ray and 
its Actinic associates no doubt have a large propor- 
tion of the work devolved upon them — -we reasonably 
infer this from the fact that they form 100 out of 170 
parts of every Sunbeam, as it reaches the earth ; but 
whatever its proportion of the work, it must perform 
that and no more. The Blue, with all its Actinic aid- 
ers, cannot take the place of the Red as the polar, in- 
tegrating ray ; nor of the Yellow as the supplier of 
the chlorophyl that colors the foliage ; nor even of the 
colorless Calorific as the imparter of the genial warmth 
that is as essential to plant-life as food itself — e. g., 
the chemical properties of Sunlight are just as active 
in winter as in summer, only the Calorific are over- 



LIGHT W THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 287 

borne by the cold, and plants live not in winter but in 
summer; and, as General Pleasonton himself declares, 
vegetation is far more luxuriant in the tropics than 
in temperate regions, although the chemical properties 
are not more prompt or constant there. We believe 
that the Orange and even the Green rays are not idle 
spectators in Nature's laboratory, though their special 
functions have not been identified as yet ; the Indigo 
and Violet are more charged with actinism than the 
Blue, aud possibly this is why Blue is preferred in 
vegetable propagation. 

We have declared our conviction that when the 
Human Organism is in a state of harmony or equilib- 
rium, the Sunlight, pure, simple, undivided, is better 
than any single ray as a preserver and promoter of 
that harmony or equilibrium which is health, and 
that, only when that equilibrium is disturbed, must 
we employ the ray best calculated to restore it.' And 
we believe the same is true in regard to Animals and 
Vegetables. Then, asks a critic, how do you account 
for the success of General Pleasonton? With little 
difficulty : He did not exclude the other rays, but 
augmented the Blue one-eighth ; this increased 'the 
supply of food, and at the same time increased the 
appetite, or demand, for the food— the first by sepa- 
rating a larger amount of nutritive matter from the 
soil and atmosphere, and the second by accelerating 
the disintegration of exhausted particles from the 
vines; farther, it facilitated the transformation of ele- 
ments from stage to stage until the ripened fruit was 
ready to be plucked ; but it was the Red ray, passing 
in with the undivided Sunlight through the plain 



288 



BLUE AND BED LIGHT 1 . 



panes, that fed the vines with the food prepared by 
the Blue, and the Yellow that produced the coloring 
for the leaves, and the other rays fulfilled their re- 
spective functions. We doubt much whether the aug- 
. mentation of the Blue in the Light admitted to a 
Greenhouse (or Bluehouse perhaps we should say), for 
fruit-culture will not eventually prove as much of an 
injury to the fruit as overfeeding is to Animals and 
Men — but of this we know nothing from personal 
observation, as our duties in caring for the sick leave 
us little time to practice or even to observe fruit or 
vegetable culture. This we do know, however, that 
over-large fruit is never as palatable as the medium, 
nor indeed have we a special liking for " forced " pro- 
ducts of any sort. 

It must be noted that Professor Draper, Mr. Glad- 
stone, and other eminent Scientists have clearly de- 
monstrated the impossibility of cultivating grain or 
vegetables under a single color of Light, and General 
Pleasonton did not attempt this ; he simply, we re- 
peat, by putting one Blue pane to every seven plain 
ones, increased the Blue element of the Light within 
his grapery one-eighth. 

Before proceeding to speak connectedly of plant- 
development, we must notice one other Pleasontonian 
idea, viz. : " The magnetic, electric and thermic powers 
of the Sun's ray reside in the violet ray, which is a 
compound of the blue and red rays." After a careful 
second reading of the General's argument, we are at a 
loss to understand how he discovers anything thermic 
in the Violet, or gets the Violet from the combination 
of the Blue and Eed. That these two colors blended 



LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 289 

in certain proportions do produce a Violet color — but 
the Violet ray has not a trace of calorific character, 
and no process that we know of can get heat out of it ; 
filtered through a Violet glass it is purely actinic and 
much cooler than solid Sunlight, very much cooler 
than the Red, or even the Yellow ; but, farther, the 
Red is the least refrangible of all the color-rays, and 
the Blue is the fifth of the scale — now, in common 
sense, how can a combination of these two produce 
the most refrangible, the seventh of the scale? That 
negative electricity "resides" in the Violet ray, or 
rather in the four actinic rays, we have shown, though 
perhaps "resides" is not the word to express the cor- 
rect idea ; still, accepting the " residence," how can 
the dual force Magnetism " reside " in one ray ? how 
can positive electricity "reside" with negative in the 
same ray ? In a bar of iron or steel, when magnetized, 
the two electricities take the opposite ends, called the 
poles, with a neutral equator midway ; is the Violet 
ray, then, thus magnetized? We fear the General 
claims more for the Violet than it ever claims for 
itself. This is scarcely more remarkable, however, 
than his theory that Electricity is the agent of Light 
in promoting vegetable growth and that heat is the 
product of Electricity, when we consider that in Jan- 
uary the mean tension of Atmospheric Electricity is 
605°, while in July it is but 49°, as shown in M. 
Quetelet's table cited on page 107 ; nor is this as re- 
markable as the discovery that the " Blue color of the 
s%" has functions. The Blue ray of the Sunbeam 
does deoxygenate, but even it must have the aid of the 
Red to sustain any sort of life ; and, moreover, oxygen 
25 T 



290 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



is not the property of the Blue, it belongs to the Red, 
as we have demonstrated. We admit that " without 
these chemical powers [the properties of the actinic 
rays] there could be no vegetation." But neither 
could there be without the polar Red. or the colorless 
Calorific — the latter may be substituted by artificial 
heat, as in a Hot-house, but we know of no substitute 
for the Red. The General's plan of operations is 
nearer correct than his explanations : as we have ex- 
plained, he admits all the rays to do their portions of 
the work. By-the-way, we admit that there is heat 
generated in the earth, as there is in the Human Or- 
ganism and in the Animal — the source is the same in 
all, Light : its dual forces in active exercise generate 
heat, when in the Animal, in Man or in the earth ; 
and the opposite Electricities do "evolve" (or evome) 
heat in coming together, but here too the two Light- 
forces are in action. It is the faculty of generating 
heat within the body, consequent upon the presence 
of a life-centre within, that gives to Animals and Man 
a more certain tenure of life than plants ; the latter 
having no internal warmth are nipped by the first 
frost — some forms of Animal-life in which the heating 
apparatus are not developed cannot stand the least 
cold, and upon the approach of winter suspend life 
until the return of Sunwarmth, much as what we call 
perennial plants do. 

We have seen that, as soon as God's representative, 
Light, had precipitated Earth from the waters under 
the firmament, and had thus caused the " dry land" to 
"appear" from their midst, the Earth was made to 
" bring forth grass, the herb yielding seed, and the 



LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 291 

fruit-tree yielding fruit after his kind, whose seed is 
in itself, upon the Earth. " We have demonstrated 
that it was the action of the two hands of Light upon 
and within the Earth that enabled it to bring forth, 
or give forth vegetation. This demonstration included 
evidence that the dymanual Life-principle was more 
essential to the development of vegetation than the 
seed ; for it created the seed-germs from the inorganic 
elements of the soil when as yet there was no grass, 
herb or fruit-tree to yield seed " after his kind ;" that 
if all vegetation were blotted out, this Life-principle 
could again produce the myriads of species from the 
same original elements by the same original processes, 
while without this dymanual Life-principle no one 
species could perpetuate or renew or repeat itself — 
without either hand of Light, or without the guiding 
principle, no seed could be made to germinate and 
develope into the blade, the stalk, the leaf, the blos- 
som, etc. At the first evolution of a plant-form, this 
mighty Life-principle, with its two objective hands, 
had to form the seed-germs, and then cause them to 
unfold to manifest its power as God's worker, and 
then it made provision for the continuance and per- 
petuation of all the species by imparting to each the 
Organs of Reproduction ; but we saw that plants, not 
having functions of locomotion, are left dependent 
upon means without themselves for the necessary cop- 
ulation ; then, when the new life is implanted in the 
germ-cell, the development into a perfect germ goes 
on, independent of outside interference ; but when the 
germ is to be made to unfold, some intellect must see 
that the soil, temperature, and general auxiliary sur- 



292 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



roundings are favorable, especially if it be a plant that 
we deem worthy of cultivation (i. e., evolution into 
higher perfection), in which case Man takes a hand in 
the soil -preparation, seed-planting, and other processes 
of cultivation, otherwise the great Life-principle still 
directs ; but even if Man works the soil, plants the 
seed, harrows and tends the unfolding plant-life, the 
germ cannot be made to germinate without the direct 
assistance of the two objective hands of Light — the 
one to break up, dissolve the seed-particles, the other 
to refix, repolarize the particles into the new forms, 
each "after his kind;" in this germinating process the 
two Light-forces are within the germ, placed there as 
the germ-life essence, but, as soon as the young plant 
peeps forth out of the ground, the Sunbeam becomes 
the actor with its two principles, under the Life-prin- 
ciple, the one preparing the nutritive materials, draw- 
ing them from the soil, the water, the air, etc., the 
other "fixing" these materials, feeding the plant; 
then, in the continuous processes of development, the 
same two hands must continue the one to provide food 
for the other to posite, assimilating, eliminating, remov- 
ing the excretory matter, and thus carrying the plant to 
its completed development ; then, if it be a plant that 
Man or Animal uses, he destroys, not the particles, 
but the form, and the same two forces continue to act 
in Man or Animal, and after these forces within Man 
or Animal are done with the respective ingredient- 
particles and cast them forth, the same forces still act 
in restoring the particles to the soil, water, air, etc., 
to be again applied in Life-unfold men t ; or, if it be a 
plant not applicable to Human or Animal use, the 



LIGHT IN THE VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 293 

same two forces proceed to disintegrate its particles, it 
decays, and to convert them to new developments. 
Thus, always under the Life-principle, the two hands 
ever act, whether directly in the Sunbeam, in the 
germ, or in the Vital Force of Animate Nature, and 
the entire economy of Nature ever goes forward in 
motion, motion, change, change, decay and regener- 
ation — but all the time, there is but one Life-prin- 
ciple variously unfolded, but one dymanual objective 
force working from various centres. 

Thus, we find seven (or nine) rays, two principles, 
one Light. Nature has regulated the proportions of 
the several rays, the powers of the separate principles, 
and decreed that the two shall work in harmony or 
equilibrium as one Light-power. If, under any influ- 
ence, either force exceed its share of the aggregate 
work of Light, we observe at once that life is im- 
periled — in plant, Animal or Man, and, if Nature 
require our assistance, we render it by sending a 
special messenger to strengthen the weaker force or 
to check the stronger — it is but the part of wisdom, 
when we know the source of each force, and have that 
source at command, to apply that source : if it be the 
negative force we wish to reinforce, we employ the 
Blue, Indigo or Violet, if the positive force demands 
help we employ the Red. 

This is the whole secret of the true utilization of 
Light-rays, whether in Vegetable, Animal or Human 
Life : we must employ the Red or the Blue, or which- 
ever ray we find best adapted, to assist, not supplant, 
Nature, to restore, not subvert, Equilibrium. We 
firmly believe that Man, Animal or Plant, when in 

25* 



294 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



health, requires the pure, unadulterated, undiluted 
Sunlight ; when disease indicates the loss of equilib- 
rium within, and then alone, we should apply the ray 
or rays that will assist in restoring health, and as soon 
as we have attained the desired end, health, the treat- 
ment should cease, and it should be sustained with 
pure Light, pure Air, pure Water. We should as 
soon modify or alter the air we breathe by increasing 
the amount of Oxygen or Nitrogen, as modify or alter 
the Light, when the Organism is in a condition of 
health — we do modify or alter the air when impure, 
and so we would modify or alter Light when impure, 
not otherwise. Nature provides stimulants in suf- 
ficient variety and sufficient amount for healthy Men, 
Animals and Vegetation, and only when her supply 
fails shall we attempt to make up the deficiency. 

In the ensuing chapter, with which we close our 
present work, we propose to review the ground we 
have traversed and sum up the lessons we believe we 
have imparted. 



CHAPTER X. 

LIGHT THE SOLE SOURCE OF LIFE— LIGHT THE 
DEVELOPER OF MATERIAL FORMS— FORMS DE- 
VELOPED SOLELY TO MANIFEST LIFE— LIGHT 
NATURE'S MEANS OF PRESERVING LIFE— 
HENCE, LIGHT NATURE'S MEANS OF BANISH- 
ING DISEASE BY RESTORING THE EQUILIB- 
RIUM THAT CONSTITUTES HEALTH. 

We have established the important Fact that Light 
is Nature's Specific for Disease — that is, Nature 
employs no other means or instrumentality in the cure 
of Disease. But let us take a brief survey of the 
ground we have traversed, and note the main facts 
that we have demonstrated : 

Light is the original Source of Life. Motion is 
Life and Light is the Universal Motor. There is no 
force in Nature that is not directly derived from 
Light: 1. the Physical Forces, Attraction and Re- 
pulsion, with all their modifications, are the positive 
and negative principles of Light, acting in matter — 
they are the Objective Forces of Light as they operate 
in creating and dissolving inorganic material forms. 
2. The Vital Forces that constitute what we call Life 
— are the same positive and negative principles of 
Light acting in organic forms, acting in Still or 
Vegetable Life only from without and in Animals and 
Man becoming Nerve Forces because in each Active 

295 



296 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



or Animate Life-form there is established a Nervous 
System as a centre of Vital Energy. Like the Phy- 
sical Forces, the ordinary Vital or Nerve Forces are 
Objective, and are derived from the great Light-source 
and Light-power, the Celestial Sun, through the Ob- 
jective Sun of our Solar System; the Objective Sun is 
not the Source of Light, but the reservoir and dis- 
seminator of Light to the worlds of its System, and of 
the Nervous System in Animals and Man the same is 
true — it is the receiver and dispenser of Vital Energy 
for the Organism. 3. The Subjective Life-principle is 
an emanation from the Celestial Sun ; as that original 
Luminary controls the Astral Suns in their motions 
in space, so this Life-principle is ever and everywhere 
present, guiding and directing the dissolution of old 
and the generation of new forms, according to estab- 
lished types. 

When Jehovah first decreed the creation, He con- 
stituted Light His agent, representative, manifester in 
the creation of the Universal System : all was chaos — 
infinite Space was one vast, immeasurable, incompre- 
hensible abyss of absolute, utter darkness ; but when 
Light came forth in response to the Divine Will, 
forthwith all was changed : darkness gave place to 
effulgence; ugliness to beauty; voidness, vacuity to 
orderly fullness; formlessness to Suns and Planets; 
stillness, inertia to motion; boundless death to count- 
less manifestations of Life. Light was the active pro- 
ducer of all this glorious change, and Light alone pre- 
vents the return of the universe to chaotic darkness 
and stillness and death. Time began, was separated 
from Eternity when God said " Let there be Light, 



LIGHT THE SOLE SOURCE OF LIFE, ETC. 297 

and Light was," and Creation began with Time; 
Creation is coeval with Time — it began, and can only 
end, with Time ; as Time rolls on from age to age, 
Creation goes forward from stage to stage : Light 
begot and maintains Time, and Light began and con- 
tinues Creation. But Time is not eternal, it shall 
cease, shall be engulphed in Eternity, and Creation is 
not eternal, it shall cease, shall be engulphed in chaos. 
Time is for material existences to be measured and 
gauged by — there is " a Time to be born and a Time 
to die," physically, and Creation is a work of material 
development — where there is death there must be 
Creation or material forms and physical life would 
cease, Life would no longer be manifested in matter. 
There is no Time to die in the Celestial World — 
there is an Eternity of Life there, and there is no 
Creation there, because "flesh and blood cannot in- 
herit the kingdom of heaven " — there are no material, 
" corruptible " bodies there to die and decay and be 
regenerated. Time and Creation belong only to the 
material world, because only in the material world 
are beginnings and endings and renewals. There is 
Life in the Celestial World, but no death, hence no 
Creation — there is Eternity there but no Time, all is 
Eternal Life in that World because the Harmonious 
Light of Health and Life shines unceasingly there — 
God is Light, the Light of Life, the Light of Heaven. 
Creation was designed to manifest the Light of Life 
in Objective Form. When God decreed Creation, and 
His Word proclaimed it, it was not to produce a new 
Life-principle — He was the Light of Life, self-existent 
from Eternity, and there could be no new Life, for 



298 



BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 



" He filleth Eternity." When the Omnipotent Light 
of Life, by His Supreme Will, decreed Creation, His 
sole purpose was to manifest the Light of Life in Ob- 
jective Form — material Creation is simply and purely 
the Objective manifestation of the Light of Life. The 
Suns, Moons, Stars are manifestations of Light — the 
Planets, or Peopled Worlds, with all their countless 
living forms or bodies, are manifestations of Light, the 
Light of Life ! 

Without recapitulating in detail, let the reader 
recollect that from the first manifestation of Light in 
Creation, the one ultimate purpose of Jehovah was 
the manifestation of the Light of Life in personal 
form : in short, that the successive forms from the 
lowest to the highest — Man — were but steps in the 
progressive visible unfoldment of Life. The material 
forms were developed, not for themselves, but for the 
unfoldment of Life. Recollecting this, bearing it con- 
stantly in mind, we can the more readily understand 
how with Man the work of development ceased. 
Matter was incapable of higher development — no 
grander, more perfect material casket for the Light 
of Life could be evolved — material development had 
reached its zenith, and it only remained to " breathe 
into his nostrils the breath of Life," when " Man be- 
came a Living Soul," " in the image, after the like- 
ness " of God Himself — that is, with Attributes or 
Faculties within him that could be unfolded into so 
high a degree of perfection as to make Man Godlike. 
Of course, as we have seen, the material form of Man 
could not be " in the image " or " after the likeness " 
of God, who " is a Spirit." No amount of develop- 



LIGHT THE SOLE SOURCE OF LIFE, ETC. 299 

ment could make " corruptible flesh and blood " like 
God. 

Hence, " Man is not a material body " that is only 
his casket — " Man became a Living Soul," and the 
"Soul is Man." And hence, for Man to lose his Soul 
is to lose himself. 

The Light of Life is Eternal — Immortal! Life 
cannot cease — the body dies, when the Light of Life, 
the Life-principle, ceases to occupy the casket. This 
is true of the simplest plant, the humblest worm, no 
less than of the noblest Human Organism, and of 
the noblest Human Organism no less than of the 
humblest worm and the simplest plant. Realizing 
this, that the body is only the perishable, nay perish- 
ing, casket for the temporally habitation of Man, the 
Soul, we have dwelt at considerable length, and re- 
peatedly upon the importance of Man's cultivation of 
the Subjective Faculties of his Soul — this was the one 
and only purpose for which he was made, this the one 
duty God enjoins upon Man. The care of the body is 
a duty, but only to fit it for the higher development 
of "the inner Man." "God is Light"— "the Light 
of Life!" "Know ye not that your body is the temple 

of the Living God? If any man defile the 

temple of God, him shall God destroy; for the temple 

of God is holy, which temple ye are! 

Therefore, glorify God in your body, and in your 
spirit, which are God's!" Man is called a responsible 
being because the Almighty Jehovah has implanted in 
him the germ of Godliness, Faculties which if dili- 
gently and devoutly unfolded, until they shape and 
control the Objective life, will elevate him and make 



300 



BLUE AND EED LIGHT. 



him worthy to be regarded by God Himself as " in 
His image and after His likeness " — and He has as- 
signed to Man himself the duty of cultivating and un- 
folding these high and holy Faculties. When Paul 
calls the Human body the temple of God, he means 
no more and no less than that these Faculties of Man's 
Soul are Godlike, are Divine. Just in proportion as 
these Faculties are unfolded and rule the Organism, 
Man becomes Godlike: — the "child of Light" is the 
" child of God/ 7 for " God is Light," God is " the same 
yesterday and to-day and forever" — Redemption is 
but the crowning act of Creation, the act that opens 
the way for Man to fulfil the grand, original purpose 
of God in Creation, the development of Godlike Men 
to manifest Him; Christ was the perfect realization of 
" the Light of Life," a God manifested in the flesh," the 
"Word made flesh," "Emanuel," "the Son of God." 
Christ was not only sent to be our example in Life- 
culture but our Helper. But of this we have spoken 
very fully in earlier chapters. 

The duty of taking care of our bodies is second 
only to the highest duty of Soul-culture — in some 
senses it is part of that higher duty. We must 
"glorify God" not only in "our spirits," but in "our 
bodies" — the first by cultivating our Godlike Spirit- 
ual Faculties, the second by keeping our bodies free 
from every taint of sin and of disease. But we can- 
not entirely escape sin, nor can we keep free of disease 
— then, let us strive to fulfil our duty as nearly as we 
may by living soberly, wisely and in conformity with 
the laws of God's two Revelations of His Will, in the 
Book of Nature and in the Book of Books, the Bible 



LIGHT THE SOLE SOUECE OF LIFE, ETC. 301 

— both are from God : in the one, His agent and rep- 
resentative, Light, has manifested His Will, directly, 
in the other, the same agent and representative has 
illuminated Men to declare His Will. May the same 
agent and representative of Jehovah illuminate us to 
read aright His Will in both Revelations, and to com- 
prehend the lessons imparted therein ! 

As there is one God, so there is one Life-principle — 
"God is Light," "the Light of Life," and Light is 
the Life-principle. God manifests himself in Light, 
and Light manifests itself in Life, and Life manifests 
itself in material forms. Hence, the Life manifested 
in Vegetation, in Animals and in Man, is alike in its 
source and origin, which is Light. The Light of Life 
as witnessed in Heaven is perfect in Harmony, but as 
manifested in material forms, the law of Harmony is 
modified into the law of Compensation and Equili- 
bration, because material forms must necessarily be 
continually decaying and renewing; perfect Harmony 
would not permit decay, and where there is no decay, 
there can be no renewal. The law of Compensation 
and Equilibration consists simply in maintaining an 
equilibrium between the dual forces of Light, and this 
is done by the Life-principle, which is Subjective, i. e., 
invisible to the physical eye, and is only recognized 
Objectively in the operations of the Objective Forces, 
Physical or Vital. In the exterior world, these forces 
are forever at work, under the supervision of the Life- 
principle, dissolving and creating. In Man, they are 
constantly at work, under the Individualized Life- 
principle, the Soul, disintegrating effete particles and 
integrating new particles, so as to keep the tissues, the 

26 



302 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



Organs, the entire System in a healthful condition for 
the unfoldment of Soul-Life within. In the external 
world, so long as the two forces work in equilibrium, 
the one dissolving only exhausted forms and the other 
creating new forms to take their places, Nature moves 
forward in orderly beauty ; in Man, so long as the two 
forces work in equilibrium, the one disintegrating the 
particles exhausted by the operations of Vital Energy, 
the other replacing them with new particles, there is a 
condition of perfect health throughout the Organism. 
In the external world, the law of Equilibration does 
not require that the integrating right hand shall do no 
more than just repair the decay produced by the left, 
— for then there would be no progress; it requires 
only that each force shall obey the Life-principle to 
do just what is required of it. So, in Man, we find 
that the right hand of Light does more than the left 
during the period of growth from the foetus to the 
prime of manhood, and then the two work equally for 
a time, and then, during the period of decline from 
the prime to old age, the left does more than the right 
— yet there may be evident health during each of 
these three periods, provided the two forces precisely 
obey the Soul-superintendent. In other words, the two 
forces are the hands to tear down and build up, and 
the Soul is the head to direct, and, so long as each 
regards its proper station and duty, health is the de- 
lightful result. 

As we have seen, with the Soul in absolute control, 
and the forces in Equilibrium, disease cannot arise 
within the Organism, and when introduced from with- 
out there is at once apparent a strong tendency to cast 



LIGHT THE SOLE SOURCE OF LIFE, ETC. 303 

out the evil influence by restoring the disturbed Equi- 
librium. Hence, Soul-culture is of incalculable ad- 
vantage from a purely physical point of view, as an 
invaluable means of promoting health. But, even the 
most-highly developed Soul does not insure physical 
health, and Nature cannot always preserve or restore 
equilibrium within the Organism ; often Nature de- 
mands assistance, and it is our duty to render her all 
the aid we can, for, as we know, the care of the body 
is a duty second only to the cultivation of the Soul. 
Of course, to render acceptable and effective assist- 
ance, we must understand the Organism and Nature's 
ways of working therein ; if we do not possess this 
essentiak knowledge, we may thwart and hinder Na- 
ture — we may increase the disturbance of equilibrium 
so 'that it cannot be restored at all — we may kill in- 
stead of assisting Nature to cure. It is to render 
timely assistance to Nature in the cure of disease men 
are educated to become Physicians, and if special, spe- 
cific training is needful to enable a man to become 
a master-carpenter, a capable machinist, a successful 
merchant, or to succeed in any pursuit, much more is 
it absolutely essential, indispensable to enable a man 
to become a Physician — not only because his work is 
the care of bodies created by God for the manifesta- 
tion of His glory, but because he can only see his 
work in its effects, and then when the effects are evi- 
dent it may be too late to rectify a mistake. It re- 
quires no argument to demonstrate the importance of 
a thoroughly trained and educated Medical Ministry, 
and yet how many are far less careful in the selection 
of a Physician than in the selection of a mechanic. 



304 



BLUE AND RED LIGHT. 



When we learn that Nature works under the one 
law of Compensation and Equilibration, and that, 
when disease indicates the disturbance of this law, she 
at once seeks to banish the disease by restoring Equi- 
librium—we should render assistance on the same 
plan. When we learn that Light is the only means 
she employs in all her operations, and that Light is 
her only remedy for disease — we should strive to learn 
how we may best assist her by applying the same rem- 
edy. The ancients knew far more about the thera- 
peutic properties of Light — as of the causal workings 
of Light in every particular — than we have yet dis- 
covered. 

But we believe the great learning of the ancients 
will yet be equalled in these later times, and that the 
entire Science of Light will be made plain. The 
Light shines, and we reap its benefits, we know not 
fully how, as yet — the darkness comprehends it not! 
But the day is dawning, the Light of Truth is burst- 
ing through the clouds of prejudice and error and all 
evil. Not only the prevalent conceptions of Pathol- 
ogy and Therapeutics, but of all branches of Science, 
even, it may be, of Theology, shall ere long be swept 
away, and the Light of Truth, the Light of Life, the 
Light of Heaven, shall illumine the whole earth, to 
the glory of God and the temporal and Eternal well- 
being of Man! 



GOD IS LIGHT 



INDEX 



" Accepted " theories unsatisfactory, 
62. 

Actinic element of Light Dissolves 
solid forms, and prepares the Atoms 
and Molecules for the Polar Red, 
249. 

Acute Diseases require more Power- 
ful Remedies, 236. 

Adonai substituted in reading for Je- 
hovah, 46. 

Advice to the "Nervous" and those 
troubled with the " Blues," 264. 

Albumen, 172. 

Albuminous Compounds, 171. 

Ancient Philosophy and Modern Sci- 
ence, 155. 

Ancients Peculiarly Expert in Em- 
ploying Light as Medicine, 253. 

Angle of Declination, 123. 

Animal Magnetism, the Discovery of, 
Wrongly Ascribed to Mesmer, 2*13. 

Antagonistic Forces, 142. 

Antipathetic System, 234, 258. 

Antiquity of the Kabbala, 17. 

Apocalypse of John proves him a Kab- 
balist, 32. 

Assisting Nature, 303. 

Astral Suns, 34, 41,43. 

Atmosphere under a Clouded and a 
Serene Sky, (Table, 109), 108. 

Atoms Miniatures of the Earth, 125. 

Atoms Angular in Inorganic, Sphe- 
roidal in Organic matter, 124, 145. 

Atoms, the Polarity of, 124. 

Attraction and Repulsion known to 
Pythagoras, 50. 

Attraction and Repulsion of Electri- 
cities, 111. 

Authority of Organs, 190 to 191, 194, 
201, 218, 252. 

Authority of the Soul, 229. 

Ball-Lightning, 113. 

Baths of greater or less Power, and 
greater or less Duration, 267. 

Bethesda, the " Miracle of," 30. 

Bible and the Kabbala, 23, 54, 241. 

Bible Full of Kabbalistic Terms, 245. 

Black the absence of Color, or the 
presence of two or more inharmo- 
nious Colors, 75. 

Blue and Red Light Treatment com- 
bined, 280, 281. 

Blue and Red Rays the entire Materia 
Medica of Light Treatment, 268, 269. 

Blue Bath, the Proportions Most De- 
sirable. 272. 



Blue Bath, we Seldom Employ a Pure, 
272. 

Blue Glass a Non-Conductor of Elec- 
tricity, 274. 

Blue Glass better than Violet, 268. 

Blue Glass Cures, 274 to 282. 

Blue Glass, When we use, 270. 

Blue, Indigo and Violet, the, the Neg- 
ative Rays, 81. 

Blue-made Glass Better than Painted, 
273. 

Blue Ray cannot be Focalized, 273. 

Blue Ray cannot Usurp the place of 
the Red, or Yellow, or Colorless Ca- 
lorific, or even of the' Green, etc., 
286, 293. 

Blue Ray cannot Sustain Life in any 
form, 289. 

Blue Ray, the Character and Action 
of the, Clearly Explained, 270, 272. 

Blue Relaxes the Nerve-tension by 
decreasing the Polarization of the 
too-tense Ganglion or Nerves, 267. 

Bluish silver of Clouds, 78, 80. 

Body, the, an Aggregation of Millions 
of Cells, 255. 

Body, the Material, Analyzed, 183. 

Book of Nature and the Bible, 300. 

Book of Nature the only True Source 
of Pathology and Therapeutics, 239. 

"Bright and Morning Star" of John, 
246. 

Calorific Substances, or Heat-Pro- 
ducers, 169. 

Cancers, Scrofulous Affections, Ulcers, 
Skin-diseases, Morbid Growths, 260. 

Capillaries, 211. 

Carbonic acid Exhalation, 148. 

Casein, 173. 

Cases Cited, 274 to 282. 

Causes and Effects from the Begin- 
ning, 131. 

Cautions and Advice, 264. 

Celestialized Mind must conduce to 
Bodily Health, 229. 

Celestial Light Individualized, 226. 

Celestial or Soul World, 40. 

Celestial or Subjective Light, 63. 

Celestial Sun, 25. 

Celestial Sunlight the Original, Per- 
petual Source of Vital Dvnamics, 
135. 

Cell, each, of an Aggregation no 
longer lives or can live Independ- 
ently, 186, 256. 

Cells, Granular Base and Nuclei, 199. 



26 



U 



305 



306 



INDEX. 



Cell, the Simple, the Type and Base 
of Organization, 146, 185. 

Centre of Centres of Vitality, 187. 

Centre of Vitality Essential, 186. 

Cerebellum, 200. 

Cerebral Meningitis, with Strong In- 
dications of Effusion, Cured by Blue 
Light-Case Cited, 278. 

Cerebro-Spinal System, 202, 263. 

Cerebrum, 200. 

" Change of Life," see Case X., 281. 

Cholera and Gastro-enteric Diseases 
promoted by Excessively Negative 
condition of the Air, 109, 259. 

Cholera Infantum and Marasmus, 
Hopeless Case of, Cured . by Blue 
Glass— Case Cited, 277. 

Cholera never attacks Men working 
in Copper, 115. 

Cholesterin, 180. 

Chondriu, 178. 

Christ our Example in Life-culture 
and our Helper, 300. 

Christ promised immediately after the 
Fall, 44. 

Christ the Living Embodiment of 
Light, 191, 300. 

Christ the Perfect Fulfilment of Je- 
hovah's Original Purpose, 216. 

Christ " the Son of God," 161, 300. 

Chronic Diseases require Mild Rem- 
edies, 236. 

Circulatory Course of the Chyle, 198. 

"Civil Service Reform," 224. 

Classification of Nervous Centres, 200. 

Classification of Organic Constituents 
of the Human Organism, 169, 171. 

Classification of Organs, 188, 189, 193. 

Clothing must be White, or of the 
same Color as that applied, 268. 

Cloud-light, 77, 80. 

Cobalt Blue the Best, 273. 

Colored Spectacles and Eye-glasses, 95. 

Color — Facts opposed to popular The- 
ories, 74. 

Colors of Objects, 72, 73. 

Colors of Sunlight, 81. 

Commentators, Difficulties of Ordi- 
nary, 30, 245. 

Compass, Some Uses of the, 122. 

Compass, the, Known in the Second 
Century, 123. 

Compensation and Equilibration the 
Condition of Health, 227, 257, 301. 

Congestive Chill, 260. 

Conscience, 191, 200, 209. 

Consciousness, 151, 190. 

Constituents of the Actual Living 
. Tissues, 169. 

Consumption and Kindred Diseases, 
259. 

Consumption in the Third Stage, with 
Both Lungs Involved, Cured by Red 
Baths— Case Cited, 275 to 277. 

Contrast between the Motive in Man 
and Animal, 218. 

Creation Coeval with Time, 296, 297. 



Creation Development, 137. 
Creation in " Six Days," 134. 
Creation, What, was Designed for, 297, 
Cultivation Development, 137. 
Cures by Red and Blue Light— Cases 
Cited, 274 to 282. 

Darkness, the World of, 43. 

Dark Soul, the, 39, 157. 

" Dark Valley of the Shadow of Death" 
Illuminated, 220. 

Darwinism Repudiated, 128. 

Dawn and Twilight, 77, 80. 

"Daystar," of Peter, 246. 

Death and Decay necessary to Phys- 
ical Life, 127. 

Death an Entire Depolarization of 
Nerve-tension, 258. 

Decay and Regeneration continually 
going on, 127. 

Decay the Ultimate Depolarization 
of the Life-forms, 258. 

Diamagnetic bodies Electric, 121. 

Differences between Still and Active 
Life, 142, 204, 285. 

Differences in Action between Ganglia 
and between Nerves, 207. 

Difficulties of Scientists in defining 
Light. 61. 

Direct Mode of Applying the Red and 
Blue Rays, 266. 

Disease an Abnormal Disturbance of 
Polarity, Excessive Polarization or 
Excessive Depolarization, 258. 

Diseases caused by Excess of either 
Electricity, 112. 

Diseases with little or no Inflamma- 
tion, -259. 

Dissent from "Accepted" Theories, 
62, 265. 

Diurnal Variations in Electric ten- 
sion (see Plate III., p. 105), 104. 

Divine origin of the Kabbala, 26. 

Draper, What Professor, has Demon- 
strated, 288. 

" Dry land," 132. 

Dual Forces of Light, 203. 

Dual Functions of some Organs, 192. 

Duality of the Human Soul, 34, 37. 

Duty, 159, 300. 

Dymanual Life-principle more Essen- 
tial than Seed, 291. 

Eabth, How created, 45, 85, 132. 

Earth, the, a Magnet, 121, 122. 

Educated Physicians Indispensable, 
303. 

Education of our day Seriously Wrong, 
222, 245. 

Effects of American Excess in Busi- 
ness Application, 262. 

Electric and Magnetic bodies, 124. 

Electricities, the two, are the Two 
Forces of Light, 100. 

Electricity and Magnetism defined, 
99,119, 121. 

Electricity, How a flash of, travels, 112. 



INDEX. 



307 



Electricity known to the Ancients in 
its Source and Phenomena, 97. 

Electricity not the Agent of Light in 
promoting Vegetable Growth, 289. 

Electricity of the Violet Ray, 289. 

Electricity, Source of, 99, 100. 

Electro-Magnetic Current in at the 
Poles, out at the Equator, illus- 
trated, 123. 

"Emission Theory" discarded by " au- 
thorities," 64. 

Empirics and Quacks, 254. 

Equator of a Magnet, 120. 

Equilibration, the Law of, 227. 

Equilibrium is Health, 196, 235. 

Equilibrium of Organs, Nerves, Mus- 
cles, Fluids, etc., 255. 

Eternity alone in the Celestial World, 
hence no time, 297. 

Ether neither a fluid nor a solid, nor 
yet a gas, 64. 

Ether, the Hyle of the Ancients, 63, 64. 

Ether the only perfectly transparent 
substance, 75. 

Ether-wires, temporarily polarized for 

v the transmission of Light, 70, 71. 

" Everlasting Light," 162. 

Everv Created thing a Manifestation 
of Light, 251, 301. 

Evolution, Material, 13S. 

Evolution of Animals, 133, 150. 

Evolution of Life, 138, 139, 185, 216. 

Evolution of Vegetation, 133. 

Evolution of Whales, etc., 133. 

Evolution, Progress, Development, a 
Caution concerning, 128. 

Excrementitious Substances, 169, 181. 

Experiments Confirm Teachings of 
the Ancients, 253. 

Experiments with Red, Blue and Vio- 
let Glass, 268. 

External Causes of Disease, 261. 

Fact, a Scientific, to take the place 
of the " Emission " and " Wave " 
theories, 69-72. 

Facts and Theories of Science, 56, 60. 

Fallacy of some Popular Theories of 
Light, 248. 

Fall of Man and its Consequences, 43, 
161, 225. 

Fibrin the most Important of the Al- 
bumen Group, 174. 

Fire, God manifests Himself in, 42. 

Fire-worshippers, so-called, 43. 

Flaming Pentagram, the, the "Star 
of Bethlehem," 31, 32. 

Forked-Lightning, 113. 

Fuel of the Sun's intense Incandes- 
cence, 91. 

Functional Diseases result more or 
les3 directly from Derangement of 
the Nervous System, 203, 254, 257. 

Galen's School and Paracelsus, 238. 
Gelatin, Not an Atom of, in the Blood 
or Healthy Fluids, 178. 



Gelatinous Compounds, 176. 

Germination, the Process of, in Vege- 
table Life, 291. 

Gladstone, What Mr., has Demon- 
strated, 288. 

Glass, Light passing through, 82. 

Glass made transparent chiefly to one 
Color, 76. 

Glass, Red and Blue, 266. 

Globe of the Sun chiefly Water, 91. 

Globulin. 174. 

Glow-Lightning, 113. 

Glucose, ISO. 

Glutin, 177. 

God in Nature, 125. 

" God is Light," 241. 

God still manifesting Himself in 
Light, 20, 129, 130, 301. 

God's Two Revelations, 300. 

Gold, Fluid and Potable, 234. 

Gravity at the visible boundary of 
the S'un, 90. 

Greeks and Romans not " the An- 
cients," 97. 

HiEMATiN the Representative of the 
Polar Force of Light, 175, 176. 

Hsematoidin, 176. 

Hahnemann and Homeopathy, 239. 

Harmony absolute in Heaven, 29, 136, 
156. 

Harmony, "God's unique law," 27. 

Harmony, illustrations of, 27. 

Harmony in Heaven, in the Celestial 
Light, in the Universal System, in 
the Solar Systems, 225. 

Harmony in Nature, 28. 

Harmony in the Moral World, 29. 

Harmony in the Universal and Solar 
Systems, 27, 88. 

Harmony of the Kabbala, 26. 

Harmony, the Law of, relaxed by God 
for our good, 41, 59. 

Healthful Season, 112. 

Healthy Physical Life a regular Po- 
larization and Depolarization, 258. 

Heat in the Earth, in the Bodies of 
Animals, in the Human Organism, 
and Everywhere, " Evolved" or Gen- 
erated only by Light, 290. 

Heat-Lightning, 113. 

Heaven not to be discovered by the 
aid of the Telescope, 93, 157. 

Hereditary Taints, 262. 

Histogenetic Substances, or Tissue- 
Creators, 169. 

Hogeboom, Dr. Chas. L., in Appletons' 
Cyclopedia, defines light, 61. 

Homely Foundation, 202. 

Homeopath, 234, 238. 

How Color is imparted, 72, 74. 

How Light travels, 70. 

How Sunlight affects the Atmosphere, 
77, 80. 

How the Earth was Enabled to " bring 
forth " Vegetation, 291. 

How to Color Glass, 76. 



308 



INDEX. 



How to Elevate the Standard of Moral 

Eight, 223. 
Human Organism only an Objective 

Manifestation of the Soul, 252. 
Human Soul, the, 34. 
Hydrogen the Negative Polarization 

of Ether, 132. 
Hyle the Ancient Name for Ether, 

129. 

Illumination, 36, 37, 157, 219. 

Illustration of Action and Derange- 
ment of the Sympathetic Nervous 
System, 210. 

Illustration of Nerve Action, 208. 

Illustration of the Authority of the 
Higher Organs, 208. 

Illustration of the Principle that 
dictates Strength of Remedies, 237. 

Illustrative Circle of Nerve-tension 
Described, 259. 

Imagination, Influence of, on Health 
and on action of Medicines, 228. 

" Impulse and Tension," 69-72. 

Indigo Ray, 81. 

Ineffable Name, the, of God, 46. 

Inflammatory Diseases, 259. 

Inorganic Constituents of the Human 
Organism, 163 to 168. 

Inspiration of the Bible and of the 
Kabbala, 55. 

Instinct and Consciousness of Ani- 
mals, 151, 190. 

Intellect, 190. 

Intelligence, 25, 151. 

Interesting Ancient Ideas of the 
Colors, 247. 

Intimate Relations of Ganglia and 
their Systems, 208. 

Iron in the Human Organism, 167. 

Isis, " Clothed with the Sun," etc. the 
" wonder in Heaven " of John's 
Vision, (See Frontispiece), 246. 

Isis, Lifting the Veil of, 33. 

Jah, or Yah, 47. 

Jahveh or Yahveh (rniT) the cor- 
rect vocalization of the Ineffable or 
Four-Letter Name of God, 47. 

Jehovah or Yehovah /mrP) the 
Ineffable Name of God, 46. 

Jehovah the Everlasting Light, 162. 

Jehovah the One Self-Existent, Inde- 
pendent Life, 130, 185. 

Jupiter, 87. 

Kabbala and Kabbalistic teachings — 
the assistance that they have ren- 
dered and that they might render 
to " discoverers," 89. 

Kabbala, debt of the world of all ages 
to the, 17. 

Kabbala, ignorance in reference to 
the, 17. 

Kabbala, Source of the, 18, 27. 

Kabbala, the, an authorized Interpre- 



ter and Expounder of Nature and 
the Bible, 23, 54, 245. 

Kabbala, the, comprehends Religion 
and Philosophy, 19. 

Kabbalistic Pictures in the Bible con- 
trasting the Righteous with the 
Wicked, 221. 

Kabbalistic Theosophy, Light the 
foundation of, 19. 

Kabbalist, the, recognizes God's Will 
as Supreme, just as truly as the most 
"Orthodox" Theologian, 129. 

Key to Kabbalistic Symbolism, 19, 25, 
46. 

Kingdoms of Nature, 141. 

Knowing One's Self, 159. 

Lactic Acid, 181. 

Lassitude, Relaxation, 258. 

"Liber de Causis, or the Book of 
Causes," 23. 

Life cannot Cease, 299. 

Life-Kingdoms of Nature, 146. 

Life of Heaven and Earth Contrasted, 
226, 301. 

Life-principle, the, and the two Objec- 
tive Hands of Light, 206, 291, to 
293. 

Light and Fire, 41. 

Light and its Color rays, Kabbalistic 
knowledge of, 33. 

Light and its Rays Invaluable Cura- 
tives, 253. 

Light and its Rays unrivalled in Ma- 
teria Medica, 93, 282. 

Light a sublime aggregation of Mar- 
velous Virtues, 94. 

Light a unit, 67, 249. 

Light began and continues Creation, 
297. 

Light begot and maintains Time, 297. 

"Light, Children of," 36, 37, 157. 

Light-conductors, 70. 

Light does not lend but gives ("fixes") 
Color, 74. 

Light God's agent in Creation and 
Providence, 54, 131. 

Light " in the Beginning," Now and 
Hereafter, 242. 

Light invisible, 62. 

Light is Life, 251. 

Light not Spirit, 58. 

" Light is Saturated with Life," 248. 

Light must Triumph over Prejudice, 
254. 

Light Nature's Specific, 295. • 

Light of Life, the, is Eternal— Immor- 
tal 299. 

Light Quacks, 273. 

Light, Scientific "authorities" in 
trouble about the nature of, 60, 61. 

Light Soul, the, 39. 

Light, Subjective and Objective, the 
distinction, 38, 63. 

Light the first and still the Manifes- 
ter of God, 130. 

Light the Fountain of Life, 58. 



IKDEX. 



309 



Light the Great Electro-Magnetic Po- 
larizer, 124. 

Light, the laws of, comprehend the 
laws of Nature, 57, 58. 

Light, the nature of, 59 to 62. 

Light, the ouly, independent of the 
Sun, 78. 

Light, the positive Power or Force in 
Nature, 62. 

Light the universal Medicine of the 
Ancients, 59. 

Light, the, we see is the Apparition of 
Celestial Light, 63. 

Light to become the Universal Med- 
icine, 282. 

Light, transmission of ("accepted" 
theories rejected), 64, 70. 

Light, undivided, undiluted for those 
in Health, and its Red and Blue 
Rays for the Sick, 95. 

Lightning (see Chapter III.), 104, 107, 
110, 111,115. 

Lightning, but one kind of, 113. 

Lightning-rods were used Four Cen- 
turies before Christ, 97. 

Lightning understood by the An- 
cients, 97. 

Lime in the Human Organism, 165. 

Limit of our Sun's Vital or Creative 
Energy, 136. 

Liver the chief Fat-factory, 179. 

Lockjaw, 260. 

Lumiuiferous ether, 64. 

Magnetic and Electric bodies, 124. 

Magnetic Meridian, 122. 

Magnetism and Electricity one Mani- 
festation of Light in two Aspects, 
109, 119, 121. 

Magnetism, How, is produced, 115, 
120, 121. 

Magnetism is Electricity Equili- 
brated, 100. 

Magnetizing, 120. 

Magnets, Magnetic bodies, etc., 120, 
121. 

Man " born blind," 44, 157. 

Man Excels all other Created Beings, 
143, 159, 214. 

Man's Bodv "the Temple of the Liv- 
ing God," 299. 

Man not a Corruptible Body, but an 
Immortal Soul, 299. 

Man's Lamp "Trimmed and Burn- 
ing," 220. 

Man's Subjective Eye Opened, 219. 

Man the "Light of Life" in Objective 
Manifestation, 298. 

Man the only Responsible Creature, 
299. 

Marasmus and Cholera Infantum, 
Hopeless Case of, Cured by Blue 
Baths— Case Cited, 277. 

Margarin, 179. 

Mars, 86. 

Masouic Symbols Kabbalistic, 18. 

Masterpiece of Creative Skill, 160. 



Material Forms developed Simply and 
Solely to Manifest Light, 251. 

Materialism of Ordinary Evolution 
Theory, 140. 

Materia Medica of Light System, 269. 

Means Adapted to the End, 238. 

Medical Ministry, 303. 

Medicines Prepared under the Red 
and Blue Rays, 265. 

Medulla Oblongata, 200. 

Mercury, 86. 

Mesmer's Rediscovery, 214. 

Mineral Kingdom, 144. 

Mistakes of General Pleasonton, 283 
to 294. 

Mistakes of Scientists, 57, 60. 

Moisture, Influence of, upon Electric 
condition of the Atmosphere, 108. 

Morbid Growths, 260. 

Most Trying Case, where there was 
no Constitutional foundation to 
build on, see Case X., 281. 

Motion is Life, 203. 

Mutual Dependence of Organs, 201. 

Mystics — the extent of their Know- 
ledge of Light, Heat, Electricity, 
etc., 56, 129. 

Name, the Four-letter, of God, the 
Key to the Kabbala, 25, 46. 

Natural System to Supplant both Al- 
lopathy and Homeopathy, 238. 

Nature must work Two-handed, 230. 

Nature owes its every form and fea- 
ture of Life to Light, the Unit, 86. 

Nature's Own Specifics, 248. 

Nature, Laws of, change not, 57, 131. 

Nebulse Nuclei of New Worlds, 135. 

Negative condition of the Earth's sur- 
face neutralized, 108, 116. 

Negative Electricity from Negative 
Rays, 102. 

Neptune, 88. , 

Nerve Force Denned, 204, 211, 213, 215, 
258, 261. 

Nerves Conductors of Vital Force or 
Energy, 204, 212. 

Nervous Affections, 258. 

Nervousness and General Prostration, 
with Irritability, Variable Appetite, 
Variable Bowels, Sleepless Nights — 
Very Trying Case, Cured by Blue 
and Red Light Treatment— Case 
cited, 280. 

Nervous Prostration and General Re- 
laxing of System, Very Trying Case 
of, Cured by Red Light — Case cited, 
278 to 280. 

Nervous System, 199 to 215. 

Nervous System Broken Down, and 
little or no Hope or Interest, Con- 
stitution naturally frail, and al- 
together a case to defy ordinary 
treatment — Cured by Red and Blue 
Baths alternating— Case cited, 281. 

Nervous System Centre of Vital En- 
ergy, and therefore of Disease, 257. 



310 



INDEX. 



Nervous System Shattered, see Case 
IX., 280. 

Neuralgia, Rheumatism and other In- 
flammatory Diseases, 259. 

Newton and the Kabbala, 50, 57, 60. 

Nine Organic Systems, 188, 200. 

No Constitution— Weak and Delicate 
from youth, see Case X., 281. 

No Invariable Standard for Doses, 
279. 

North Pole, the, Positive, 122. 

Number of Suns and Worlds, 89. 

Nutritive Processes, 195 to 199. 

Objective Suns, 34, 41. 

Obligations to Modern Scientists ac- 
knowledged, 103. 

Occultism, thirty years' study of, and 
what we have learned, 56. 

Oleaginous Compounds, 179. 

Olein, 179. 

One God and One Life-principle, 301. 

One Light, Two Principles, Seven (or 
Nine) Rays, and Harmony or Com- 
pensation and Equilibration, 293. 

One Original Force, Light, 249, 251. 

Opposite Processes of the two Life- 
Kingdoms, 149. 

Optics but a Fragment of the Science 
of Light, 154. 

Organic Compounds in the Human 
Organism, 168 to 182. 

Organic Distinctions in two Life- 
Kingdoms, 147. 

Organization is Life, 185. 

Organs Essential to Organic Life in 
General, 195 to 199. 

Organs Peculiar to Animal Life, 199 
to 215. 

Organs that Distinguish Man from 
all other Creatures, 215 to 224. 

Overfeeding not desirable for Vegeta- 
tion any more than for Animals, 251. 

Oxidation and Deoxidation, 149. 

Oxygen the Objective Polar Force, 198. 

Oxygen the Positive Polarization of 
Ether, 132. 

Oxygen the Property of the Red Ray 
alone, not in any sense of the Blue 
or Violet, 290. 

Palpitation of the Heart and Exces- 
sive Nervous Prostration — Bedfast, 
and tending to Decline, Cured by 
Blue and Red Light Treatment — 
Case Cited, 280. 

Paracelsus's Knowledge almost Lost, 
233, 239. 

Paracelsus's two Systems, 234. 

Paralysis, Complete, 277. 

Parap'legia, an Extreme Case of, Cured 
by Red Glass— Case Cited, 277. 

Patent Medicines, 272. 

Pathology, What the Ancients Knew 
of, 233. 

Pentagram, the Flaming, the" Star of 
Bethlehem," etc., 31, 246. 



Perpetual Motion, 132, 133. 

Phiiodena roseola, 146. 

Photosphere of the Sun, 91. 

Physical Forces, Vital Forces and 
Nerve Forces, all of Light, 242. 

Phvsical Life generated in Death, 127, 
230. 

Physical Life the result of Motion, 
and manifested in a Physical Form 
or Body, 127. 

Physician Should be Consulted when 
Accessible, 272. 

Physicists Theorize too much and 
Study the Ancient Philosophy too 
little, 100. 

"Pillar of Hercules," 51. 

Plain Statement, 137. 

Plato's Enigma, 50. 

Plea for Pleasonton — he has Redis- 
covered a Great Truth, 283, 284. 

Pleasontonian Ideas, Some Absurd, 
288. 

Pleasontou's Success and Draper and 
Gladstone's Failures, 250, 287. 

Polarity, 203. 

Positive Electricity ether tensely po- 
larized, 100. 

Positive Electricity from Positive 
Ray, 102. 

Prism, the, 81. 

Processes of Creation realized, 134. 

Progress of Life-unfoldmeut, from 
Black to Red— Decline, from Red to 
Black (with Illustration), 247, 248. 

Proportions of the Rays, and of the 
Positive and Negative Principles, 84. 

Protein-Compounds, 171. 

Psychical Functions Cultivated at ex- 
pense of the Subjective, 221. 

Pure Light ! Pure Air ! Pure Water ! 
294. 

Purpose of God, 138. 

Pythagoras and his views, 46, 49. 

Quacks and Humbugs, 272. 
Quetelet's Observations (Table, p. 107), 
106, 109. 

Rainbow, the, 80. 

Reciprocal Influences of Soul and 
Physical Health, 228. 

Red Accelerates the Nerve Force, In- 
creases Tension, 267. 

Red and Blue the only independent 
Colors, 92. 

Red and Blue the only Rays we con- 
sider Desirable in Disease" 268, 269. 

Red Attraction, Blue and associates 
Repulsion, 249. 

Red Bath, the Proportions most De- 
sirable, 271. 

Red Bath, we Seldom Employ the, 
without More or Less of the other 
Rays, 271. 

Red Color of the Blood, 176. 

Redemption the Crowning Act of 
Creation, 300. 



INDEX. 



311 



Bed Glass Cures, 275 to 282. 

Red Light an Exceptionally Reliable 
Remedy for Consumption in almost 
its Fatal Stage, 276. 

Red Ray can be Focalized Only by a 
Suitable Lens, 274. 

Red Ray, the Character and Action 
of the, clearly Explained, 269, 271. 

Red, the Positive Polar Ray, 81, 268. 

Refraction and the comparative Re- 
frangibility of Rays, 82. 

Regeneration, Moral and Spiritual, of 
Man, 219. 

Religion and Science one, 19. 

Repulsion superior to Attraction, 
when. 136. 

Responsibility, 217. 

Rest, Absolute, is Death, 128. 

" Revelations of St. John the Divine," 
Kabbalistic character of, 32, 245. 

Revolution in Pathology and Thera- 
peutics, 254. 

Rheumatism, 259. 

Rheumatism, Remarkable Cure of, by 
Blue Glass, 275. 

Ronalds at Kew, Observations of Elec- 
tric tension critically exact, 104. 

Saccharine Compounds, 180. 

Saliva and Gastric Juice, 197. 

Salt in the Human Organism, 167. 

Satan and the Woman's Seed, 44. 

Saturn, 87. 

Saul (or Paul) on the way to Damas- 
cus, 26. 

Schellen's confession, 60. 

Schellen's Definition of Light ("the 
vibration of a substance"), 61. 

Schonbein's theory, nearly correct,101. 

Sciatica of several years' standing 
Cured byBlue Baths — Case cited, 274. 

Science Defined by Walker and by 
Ganot, 153. 

Science does not contradict the Bible 
or the Kabbala, 54. 

Science not Dependent on Scientists 
for its Truths or Facts, 283. 

Scoffing at the Ancient Sages, 232. 

Scrofulous Affections, 260. 

Seed or Germ and Soil Essentials, but 
less so than Vital Energy, 134, 135. 

" Selective Absorption" explained and 
shown to be a fallacy, 73. 

Self-Consciousness, 191, 200. 

Sensibility, 190. 

Sensory Ganglia, 200. 

" Sepher Jetzera, or Book of the Crea- 
tion," 21. 

Sephiroth, the Ten, description of, 24 
to 46, 49 to 52 (see 244). 

Sephiroth, the Ten, the Kabbalistic 
svmbol of the Universe, 24. 

Sephiroth, the Unity of, 27. 

Seroliu, 180. 

Seven, 247. 

"Seven Stars" of the Apocalypse, the 
Seven Rays, 247. 



Sewerage of the Human Organism,181. 
Sheet-Lightning, 113. 
" Six Days " of Creation, 134, 135, 242. 
"Six Periods of Time," 134, 242. 
Skin-Diseases. 260. 
Skv, the, and its Color, 77, 80. 
Sky, the, and its Functions, 289. 
" Sohar, or Book of Light," 21. 
Solar Spectrum, 81, 82. 
Solar System, 49, 85 to 88. 
Solomon a Kabbalist, 243, 244. 
Solomon's Temple, 18. 
Sophia, "Wisdom," the wondrous wo- 
man of John's vision, 32 (see Front- 

iSDlGC©) 

Soul, Duality of the Human, 34, 37. 
Soul Personification of Light, 252. 
Soul, the Human, the Individualized 

Life Centre, 187, 192, 228. 
Soul, the, is the Head, the Objective 

Nerve Force the two Hands, 302. 
Soul, the, the Pilot, Captain and En- 
gineer of the Human Machine, 1S8. 
South Pole, the, Negative, 122. 
Space filled with Nothing, 129. 
Special Sense, 190. 

Spectrum Analysis not conclusive, 92. 
Spectrum of the Electric Flash, 117. 
Spinal Cord, 201. 

Spontaneous Vitality of Fibrin, 175. 
" Star of the East," 246. 
Stearin, 179. 
Stimulants, Nature's, all-sufficient for 

Healthy Life, 294. 
Straight-Lightning, 113. 
Strain of Vital Action, 195. 
Subacute Diseases require Medium 

Remedies, 236. 
Subacute Rheumatism of several 

years' standing Cured by Blue Baths 

—Case Cited, 274. 
Subjective Faculties of the Soul, 35, 

191, 200, 217, 218, 221, 300. 
Subjective Life-principle an Integral 

part of Man, 217. 
Subjective Organs, 189, 191, 200. 
Sublime Law of Physical, Mental and 

Moral Health and Life, 158. 
Succession of Types in the Kingdoms, 

142, 150. 
Successive Evolution of Organs, 189 

to 191. 
Successive Stages of Creation, 138. 
Sugar in the Human Organism, 180. 
Sunlight analyzed, 78, 79, 80. 
Sunlight, Pure, Undivided, Undiluted, 

Best for Health, 287, 293. 
Sunlight the Direct Actor in Plant- 
life, 147. 
Sunlight to become the Universal 

Medicine, 282. 
Sunlight united, not one Ray or two, 

286, 293. 
" Sun of Righteousness," Christ the, 

40, 157. 
Sun, Our, an objective manifestation 

of God, 131, 



312 



INDEX. 



Suns, the Astral or Objective — What 
they are, of what made, what the 
nature of their Luminosity, Whence 
they derive their Light, and how 
they disseminate it, 88, 89. 

Sun, the extent of the domain of our, 
85, 86. 

Surroundings must Favor not Hinder 
the end sought, 268. 

Survey of the Ground Traversed, and 
Facts noted, 295 to 304. 

Syllipsis or Luminous Synthesis, 248. 

Symbolism of the Colors, with An- 
cient Illustration, 247, 248. 

Sympathetic Ganglia, 201. 

Sympathetic Nervous System, 201, 202, 
209, 260. 

Sympathetic, the, Medical System 
"more Rational than the Antipa- 
thetic, 235, 239, 258. 

Synthesis of Material Creation, 152, 
160, 194. 

Synthesis of the Universe, 152, 160, 
194. 

Talismans, 31. 

Tension is Polarity, 258. 

Tension of ether into Light-conduc- 
tors, 70, 81. 

Tension, the Comparative, of the 
several Rays, and why the Red is 
the most and the Yiolet the least 
tense, 82, 83. 

"Tension Theory" explained, 71 (see 
" Impulse and Tension "). 

Tenure of Life on the Planet Uranus, 
87. 

Tetanus, or Lockjaw, 260. 

"Tetractys," the, of Pythagoras de- 
scribed, 46 to 49. 

Theories onlyadmissible where Know- 
ledge is unattainable, 69. 

Therapeutics, What the Ancients 
Knew of, 233. 

•Thermic property of the Violet Ray, 
Imaginary, 288. 

Thunder— what it is, 110, 111. 

Time a measure of Physical Life, 297. 

Time and Creation belong only to the 
Material World, 297. 

Time and Creation Coeval. 296. 

Time shall Cease, 297. 

Time the Measure of Creation, 134. 

Tissues of the Ganglia and Nerves, 206. 

Transparencv— what it is, 75. 

" Tree of Life," the, 50, 244. 

True Doctrine of Evolution or De- 
velopment, 137. 

Two hands of Deity, 25. 

Two Methods of Applying Light, 264. 

Tyndall definition of Light (" the sen- 
sation of light "), 60. 

Tyndall unable to declare the Origin 
of Magnetism, 122. 

Types of Evolution, 138. 

Typhus, Typhoid, and other Malarial 
and Sluggish Fevers, 259. 



Ulcers, 260. 

"Undulatory Theory," see "Wave 

Theory." 
Unfoldment of Life, 139, 185, 216. 
Unity of Light fatal to the " Wave 

Theory," 69. 
Unity with Diversity of Nature, 152. 
Uranus, 87. 
Uterine Difficulties, see Case X., 281. 

Vacuum in Nature, 63. 

Vapors absorb two-thirds of the Ca- 
lorific Ray, 108, 114. 

Variations in Electricity (see Plate 
III., p. 105), 104 to 108. 

Vascularity of the Ganglia, 206. 

Venus, 86. 

Vesuvius, the Vapor from the Crater 
of, 110. 

"Vibrations" of ether, see "Wave 
Theory," and pp. 66, 67. 

Violet Ray, not a Combination of 
Blue and Red, 2S8. 

Violet Ray, see Blue, Indigo and 
Violet. 

Vital Dynamics, 134. 

Vital Food, 198. 

Volta and the Voltaic Battery — an in- 
teresting Query, 55. 

Water a powerful Absorber of Posi- 
tive Electricity, 109. 
Water Everywhere and in Everything, 

41, 116, 163, 165. 
Water Generated by the Sun, 85, 132. 
" Wave Theory" of the " authorities" 

explained and shown to be entirely 

unsatisfactory, 64 to 69. 
Weakness of Man Physically, 139. 
What we Believe, and" Know, 232. 
Wheat cannot grow under Blue Glass 

alone, 250. 
White the harmonious combination 

of all the Colors, or of two or more 

" complementary Colors," 75. 
Why the Red Ray 'is the most Heating 

and the Violet the most cooling of 

the Color-rays, 83. 
"Wisdom,'' in Hebrew Chochmah 

(HDnri). i Q Greek Sojihia (2o<£ia), 

25, 32,' 245. 
"Wise Men " of the East, of the olden 

time, 43. 
Woman's Seed, the, and Satan, 44. 
" Woman, the, clothed with the Sun," 

etc., 32 (see Frontispiece). 
World of Darkness, 225. 
Wormwood, the Star, 31. 

Yellowish cast of Clouds, 78, 80. 

Yellow, the, the most Luminous Ray, 
81. 

Zenith of Material Evolution, 152. 

Zigzag-Lightning, 113. 

Zoroaster's view of the Astral or Ob- 
jective Suns, 43. 



6 € 4 m §y 







*>. * 







^^ 






V 



'W 






^ ^ 



Oo 






vv v '/>, 









■ r- V 













,*> *<, 



















